Issuu

GIÁO ÁN CẢ NĂM ANH CHƯƠNG TRÌNH MỚI

vectorstock.com/7952556

Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú eBook Collection

DẠY KÈM QUY NHƠN LESSON PLAN PHÁT TRIỂN NỘI DUNG

English lesson plan 7 (New edition) giáo án cả năm anh 7 chương trình mới (2019-2020) Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh - THCS Hùng Vương WORD VERSION | 2021 EDITION ORDER NOW / CHUYỂN GIAO QUA EMAIL TAILIEUCHUANTHAMKHAO@GMAIL.COM

Tài liệu chuẩn tham khảo Phát triển kênh bởi Ths Nguyễn Thanh Tú Đơn vị tài trợ / phát hành / chia sẻ học thuật : Nguyen Thanh Tu Group Hỗ trợ trực tuyến Fb www.facebook.com/DayKemQuyNhon Mobi/Zalo 0905779594

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 1 Week: Class: INTRODUCTION + REVISION I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to get familiar with the subject, the ways to learn the subject well. II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : 2. Grammar: 3. Skills: Speaking and listening. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: Lesson plan, text book, work book. Students’: Notebooks, text book … II. New lesson:(35’/IW) 1. §Æc ®iÓm ch−¬ng tr×nh anh 7 míi -

Lµ ch−¬ng tr×nh tiÕng Anh ®−îc biªn so¹n tiÕp theo ch−¬ng tr×nh tiÕng Anh 6.

Quan t©m ®Õn 4 kü n¨ng nghe, nãi, ®äc, viÕt. Trong ®ã chó träng ph¸t triÓn 2 kü n¨ng: nghe, nãi. (KiÓm tra th−êng xuyªn chñ yÕu dµnh cho kü n¨ng nãi).

Vµo cuèi n¨m häc, häc sinh cÇn ®¹t tr×nh ®é t−¬ng ®−¬ng cÊp ®é A2 cña Khung tham chiÕu ch©u ¢u vÒ ng«n ng÷ (giai ®o¹n 2).

2. Ph−¬ng ph¸p häc

a. T¹i tr−êng: -

TËp chung nghe gi¶ng, nghiªm tóc lµm theo c¸c yªu cÇu cña thÇy, c«.

H¨ng h¸i ph¸t biÓu ý kiÕn x©y dùng bµi.

LuyÖn tËp nãi tiÕng Anh víi thÇy, víi b¹n bÌ, tËn dông mäi c¬ héi cã thÓ ®Ó tËp nãi tiÕng Anh. Nãi ®óng träng ©m, ng÷ ®iÖu.

N¾m v÷ng c¸c vÊn ®Ò ng÷ ph¸p ®· häc, c¸c cÊu tróc c©u. Ghi chÐp ®Çy ®ñ, chÝnh x¸c.

b. T¹i nhµ: -

¤n l¹i bµi häc ngay khi cã tiÕt häc ë líp.

Dùa vµo c¸c cÊu tróc vµ c¸c ng÷ liÖu ®· häc ®Ó luyÖn nãi tiÕng Anh cïng b¹n.

Lµm ®Çy ®ñ bµi tËp trong s¸ch bµi tËp. T×m ®äc thªm c¸c lo¹i s¸ch tham kh¶o nÕu cã thÓ.

Th−êng xuyªn häc, cñng cè vµ më réng vèn tõ cña m×nh.

ViÕt tõ míi vµ mÉu c©u hay vµo sæ tay häc tËp cña m×nh.

3. giíi thiÖu s¸ch gi¸o khoa Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

S¸ch gi¸o khoa TiÕng Anh 7 ®−îc thiÕt kÕ víi kªnh h×nh vµ kªnh tiÕng phong phó. Mçi ®¬n vÞ bµi häc ®−îc chia thµnh 7 phÇn thÝch hîp cho viÖc rÌn luyÖn c¸c kü n¨ng nghe, nãi, ®äc, viÕt, ng÷ ph¸p, ng÷ ©m vµ tõ vùng. -

PhÇn 1: Getting started: Giíi thiÖu tõ vùng vµ ng÷ ph¸p.

PhÇn 2: A closer look 1: LuyÖn tõ vùng vµ ng÷ ©m.

PhÇn 3: A closer look 2: Häc ng÷ ph¸p

PhÇn 4: Communication: Thùc hµnh nãi tiÕng Anh.

PhÇn 5: Skills 1: LuyÖn kü n¨ng ®äc, nãi

PhÇn 6: Skills 2: LuyÖn kü n¨ng viÕt, nghe.

PhÇn 7: Looking back&Project: LuyÖn tËp, cñng cè c¸c kiÕn thøc ®· häc.

III. REVISION 1. Present simple: a. Use: Thì hiện tại đơn diễn tả hành động: - thường xuyên xảy ra, lặp đi lặp lại ở hiện tại. - chân lí, sự thật hiển nhiên và những điều luôn đúng. - một trạng thái mang tính ổn định. - thời gian biểu, thời khoá biểu. - tiêu đề báo chí để chỉ các sự kiện vừa mới xảy ra. - sự việc được sắp thành lịch (giờ tàu, chiếu phim, ca nhạc....) b. Form: S + V (s,es)............... S + don't/ doesn't + V............ Do/ Does + S + V.........? c.Sign: - always, usually, often, generally, frequently, occasionally, sometimes, never, seldom, rarely.... - once/ twice/ three times.................a day/ a week/ a month........ - every + N - in the morning/ afternoon/ evening - on Monday............../ July 1st..... 2. Present progressive: a, Use: Thì hiện tại tiếp diễn diễn tả hành động: - đang diễn ra tại thời điểm nói hoặc xung quanh thời điểm nói. - hành động tương lai đã được sắp đặt sẵn. - kết hợp với always khi diễn tả sự phàn nàn về sự việc lặp đi lặp lại, làm cho người khác bực mình. b, Form: S + am/ is/ are +V-ing............... S + am/ is/ are + not + V-ing............ Am/ is/ are + S + V-ing.........?

c, Sign: - at the moment, at present, at this time, at this moment, now, right now - look/ listen/ hurry up/ be careful/ be quiet/ sssh Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

* Note: Những động từ sau không thường dùng ở hiện tại tiếp diễn: - hear, smell, feel, sound, look, taste, see........ - admire, appreciate, desire, dislike, fear, hate, like, love, mind, respect, want, wish, prefer, need - believe, expect, think, recognize, remember, forget, know, consider, understand, mean - belong, own, possess, be, have - seem, appear, contain, insist 3. Present perfect: a, Use: Thì hiện tại hoàn thành diễn tả hành động: - bắt đầu từ quá khứ, kéo dài đến hiện tại và có thể tiếp tục ở tương lai. - đã xảy ra trong quá khứ nhưng không rõ thời gian. - vừa mới xảy ra. - đã xảy ra và đã chấm dứt nhưng kết quả còn để lại hoặc liên quan đến hiện tại. - chưa bao giờ xảy ra. - lặp lại nhiều lần trong quá khứ. - dùng trong câu bình phẩm. b, Form: S + have/ has + P II............... S + have/ has + not+ P II............... Have/ has + S + P II.........?

c, Sign: - since/ for/ just/ already/ recently= lately/ ever/ never...before/ not...yet/ once/ twice/ three times..../ so far= up to now= up to the present= until now/ first time/ second time.... 4. Past simple: a, Use: Thì quá khứ đơn diễn tả hành động: - đã xảy ra và đã chấm dứt biết rõ thời gian. b, Form: S + V-ed............... S + did + not+ V............... Did + S + V.........?

c, Sign: - yesterday, last + N, ago/ then 5. Future simple: a, Use: Thì tương lai đơn diễn tả hành động: - sẽ xảy ra trong tương lai nhưng không được sắp đặt từ trước (nó được quyết định ngay lúc nói) b, Form: S + will + V............... S + won't + V............... Will + S + V.................? c, Sign: - tomorrow, next + N, tonight/ this evening/ this weekend...,soon/ some day/ one day/ some time, in + a period of time, in + a point of time in the past II. Practice: Exercise 1: Present simple or present progressive? 1. Be quiet! The baby (sleep). Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

2. We seldom (eat) before 6.30. 3. Look! a man (run) after a bus. He (want) to catch it. 4. The sun (rise) in the east and (set) in the west. 5. It (be) often hot in summer. 6. I (do) an exercise on present tenses at this moment and I (think)that I (know)how to use it now. 7. My mother sometimes (buy) vegetables at this market. 8. It (be) very cold now. 9. It (rain) much in summer. It (rain) now. 10. Daisy (cook) some food in the kitchen at present. She always (cook) in the morning. Exercise 2: Present tenses. 1. Listen! I (think) someone (knock) at the door. 2. Up to the present, we (write)almost every lesson in the book. 3. The earth (circle) the sun once every 365 days. 4. The farmers (work) in the field at the moment. 5. How many time you (see) him since he went to Edinburgh? 6. Do you know that man, who (smoke) there? 7. Mrs Green always (go) to work by bus. 8. We (be) from France. We (be) there for 20 years. 9. I (wait) for the manager for two hours but he (not come) yet. 10. You (ever/ see) a lion? IV. HOMEWORK - Learn by heart all the tenses - Look into the text book and the workbook carefully.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 2 Week: Class:

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 1: Getting started (P.6-7)

I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to listen and read for specific information about hobbies then practice listening and speaking with the lexical items related to the topic "My hobbies". II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write, understand key words about lexical items related to hobbies.: bird watching, arranging flowers, playing board games. 2. Grammar: - use of the idiom ‘It’s a piece of cake’ - The present simple and the future simple tense. - Verbs of liking + V-ing. 3. Skills: Listening, speaking about hobbies. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: text book, laptop, T.V, recording . Students’: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and students’ activities:

Content

I. Warm up: * Chatting: Teacher asks students some questions about their hobbies. - What do you like doing for pleasure in your free time? Do you like collecting dolls? Do you like collecting glass bottles? Do you enjoy mountain climbing? + What all these activities are called? - Teacher leads in the lesson. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 1: Getting started (P.6-7)

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 II. Building knowledge: 1.Listen and read: * Vocabulary T shows the pic on P.6 then raises some questions 1. Can you guess who they are? 2. Where are they? 3. What can you see on the shelf? What may the hobby be? 1. They are Nick, Elena ( Nick’s sister) and Mi 2. They are at Nick’s house 3. I can see so many dolls on the shelf. The hobby may be collecting dolls. - Teacher presents the new words - Teacher use different techniques to teach vocab (mine, picture, situation, reliable, antonym) - Ss repeat in chorus and individually - Ss copy all the words * Checking vocab: ROR T plays the recording twice. Ss listen and read. Ss practice the dialogue again ( in role). T checks some groups. T :Do you know the meaning of the idioms ‘a piece of cake’ from the conversation? Ss: It means ‘a thing that is easy to do’ T: Tell me any other idioms you know? Ss: - as easy as a pie/ as ABC = very easy, or very easily; all of a piece = all at the same time...etc... 3. Practice: Task 1: a. Are the sentences below true (T) or false (F)? T runs through the statements. Ss work independently. T allows ss to share answers with their partner. - Teacher gets feedback. b. Answer the following questions. - T asks ss to work in pairs to answers the questions in part b orally. - Ask some Ss to go to the board and write their answers. - Other Ss read the conversation and check their answers. - T corrects Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 1.Listen and read * Vocabulary -hobby - unusual - a piece of cake - mountain climbing

(n): (adj): (idiom):

Sở thích Lạ thường Dễ dàng

(n):

Leo núi

* Practice a. Are the sentences below true (T) or false (F)? 1. F (They go upstairs to her room) 2. T 3. F( Mi’s hobby is collecting glass bottles) 4. F ( Her parents, aunt and uncle) 5. T b. Answer the following questions. 1. She receives dolls on special occasions. 2. No, they aren’t. 3. She keeps them after using them. 4. No, she doesn’t. 5. No, he hasn’t. 6

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 2: 2.Listen and repeat (6’/IW). T plays the recording twice. - Ss listen to the recording and repeat the words/ phrases. - Have some Ss practise the words/ phrases out loud. Task 3: 3. Choose the words/ phrases in 2 that match the pictures below. Write them in the spaces. .(6’/PW/IW) -Ss work individually to match the words/ phrases from 2 with the pictures. Have them compare the answers with a partner - Ask for Ss’ answers - Give feedback and confirm the correct answers. T asks ss to write the correct words in the spaces. T asks some weak ss the meaning of some phrases to make sure they understand them well. Task 4: 4.Work in pairs and complete the table below. Do you think the hobbies in 3 are cheap or expensive, easy or difficult.(5’/PW) T asks ss to work in pairs and complete the table. -Ss write their answers on the board. - T may ask ss to explain their answers. - Have Ss add more words to the table.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 2.Listen and repeat.

3. Choose the words/ phrases in 2 that match the pictures below. Write them in the spaces. * Key: 1. playing board games. 2. taking photos. 3. bird-watching 4. cycling 5. playing the guitar 6. gardening 7. cooking 8. arranging flowers 9. skating

4.Work in pairs and complete the table below. Do you think the hobbies in 3 are cheap or expensive, easy or difficult.

Suggested answers : Cheap hobbies: -playing board games, gardening, birdwatching, collecting old bottles,... Expensive hobbies: -Taking photos, cycling, playing the guitar, cooking, arranging flowers, collecting watches... Easy hobbies: Playing board games, gardening, birdwatching, collecting old bottles, taking photos,... Difficult hobbies: -playing the guitar, cooking, arranging flowers, making short films... Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 4. Use: T asks ss to ask as many classmates as they can about which hobbies from 3 they like. In 3 minutes, use the question” Do you like...?” Example: A: Do you like gardening? B: No, I don’t T goes around to check. Ss who have the most name will win. T asks he/ she to read aloud the names on the list. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: - Write a short paragraph about your hobby. - Write a report using the information in the table of the game ‘Find someone who likes…’

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 Game : Find someone who...

HOMEWORK - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully. - Do B1,2,3 (P4,5) in workbook.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 3 Week: Class:

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 (P.8-9)

I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to pronounce correct the sounds / ə / and / ɜ :/ in isolation and in context; Use the combinations: to go, to collect, to do, to play, to take, to watch + the hobbies II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write, understand the lexical items related to hobbies. 2. Grammar: - The present simple . - Verbs of liking + V-ing. - action verbs combine with suitable words/ phrases describing hobbies. 3. Skills: - improve their listening skill, writing skill and pronunciation III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: Pictures related to hobbies, textbook,T.V, recording, laptop. Students’: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm up: Kim's game T asks Ss to look at the pictures on the screen in 30 seconds and try to remember as many words as possible. - T divides the class into two teams. - Ss go to the board and write the words.

Content UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 2: A Closer Look 1 (P.8-9) Game 1 * Key: - collecting stamp - bird-watching - playing the guitar ……………………….

- Teacher gets feedback -Today we are going to learn some more hobbies. 2. Building knowledge: VOCABULARY 1.Match the correct verbs with the words or phrases. Some words/ phrases may be Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

VOCABULARY 1.Match the correct verbs with the words or phrases. Some words/ phrases 9

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

used with more than one verb. (6’/PW) T asks Ss to read the action verbs in column A and match them with the suitable words/ phrases in column B. T reminds them that a verb can go with more than one word/phrase. - Ss work in pairs to compare their answers before giving teacher the answers. - T corrects and gives comments. 3. Practice: Task 1: 2: Fill in each blank in the sentences with one hobby or one action verb from the box below.(6’/PW) Ss work in pairs to do this activity. T has ss read all the sentences carefully to make sure they understand the sentences. - Ss share their answers. - T asks some ss to write the correct answers on the board. Task 2 3. Do you know what a keyword is ? Work in pairs and write down keywords to describe the hobbies in the table below. You can use the words in the sentences from 2 to help you.(6’/PW) T asks Ss some questions to check Ss’ understanding. T explains that a keyword helps Ss understand a text quickly and it is usually a noun, a verb, an adjective or an adverb. T models the way to locate keywords for ‘listening to music’. Ss : Pair-work T asks some Ss to write on the board, then check their answers.

may be used with more than one verb. * Key. 1. i,d,e 2. g 3. b,c, j 4. f,h 5. c 6. a

Task 3: PRONUNCIATION / ə / and / ɜ :/ 5: Listen and tick the words you hear. Repeat the words. (6’/IW) -T has some Ss to read out the words first. -T plays the recording - Ss listen and tick the words they hear. - T checks and calls some weak ss to read again.

PRONUNCIATION / ə / and / ɜ :/ 5: Listen and tick the words you hear. Repeat the words. *Key: bird-watching √ answer √ away √ neighbour √ burn s ger √ hurt √ heard √ Birth √ common

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

2: Fill in each blank in the sentences with one hobby or one action verb from the box below. *Key: 1. Swimming, swim 2. Listen, listening to music 3. Plant, gardening 4. Catch, fishing 5. Painting, paints 3. Do you know what a keyword is ? Work in pairs and write down keywords to describe the hobbies in the table below. You can use the words in the sentences from 2 to help you. Key: - Listening to music: melody, songs, headphones, noise, rhythm, lyrics… - Gardening: trees, flowers, garden, plant, vegetables, grows, fruit… Fishing: lake, exciting, catch, fish, water, boat… - Painting: creative, colours, pictures, artist, painting… - Swimming: pool, fun, water, keep fit, swim…

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 4 6: Listen again and put the words in the correct column.. (5’/IW) T plays the recording again SS put the words in the correct column while listening. - Ss compare their answers in pairs . T checks their answers with the whole class. Task 5 7 Listen to the sentences and tick / ə / or / ɜ :/. Practice the sentences. (5’/IW) T plays the recording twice. Ss do individually Ss compare and check their answers T asks ss to say the word that has / ə / and / ɜ :/ in each sentence. T calls some weak ss to read the sentences again. 4. Use: T asks ss to retell what they have learnt in the lesson. Game: Ss work in group to play the guessing game. 1. Work in group. 2. Each student thinks of a hobby and says keywords out loud. 3. The rest of the group tries to guess what the hobby is..? 4. The St with the most points is the winner. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: - Recall some hobbies HOMEWORK - A1,2/ P3 in workbook - Write the phrases in part 1 again and learnt by heart.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 6: Listen again and put the words in the correct column. /ə/ / ɜ :/ away burn answer birth neighbour hurt common heard 7 Listen to the sentences and tick / ə / or / ɜ :/. Practice the sentences. * Key : /ə/ / ɜ :/ 1 √ 2 √ 3 √ 4 √ 5 √ Game: The key to my hobby! Example: A: Water, grow, flowers, vegetables. B: Is it gardening? A: Yes, it is.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 4 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 (P.9-10)

I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to: - Review the present simple and the future simple tense. - Use Verbs of liking + V-ing to talk about hobbies. II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Review the lexical items related to hobbies. 2. Grammar: - The present simple and the future simple tense.(Review) - Verbs of liking + V-ing. 3. Skills: Listening, reading, speaking about hobbies. III: TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: Text book, recording, T.V, laptop. Students’: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities Contents I. Warm- up: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES *Game : Noughts and Crosses: Lesson 3: A Closer Look 2 (P.9-10) * Game : Net work - Teacher divides the class into 2 teams. Noughts and Crosses: - Ss work in groups to choose the verb and play like read make suitable sentences with it using the listen do visit simple present or simple future tense. make watch cook - Teacher gets feedback Ex: I often play chess after school. 2. Building knowledge:. I. The present simple tense and the future simple (Review) .(15’/IW/PW) 1: Complete the sentences. Use the present simple or future simple form of the verbs. Ss do this exercise individually then compare their answers with a partner.. T checks the answers and writes the correct answers on the board.

3. Practice: Task 1: 2: The table below shows the results of Nick’s survey on his classmates’ hobbies. Read the table and complete his report using the present simple.

I. The present simple tense and the future simple (Review) . 1: Complete the sentences. Use the present simple or future simple form of the verbs. 1.loves; will not/won’t continue 2. take 3. does...do 4. will enjoy 5. Do...do 6. Will...play 2: The table below shows the results of Nick’s survey on his classmates’ hobbies. Read the table and complete his report using the present simple. *Key: 1.Likes 2. Watch 3. Don’t love

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T asks Ss to look at the table and make sure that they understand it. T explains that x 3 per week means three times a week. -Ss work in pairs to do the exercise. - Check the answers and write the correct answers on the board. Task 2 3. Work in group. - Have Ss Work in groups to draw a table similar to the one in 2. The first column is for the activities. The other columns are for the rest of the group. - Set time limit for this. - Have each group write a short report similar to Nick’s report in 2. -Read the comment and votes for the best report. Task 3 II. Verbs of liking + V.ing (17’/PW/IW) Have Ss read the Look out! Box. - May call some Ss to make sentences with the verbs of liking. 4: Complete the sentences, using the –ing form of the verbs in the box. - Ss do the exercise individually, then compare their answers with a classmate T calls on some Ss to read out the answers. 5. Look at the pictures and write sentences. Use suitable verbs of liking or not liking and the –ing form. Ss work in pairs to do the activity. T has Ss to read the example and explain the way to do this activity. Ss write sentences using the pictures as clues. T calls some students to write their sentences on the board. T checks and comments on Ss’ sentences. 4. Use: T asks Ss to retell what they’ve learnt in the lesson. T guides ss to do activity 6

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 4. go 7. plays

5. Enjoy 6. Play 8. Doesn’t like 9.plays

3. Work in group. a. Think of some activities and make a table like the table in 2. b. Write a short report about what you have found out. Use Nick’s report in 2 as an example.

II. Verbs of liking + V.ing * Look out ! ( In Student book) 4: Complete the sentences, using the –ing form of the verbs in the box. * Key: 1.riding 2. Watching; going 3. talking 4. Playing 5. eating 6. Walking 5. Look at the pictures and write sentences. Use suitable verbs of liking or not liking and the –ing form. Suggested answers: 1. He doesn’t like eating apples. 2. They love playing table tennis. 3. She hates playing the piano. 4. He enjoys gardening. 5. She likes dancing. What does each member in your family like or not like doing? Write the sentences. 1. My father likes… 2. My father hates… 3. My mother enjoys… 4. My mother doesn’t like… 5. My brother/sister loves… My brother/sister doesn’t like… 14

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

5. Enlarge the knowledge - Recall about the present simple and the future simple , liking verbs + V-ing * Homework. - Learn by heart all the new words and structures. - Do Activity 4& 6/P.10 again. - Do B4, B5, B6/P.5-6 (workbook)

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 5 Week: Class: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 4. Communication (P.11) I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, ss will be able to describe and give opinions about hobbies II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS 1. Vocabulary: Read, write, understand key words : making pottery, carving wood, making models, take up smt. 2. Grammar: Use structures : find + doing sth + adj think (that) + doing sth + is + adj to express one’s opinion about hobbies.

3. Skill: Speaking : use the present simple to talk about hobbies III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: Text book, Cards, T.V, laptop. Students’: Text books, workbooks and pieces of paper. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES

I. Warm up:

Lesson 4. Communication (P.11) * Interviewing: Game 1: Interviewing T asks ss some questions about their family’members’ hobbies. lets ss ask questions to make friend Ss answer T’s questions. 2. Building knowledge:

* Vocabulary * Vocabulary (6’/IW) - Making pottery: making - Teacher use different techniques to teach pots,dishes…from clay - Making models: making copies of vocab (situation, realia) things, usually smaller than the original objects. - Carving wood: making objects, and patterns by cutting away material from wood. - Take up sth: learn or start to do something, especially for pleasure. Key: * Checking technique: Matching ( Activity A. carving B. making models 1) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

3. Practice: Task 1 1.What do you think about the hobbies in 1? Look at the table below and tick the boxes. Then, complete the sentences below by writing one reason to explain your choice. (10’/IW) Have the Ss look at Look out! Box. Write some example sentences on the board and underline the two structures.

Ss work individually and tick the appropriate boxes. Then, they move on to complete the five sentences. T models the first sentence Ss do the exercise then compare their sentences with a partner. T asks some Ss to write their sentences on the board. - Other Ss and T give comments Task 2: 2.Now, interview a classmate about the hobbies in 1. Take notes and present your partner’s answers to the class. (13’/PW) - Have Ss work in pairs to make conversations as in the example. Ask Ss to take turns being the person who ask the questions. This student has to note down his/ her partner’s answers to report to the class later.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 C. ice-skating D. dancing E. making pottery 1. What do you think about the hobbies in 1? Look at the table below and tick the boxes. Then, complete the sentences below by writing one reason to explain your choice. Example: I find swimming interesting. find + doing sth + adj They think (that) + swimming is interesting. think (that) + doing sth + is + adj boring unusua interesting l Making pottery dancing Ice-skating Making models Carving wood 2.Now, interview a classmate about the hobbies in 1. Take notes and present your partner’s answers to the class. *Example: You: What do you think about making pottery?/ How do you find making pottery? Mai: I think it is…/ I find it… You: Why? Mai: Because… You: Will you take up making pottery in the future? Mai: Yes, I will/ I’m not sure.

4. Use: Ss are divided into two big groups. T says an activity/hobby and points at a student from one group. This St has to make a correct sentence, using the structure in the look out! Box together with a reason. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Game : Making sentences.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

- If he/she makes a correct sentence , he/she earns one point, then he/she point to other St from the other group. This St make sentence…. - T keeps record of the groups’ points on the board and announces the winner at the end of the game. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: Recall how to use find sth/doing sth + adj; think that sth/doing sth is + adj * Homework. - Learn by heart all the new words and structures. - Do C1,2 /P.6,7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 6 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 5: Skill 1 (P.12)

I.OBJECTIVES: - By the end of this lesson students can read for specific information about hobbies. - Express their ideas about hobbies II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write, understand key words : eggshell, fragile, unique 2. Grammar - Use the present simple tense to describe hobbies. 3. Skills: Reading, speaking III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: text book, T.V, laptop . Students’: Text books and workbooks. .IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up: *Chatting: T & Ss talk about their hobbies. T: Do you know any unusual hobbies? 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary * Pre-teach the vocabulary - T uses pictures, examples, synonym to teach new words * Checking technique: Slap the board 3. Practice: Task 1: 1: Work in pairs. Look at the pictures and discuss the questions below. Ss work in pairs. They look at the pictures and answer the three questions. T elicits the answers from Ss and quickly write them on the board. Ss quickly read the text and compare their guesses with the information from the text. Task 2 2: Read the text and answer the questions. Ss read the text again and answer the questions individually and then compare their answers with a classmate. T asks for Ss’ answers and has them explain

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Lesson 5: Skill 1 (P.12) I. Vocabulary - eggshell (n) : vỏ trứng - fragile(a) : dễ vỡ - unique (a): độc đáo II. Reading: 1: Work in pairs. Look at the pictures and discuss the questions below. Key: 1. I can see a teddy bear, a flower and a bird 2. They are made of eggshells. 3. The hobby is carving eggshells. 2: Read the text and answer the questions. *Key : 1. He thinks his father’s hobby is unusual because eggshells are very fragile and his father can make beautiful pieces of art from them. 21

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

their answers. Ss can either paraphrase the original information from the text or read out loud the part of the text where the answer to each question is located. T confirms the correct answers. Task 3: 3: Read the sentences below and use no more than three words from the text to complete them. Ss complete the sentences without reading the text again. Then Ss can underline parts of the text that help them find the answers. Ss share their answers with a partner. T checks and confirms the correct answers.

2. He saw the carved eggshells for the first time in art gallery in the USA. 3. They find it difficult and boring. 4. Yes, he does.

Task 4: 4: Nick says that carved eggshells can be used as gifts for your family and friends. In pairs, discuss other uses of these pieces of artwork. Share your ideas with the class. -T has Ss work in pairs to discuss the uses of carved eggshells. - Encourage Ss to think creatively. T calls on some good students to talk in front of the class. 4. Use: Talk about your hobbies. Use questions in page 12 and your own to help. Ss work in groups and take turns talking about their hobbies. Then they vote for the most exciting hobby. Call on some Ss to talk about the most exciting hobby of their group. T monitors the conversations and note down common errors. - T corrects the errors with class.

III.SPEAKING 4: Nick says that carved eggshells can be used as gifts for your family and friends. In pairs, discuss other uses of these pieces of artwork. Share your ideas with the class. Some uses: - decorations at home - souvenirs - lights (with bigger eggs)..

3: Read the sentences below and use no more than three words from the text to complete them. *Key: 1. carving eggshells. 2. the Us 3. the internet 4. time 5. gifts.

Talk about your hobbies. Use questions in page 12 and your own to help. 1. What is the name of your hobby? 2. When did you start your hobby? 3. Is your hobby easy or difficult? Why? 4. Is your hobby useful? Why? Why not? 5. Do you intend to continue your hobby in the future?

Your hobbies 5. Enlarge the knowledge: What should you mention when you talk about your hobby? HOMEWORK -Learn vocab by heart. - Do D1, D2, D3/ P.7-8. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 7 Week: Class: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 6: Skill 2 (P.13) I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to: - Listen to get information about hobbies. - Write a paragraph about one’s hobby II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : The lexical items related to hobbies. 2. Grammar : - The present simple and the future simple tense.(Review) - Verbs of liking + V-ing. 3. Skills: writing a paragraph, listening for general and specific information. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: recording, T.V, laptop Students’: Text books, workbooks and subboard. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities Contents I. Warm up: UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES * Chatting. Lesson 6: Skill 2 (P.13) T asks ss if they know anything about the * Chatting. collecting glass bottles and if they think it is useful. - Call on some Ss to answer the questions. Questions: - Do you know anything about collecting glass bottles? - Do you think it is a good hobby? - Why? / Why not? T accepts all answers provided that Ss make sense.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Building knowledge: 1. LISTENING (15’/IW/PW) 1. Listen to an interview about hobbies A4! Teen reporter. Ngoc asks Mi about her hobbies. Complete each blank in the word web with no more than three words. T : You are going to listen an interview about Mi’s hobby. Ss read through the word web. T asks Ss to guess the word/phrase to fill in each blank and write their guesses on the board. T plays the recording and ask sSs to listen and complete the word web. Ss work in pairs to compare their answers with each other and with the word/phrase on the board. T plays the recording a second time for pairs to check their answers. - Ask for Ss’ answers and write them on the board next to their guesses. Mi’s hobby: 1. Name of the hobby 2. Started 3. Person who shares the hobby with Mi: 4. To do this hobby you have to: a, collect bottles after use+ get them from.. b, Make ………….vases….or… c, use them as……..decorations 5. Feelings about the hobby. 6. Future: will 3. Practice: Task 1 Ask Ss to write a paragraph about a classmate’s hobby. Tell Ss they will use the word web as a way to organise their idea. Task 2 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about each other’s hobbies. Take note below: - T asks Ss to work in pairs and interview each other about their hobbies. - T asks ss to take notes on each other’s answers in the word web. - Have some Ss present their friend’s answers for the class. (or write on the board). Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 1. LISTENING 1. Listen to an interview about hobbies A4! Teen reporter. Ngoc asks Mi about her hobbies. Complete each blank in the word web with no more than three words.

Key: 1. Collecting glass bottles 2. Two years ago 3. Mother 4. Grandmother, flowers, lamps, home. 5. Useful 6. Continue the hobby II. Writing Writing tip: You can use a word web as a way to organise the ideas for your writing 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about each other’s hobbies. Take note below: 1. Name of the hobby:… 2. When he/ she started the bobby? 3. Who he/ she shares it with? 4. To do this hobby you have to:… 5. Feelings about the hobby:… Future:…

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 3: 3. Write a paragraph about your classmate’s hobby. - T asks Ss to work in groups and choose one hobby to write about Ss work in groups to write on a big piece of paper. 4. Use: * Peer checking: - Ask groups to exchange their writing for other groups to check. - Call 2-4 groups to present their writing. - Have other Ss comment on the paragraph on the paper. - Collect some writings to correct at home.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. Write a paragraph about your classmate’s hobby. Start your paragraph as shown below: …… is my classmate. His/ Her hobby is …… …………………

5. Enlarge the knowledge: - Get some students to read aloud their paragraph. ? Sum up the main content of the lesson. *HOMEWORK - Write the paragraph about your hobby. - Do E1, E2/ P9 (W.B).

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 8 Week: Class:

UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 7: Looking back and project (P.14-15)

I.OBJECTIVES: By the end of this lesson ss will be able to - revise all the target knowledge in unit 1. Do a project about their hobbies. II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: Review 2. Grammar: Review - The present simple and the future simple tense. - Verbs of liking + V-ing. 3. Skills: speaking, reading, listening and writing. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: T.V, laptop Students’: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHINGH STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm up: * Brainstorming: T asks ss to think about as many hobbies as possible. Ss work in two groups to write on the board.

Contents UNIT 1: MY HOBBIES Lesson 7: Looking back and project (P.14-15) * Brainstorming: Hobbies Gardening Fishing Painting Swimming Cooking

2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary (9’/IW/PW) 1. Complete the sentences with appropriate hobbies. Ss do this activity individually then compare their answers with a partner. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. Vocabulary 1. Complete the sentences with appropriate hobbies. Key: 1. Collecting 27

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T checks and confirms the correct answers. Then Ss read their sentences out loud for other Ss in the class to guess the hobby.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 2. 3. 4. 5.

Bird-watching Playing board games Arranging flowers Making pottery

6. Dancing 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Put one verb from the box in each blank. Use the correct form of the verb. Ss do this activity individually then compare their answers with a partner. T checks and confirms the correct answers.

Task 2 3. Add hobbies to each of the following lists. Ss do this activity in pairs. T allows them 5 minutes to add as many hobbies to the table as possible. It can be a competition. The pair with the most hobbies wins and goes to the board to write down their answers. - Give feedback.

2. Put one verb from the box in each blank. Use the correct form of the verb. Key: 1. Listens 2. Go 3. Plays 4. Read 5. Do 6. Collect 3. Add hobbies to each of the following lists. Key: Easy hobbies Difficult hobbies Collecting label. Skating Collecting leaves

Cooking painting

Playing board games Cheap hobbies Collecting used books

Expensive hobbies Collecting cars Taking pictures

Collecting leaves Task 3: 4. Use the present simple or future simple form of each verb in brackets to complete the passage. Ss do this exercise individually then compare their answers with a partner. T calls on some Ss to give the answers. T confirms the correct answers and writes them on the board

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Travelling

Painting II. Grammar. 4. Use the present simple or future simple form of each verb in brackets to complete the passage. Key: 1. Have 2. Likes 3. Plays 4. Doesn’t like 5. Enjoys 6. Walks 28

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020 7. Will join 8. Loves

Task 4 5: Write true sentences about yourself. Ss do this exercise individually then compare their sentences with a partner. Some Ss write their sentences on the board. T gives feedback.

9. Don’t like 10. Will read 5: Write true sentences about yourself. 1. I like … 2. I enjoy… 3. I love… 4. I don’t like… 5. I hate…

Task 5 6: Role - play: Work in pairs. Student A is a reporter. Student B is a famous person Brainstorm interview questions on the board with the class . - Ss work in pairs. One St interviews the other about his/her hobbies. T asks some pairs to act out the interview in front of the class. Vote for the best interview.

III. Communication. 6: Role - play: Work in pairs. Student A is a reporter. Student B is a famous person Example: A: I’m a reporter from a magazine. Can I ask you some questions about your hobbies? B: Yes, of course …………..

Task 6

IV. Project HOBBY COLLAGE

HOBBY COLLAGE - Collage: is the art of making a picture by ticking pieces of colour paper, cloth, or photographs onto a surface. It can also a picture that you make by doing this. - Ask Ss to read the four instructions in the book - Ss work in group to do the project. - Teacher guides and sets this activity as homework. 4. Use: - Ask ss to complete the self- assessment. - Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice. 5. Enlarge the knowledge:

Sum up the main content of the lesson. *Homework - Do the project at home. - Do C1, C2/ P6-7 (W.B )

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 9 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 1: Getting started (P.16-17)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary Read, write, understand key words about health problem and health tips: 2. Grammar: Use imperatives to give advice 3. Skills: Use Listening, Reading and Speaking to talk about health problems and give advice on healthy lifestyles. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s : Text book, recording, laptop, T.V. Students’ : Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm up. *Chatting T asks ss some questions about their health. 2. Building knowledge: 1.Listen and read.(9’/IW/PW)

Contents UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 1: Getting started (P.16-17) 1.Listen and read.

T asks Ss to open their books to the picture. T can ask Ss prediction questions about the picture and generally focus Ss attention on the topic of the lesson. Questions may include: • What can you see in the picture? • What time is it? • What do you think the people in the picture are talking about? • Who do you think is healthier? Ss answer the question as a class. T then plays the dialogue and has the Ss follow along. Ss may track the dialogue with their fingers as they listen to the recording. *Vocabulary: *Vocabulary: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

buồn, thất vọng T elicits the new words using pictures and Down (adj): Junk food (n): đồ ăn nhanh, đồ ăn vặt explanation Put on weight: tăng cân -Piture, antonymn,mine,synomynm… Flu (n): bệnh cúm Sunburn (n): bị cháy nắng * Check vocab : R.O.R * Practice: 3. Practice: 1a. Can you find a word or phrase Task 1 1a. Can you find a word or phrase that that mean: *Key : mean: (4’/IW/PW) T asks Ss to complete the task individually or 1. Zooniverse in pairs. 2. I don’t feel like it. T can check answers and ask Ss to use each item in a sentence. T confirms the correct answers. 1b. Read the conversation again. Who wants to do the following things? (4’/IW) T asks Ss to read the conversation again and complete the table on their books.

3. sound down

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

4. putting on weight

5. won’t take no for an answer 1b. Read the conversation again. Who wants to do the following things? *Key : T may write the table on the board while Ss 1. Phong 2. Phong 3. Nick 4. Nick 5. Phong are working individually, then correct the exercise as a class by asking Ss to come to the board and tick the correct column. 2a. Match the health problems in the Task 2 box with the pictures. Then listen and 2. Match the health problems in the box repeat. with the pictures. Then listen and repeat. Key: (6’/IW) 1. e T asks Ss to look at the pictures. 2. f As a class Ss can call out which word they 3. d think matches each picture. 4. c T asks Ss to write the words below each 5. b picture. 6. a T plays the recording and Ss repeat. T corrects the exercise with the whole class. 2b. Which problems do you think are 2b. Which problems do you think are the most common with your classmate? Rank the most common with your the problems from the most common (1)to classmate? Rank the problems from the least common (6).Then share with a the most common (1)to the least common (6).Then share with a partner. (5’/IW/PW) partner. T has Ss rank the health problems from the most common to the least common and share with a partner. T encourages Ss to give reasons for their ranking.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 3 3: Now look at the advice. These people have the wrong advice. Can you match the correct advice with each person. (7’/IW) T asks one S to read though the list of advice aloud. T asks Ss to complete the matching activity individually and corrects the activity as a class. 4. Use: Take a card with a health problem or piece of advice. Walk around and try to find the person with the card that matches yours.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3: Now look at the advice. These people have the wrong advice. Can you match the correct advice with each person. *Key: 1. c 2. d 3. e 4.b

5.a

4. Game : Finding Friends Example : A: I have spots. B: Oh, I’m sorry. My advice is ‘Wear a sun hat’/ Yes! My advice is ‘ Wash your face regularly’

*HOME WORK - Learn by heart new vocabulary -Write 5 imperatives to give adive on healthy lifestyles. - Do B1,2,3/P.10-11.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 10 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.18)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to the topic health problems. 2. Grammar: - pronunciation of the two sounds /f/ and/v/. 3. Skills: Listening and speaking about health problems. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher’s: Text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students’: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.18) Game 1 : * Kim’s game

1. Warm up * Kim’s game T shows 6 pictures about health problems on Getting Started, Activity 2 on the screen. SS look at the six pictures for 30 seconds them write words for these pictures ( in 2 groups) Which groups has more correct words will be the winner. 2. Building knowledge: I. VOCABULARY.

I. VOCABULARY.

T writes have a/an, have, and feel on the Have a/ an: cough, headache, sore board. throat, temperature , an allergy, a spot, T asks a S to read the words from the first (a) sunburn, a sickness….. Have: (the) flu, stomachache, T writes the words in a word web around have toothache, earache, spots…… a/an. T encourages ss to add more words( Feel: sick, tired, weak,…… from the six words in Warm up stage). T repeats this for the next two columns. column.

T asks Ss if they can make a movement for each of the different health problems. The Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Ss should say the health problem while doing the movement. For Example: ‘I have a cough’ (Ss pretend to cough). 1. Write the problem below the 1. Write the problem below the picture of picture of each patient. each patient. * Key: - Teach the noun “patient” to make sure that 1. Flu Ss are familiar with it. 2. Sunburn - Ask Ss to do the exercise individually. 3. Allergy - Correct the exercise as a class 4. Tired/ weak 3. Practice:

2: Now, read the doctor’s notes about his patients and fill in the missing Task 1 2: Now, read the doctor’s notes about his words. * Key: patients and fill in the missing words. T asks Ss individually.

complete

the

exercise

T corrects the exercise as a class.

1. (a) sunburn

2. the flu

3. tired, temperature 4. sick, stomachache 5. sore throat

Task 2

3: Role-play the meeting with the 3: Role-play the meeting with the doctor.Use the cues in 1,2 or your doctor.Use the cues in 1,2 or your own own health problems. health problems Example : T asks one S to come to the front of the class. T models the role-play in the book with the St. Try to make it as fun and dramatic as possible. Then, T divides Ss into pairs. T encourages Ss to think about how each person (Doctor and patient) feels and will act. Ss choose a problem and make a role-play. They may choose more than one. T gives Ss about 5 minutes to practice their role-plays. T then asks some pairs to perform their role-plays for the class. After each role-play T asks the class comprehension questions about what they just saw. Eg: What was Mai’s problem? What advice did Dr. Thao have?

Hi, doctor Thao. Hi, Hung I was outside all day yesterday. I feel very hot and my face is red. I see. I think you have a sunburn.

Task 3

4: Choose a health problem. Work in 4: Choose a health problem. Work in groups. Tell your group about the last Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

groups. Tell your group about the last time time you had that problem. you had that problem. Example : T asks four Ss to model the example A: I had flu two weeks ago. conversation. Then, T divides the class into B: Me too, I felt so weak. groups and asks Ss to talk about a health problem. T may ask Ss to extend the C: Oh. I had a sore throat yesterday. conversation by trying to figure out what the D: I had toothache. I think I ate too most common health problem is in the group many sweets. and then report back to the class. II. PRONUNCIATION: /f/ and /v/ Task 4 II. PRONUNCIATION: /f/ and /v/ 5: Listen and circle the words you (10’/IW/PW) hear. 5: Listen and circle the words you hear. *Key: T may want to start by drilling the sounds/f/ 2. ferry 3. vas and /v/ and asking Ss to think of any words 1. fat they know with these sounds in them. 4. vault 5. save 6. leave T can write Ss ideas on the board. Then, T says the words in 5 and asks the Ss to repeat. Finally, T plays the recording and has Ss circle the words they hear. T may play the recording as many times as necessary. 6: Listen and circle the words with 6: Listen and circle the words with the /f/or the /f/or /v/ sound. Then say the sentences. /v/ sound. Then say the sentences. T asks Ss to listen to the sentences once and 1. Fast, food repeat. 2. have, felt T then asks Ss to circle the words with /f/ or 3. fatter /v/ sounds. 4. having, lifestyle T has the Ss listen to the recording again and 5. give gives the correct answers to the entire class. 4. Use: T summarizes the main points of the lesson. 5. Enlarge the knowledge:

HOMEWORK. -Have a/an + N, have + N, feel + adj to -Learn by heart new words. -Practice the sounds /f/ and /v/. talk about health problems - How to pronounce the sounds /f/ and /v/ -Do A1,2,3 / P.10 (W.B)

? Recall some phrases which has the two sounds. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 11 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.19-20)

I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson,Ss wil be able to : II. LANGUAGE KNOWLEDGE: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to the topic health problems and health tips. 2. Grammar: - Use ‘Imperatives with more and less’ for direct commands, orders or suggestions - Compound sentences 3. Skills: Speaking and Writing to describe health problems and health tips. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures ; text books, recording,laptop. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up:

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.19-20)

Game: Simon says

Game 1: Simon says

T can give Ss simple classroom commands. Eg: stand up, sit down, raise your hand, open your book, close your book.

Ss do the command as the T says it. 2. Building knowledge: A. Imperatives with more and less A. Imperatives with more and less Eg: - Relax more. (17’/IW/PW) - Watch less TV. Introduction: Teacher writes the word * We can use the Imperative for direct IMPERATIVE on the board and explains to commands, orders or suggestions. children that the imperative can be used for direct, commands, orders or suggestions. T asks Ss to open their books and read through the yellow box (tracking the words with their fingers) as T reads the text aloud. T may want to check the Ss comprehension by asking some comprehension checking Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

questions. T:When I feel tired should I sleep more or less? T:What should I do if I am doing poorly in school? T: What should I do if I want to lose weight? Put on weight? 3. PRACTICE Task 1: 1: Look at the pictures. Which advice would you give to each of these people? Use the imperatives with more or less above.

* PRACTICE 1: Look at the pictures. Which advice would you give to each of these people? Use the imperatives T asks Ss to look at the four pictures and calls with more or less above. Suggested answers: on Ss to tell the class what they see. a. Sleep more./Relax more T divides the Ss into pairs and asks pairs to b. Spend less time using mobile phone / Spend less time reading give advice to each person in the picture. c. eat less fat food./Do more execise T gives Ss 2-3 minutes to come up with ideas d. Spend less time under the sun for advice and then T calls on some groups to share with the class. Task 2: 2. Top health tips for teens Look at the health tips in the yellow box. Which six do you think are the most important to you and your classmates? Explain why?

2. Top health tips for teens Look at the health tips in the yellow box. Which six do you think are the most important to you and your classmates? Explain why?

T asks Ss to look at the yellow Grammar Box again. T asks Ss to think for a moment about which 6 pieces of advice are most important to teens. Then, T asks Ss to discus their ideas in pairs or groups of three. T asks a few groups to share their ideas. T takes a quick class poll to see which 6 3: Look at the article on the Teen pieces of advice the class thinks are most Health website. Fill in the blanks to important. T writes the ideas on the board. complete their top six health tips. Task 3:

*Key:

3: Look at the article on the Teen Health 1. Do more exercise! Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

website. Fill in the blanks to complete their 2. Sleep more! top six health tips. 3. Eat less junk food T asks Ss to read through the Teen Health 4. Wash your hands more. Website individually and complete the 5. Watch less TV headings. 6. Spend less time playing computer T asks Ss if the ideas from the class and the games. ideas from the website are the same. T encourages class discussion here about why some pieces of advice are more important than others. Task 4:

B. Compound sentences. Conjunction(liên từ): and, or, but, so. B. Compound sentences. Example: Nam does morning exercise Introduction: T writes AND, OR, BUT, and everyday, so he is well- built. SO on the board. T asks Ss what these words are called. *Form: Ss: Conjunction ( Ss may answer in English or Simple sentence 1, Conj Simple sentence 2.= Compound sentence Vietnamese). T asks Ss to read the first paragraph of the Yellow Box and asks: What do we call a sentence made by linking two simple sentences? Answer: A compound sentence.

*Use: Liên từ dùng để nối 2 câu đơn thành câu Phức (câu ghép). Câu ghép sử dụng 4 liên từ trên (BASO) gọi là câu ghép đẳng lập. Trước các liên từ này luôn có dấu phảy.

T asks Ss to read the second paragraph of the Yellow Box and again: What does a coordinating conjunction do? * Game : Answer: It joins two simple sentences. T divides the class up into three large groups. The first group is ‘Independent clause 1’, the second group is ‘Conjunction’, and the third group is ‘Independent Clause 2’. The whole class reads the table aloud. Each group chorally chants their part of the sentence when T calls out the name of their group.

Example: To says: Independent Clause 1 Group 1 says: The Japanese eat a lot of rice. T says: Conjunction Group 2 says: AND T says: Independent Clause 2

The class repeats this process for the rest of Group 3 says: They eat a lot of fish. the sentences in the table. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Once they have finished T asks the class: ‘Where does the comma go in a compound sentence?’ Answer: It goes independent clause.

after

the

first * PRACTICE

Task 6 4.Make compound sentences by joining the two simple sentences. Use the conjunction given. Remember to add a comma. T asks Ss individually.

complete

the

4.Make compound sentences by joining the two simple sentences. Use the conjunction given. Remember to add a comma. *Key :

exercise 1. I want to eat some food, but I have a sore throat.

T corrects the exercise with the class.

2. The Japanese eat healthily, so they live for a long time. 3. I feel tired, and I feel weak.

Task 7

4. You can go and see the doctor, or you can go to bed now and rest.

5.Match the beginnings of the 5.Match the beginnings of the sentences sentences with the picture that with the picture that complete them. complete them. T asks Ss to complete the exercise *Key: individually. 1. a 2.c 3.a 4.b T corrects the exercise with the class. 6. Now, complete the second part of 6. Now, complete the second part of the the compound sentences. compound sentences. *Key: - T asks Ss to complete the exercise 1, so he doesn’t have flu individually. Ss ddo the exercise individually 2. , and he doesn’t do exercise - T calls on some Ss to read the complete 3. , or she should try to relax more sentences. 4. , she does exercise, too. 4. Use: T summarizes the main points of the lesson. 5. Enlarge the knowledge:

*HOME WORK 1. Make compound sentences by joining - Learn by heart the form, meaning the two simple sentences. Using the and use of Imperative and Compound sentences. conjunction given - T asks ss to complete the exercise - Do B6,7 / P.12;D1,D2/P.14 (W.B) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

individually - T corrects the exercise with the class 2. Match the beginning of the sentences with the picture that completes them - T has ss look at the pictures and go through the beginning of the sentences and work individually 3. Now complete the second part of the compound sentences - Ask ss to go through the first sentences and work individually to complete the sentences

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 12 Week: Class: UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 4: Communication (P.21) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson,Ss wil be able to II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary Read, write, understand key words : myth, sushi, vitamins, sleeping in, vegetarians. 2. Grammar: Review - Imperatives with more and less - Compound sentences 3. Skills: Listening, talking about health facts and myths. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 4. Communication (P.21)

1. Warm up: *Brainstorming:

Game 1 : *Brainstorming:

T writes the words Healthy and Unhealthy on the board.

Healthy

The class works in two groups to brainstorm about things that are healthy or Do exercise unhealthy.

Unheathy

Stay up late

T checks and comments. 2. Building knowledge: I. VOCABULARY - T asks Ss to look up these words in their dictionary.

I. VOCABULARY - myth (n): việc hoang đường - sushi(n): món sushi - vitamins (n) : sinh tố, vitamin - sleeping in (n) : ngủ nướng -T asks Ss to give the vietnamese equivalents - vegetarian (n, adj): người ăn chay, ăn -Checking vocab : R.O.R chay

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 3. Practice: Task 1

N¨m häc 2019-2020 II. PRACTICE 1. Work in pairs. Discuss these sentences. Do you think they are true or false? Tick ( ) the sentences you think are true. Put a cross (x) next to ones you think are false.

1. Work in pairs. Discuss these sentences. Do you think they are true or false? Tick ( ) the sentences you think are true. Put a cross (x) next to ones you think are false. (5’/PW) *Key: T divides the class into pairs and asks them 1. T 2.F to complete the exercise by ticking the sentences they think are true and putting a cross next to the sentences they think are false. T gives the Ss complete the exercise for 3 minutes

3.F

4.F

5.F

6.F

T chooses a few groups to share their 2: Listen to the radio show about answers with the class. “health facts or myth’s and check Task 2 your answers in 1. 2: Listen to the radio show about “health facts or myth’s and check your answers in 1. (7’/IW) First, T asks Ss to close their books, listen, and take notes. Ss listen and take notes. T plays the recording. Ss then open their books and correct their answers using their notes (or from memory). T then plays the recording again for Ss to 3: Discuss the following in groups. 1. Which sentence are you most check a second time. surprised by? Why? Task 3 2. Do you know any health facts or 3: Discuss the following in groups. (5’/PW) myths about health in Viet Nam? Where - T asks Ss to do this activity in pairs. did you hear them? - Have a quick class poll and follow-up 4. Work in groups. Think of some discussion. ideas about health that are true. Then think of some that are false. T calls on some groups to checks. Example: 1.You can avoid disease by keeping Task 4 yourself clean. (This is true) 4. Work in groups. Think of some ideas about health that are true. Then think of 2.You will turn orange when you eat a some that are false.(8’/GW) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

T divides Ss into groups and has them lot of oranges. (This is false) complete the exercise. Ss work in groups to complete the exercise for 5 minutes. 5: Test another group to see how When the time limit for exercise 4 is finished many of your health myths they can spot. T puts groups together to quiz one another. In order to keep things organised, each group chooses one spokesperson for the group. The spokesperson can consult his/her group, but the spokesperson is the only one who can answer.

4. Use:

-Summarize the main point of the lesson. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: - T reminds ss some sentences about health are true which ss should follow and some sentences are not true and ss should avoid

* Homework - Learn by heart new vocab. -Do exercises C1,2,3/ P.13 in the work book.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 13 Week: Class: UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.22) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson,Ss wil be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand words : diet, expert, tip, stay in shape. 2. Language Review - Imperatives with more and less - Compound sentences 3. Skills: Reading and speaking about health issues and give advice on healthy living. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: poster,pictures, text books, laptop Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

1. Warm up: Brainstroming - T asks ss to work in 2 groups to brainstorm about the topic ‘How to keep you healthy?’ Ss from two teams to go to the board and write the name of the things or activities related to the topic. . Which ever team gives more things will be the winner. 2. Building knowledge: I. READING T writes the word CALORIE on the board. T translates into Vietnamese if necessary. T asks Ss to brainstorm any words that they associate with CALORIE /ˈkæl.ər.i /.

Contents

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 5. Skills 1 (P.22) Brainstroming

I. READING

CALORIE

1. Quickly read the text. Match the correct headings with the paragraphs. - Ask Ss to guess what the reading will be about. T : - Who can tell me the topic of the reading we are going to read? Ss: T asks Ss to complete the exercise. T checks and confirms the correct answers. 3. Practice: Task 1

1. Quickly read the text. Match the correct headings with the paragraphs. Key: 1. b 2. a 3.c

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

2: Find the following words/ phrases in the text. Discuss the meaning of Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

2: Find the following words/ phrases in the text. Discuss the meaning of each word/ phrase with a partner. Then check the meaning. - Ss work in pairs to complete the activities. - Ss can use dictionaries. T elicits the meaning of words from different groups.

each word/ phrase with a partner. Then check the meaning. Diet (n) - the food that you eat on a daily basis. Diet (v) - meant a special eating routine to lose weight or accomplish another health goal. Expert - someone who has studied a lot about a subject or topic and understands it well. Tip – an advice on how to do something quickly and successfully, usually from one’s own experience. Stay in shape - stay healthy. 3: Now answer the following Task 2 questions. 3: Now answer the following questions. *Key: 1. A calorie is energy that helps us do T ask Ss to complete the activity our everyday activities. individually. 2. If we eat too many calories we get Ss work individually. fat. T then corrects the answers with the class. 3. To stay healthy you need between 1,600 and 2,500 calories. 4. Sports activities and running use a lot of calories. 5. People listen to his advice because he is an expert. III. SPEAKING Task 3 SPEAKING 4: Look at the table and discuss the following questions. 4: Look at the table and discuss the 1. Why do you think some activities use following questions. T draws Ss attention to the table and explains more calories than others. that the activities are listed next to the 2. Which activity uses more calories: number of calories used in one hour. gardening or walking? 3. How many calories do you use doing Ss read the table. aerobics for 2 hours? T may ask comprehension question such as 4. What do you think happens when we ‘If I do aerobics for 3 hours, how many have too few calories, but use too many calories will I use?’ -T puts ss in groups of three and asks them to calories? discuss the questions. - Ss work in groups of three t discuss. T goes around and help weaker groups. 5: Choose two or three activities you T calls some groups to present their answers. like to do. Complete the table about those activities. Task 4 o Activity 5: Choose two or three activities you like o Number of hours (per day) to do. Complete the table about those o Total number of calories. activities. T asks Ss to complete the table and think Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

about how many calories each activity will take. If the activity they like to do is not on the table Ss can guess the number of calories by comparing with the table 4. Ss share their table with groups. 4. Use: Present your table to the class. Try to include the following information. T asks Ss to share their tables with the class. Ss share their tables with the class. T summarizes the main point of the lesson.

Present your table to the class. Try to include the following information.

5. Enlarge the knowledge: * HOMEWORK - T aks ss to recall about activity and - Learn by heart new vocab. -Do exercise D3/P.14 in work book. calories

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 14 Week: Class: UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 6: Skills 2 (P.23) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson,Ss wil be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to health issues 2. Language: Review - Imperatives with more and less - Compound sentences 3. Skills: Listening & Writing about health problems. III. TEAHING AIDS: Teacher: Posters,Pictures ; text books,laptop, recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up:

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 6. Skills 2 (P.23)

* Chatting:

T asks some ss about the activities they * Chatting: like doing and the number of calories they use each day. ........................................ 2. Building knowledge: I. LISTENING I. LISTENING 1. Look at the picture. Discuss the 1. Look at the picture. Discuss the questions with a partner. questions with a partner. T draws the Olympic rings on the board 1.What sports do people do in the and asks Ss what these represent. Olympics? T brainstorms with Ss as a class different 2.The Olympic sport below is sometimes words that come to mind when Ss think of called “the Ironman event”. Why? the Olympics. Ss discuss the questions. 2: Listen to the interview with an 3. Practice: ironman. Which problems did he have Task 1 as a child? 2: Listen to the interview with an *Key: ironman. Which problems did he have - sick as a child? - allergy Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T plays the recording. Ss listen and tick the problems an ironman had as a child. T allows Ss to share their answers before listening to the recording a final time to check. - Correct their answer. Task 2 3. Listen to the interview again. What advice does he give about preparing for the event? T asks Ss to listen to the recording again and choose the right response Ss listen again and choose the right response. T makes sure Ss understand the word “triathlon” in the listening. T checks and gives comments. Task 3 4. Are the following sentences true (T) or false (F) T asks Ss to complete the task individually. T can ask an early finisher to come up to the board and write his/her answers on the board and the class can check them. Task 4 5. Discuss in groups. T divides the class into groups T asks ss to work in groups for 5 minutes to discuss and feedback as a class.

N¨m häc 2019-2020

3: Listen to the interview again. What advice does he give about preparing for the event? *Key: - Do more exercises - Sleep more - Eat more fruit/ vegetables 4: Are the following sentences true (T) or false (F) *Key: 1. T 2. F 3. F 4. F 5. T 5: Discuss in groups. 1. Why is the triathlon a difficult event? 2. Can you think of other Olympic sports that are harder/ easier? 3. Would you like to try the triathlon one day? Why? Why not?

Task 5 III. WRITING 6: Look at Dr. Dan’s advice page. Can you match the problems with the answers?

III. WRITING 6: Look at Dr. Dan’s advice page. Can you match the problems with the answers? *Key: 1. c 2. b 3. A T asks Ss to work individually to finish To give advice, you can use: this activity. o You should… T checks and confirms the correct answer . o You can… o It will be good if you… T asks ss to read Dr.Law’s advice page o Do something more/less… and underline the word/ phrase that Dr.Law uses to give advice. 7. Work in pairs. Choose one of the problems. Student A writes the Task 6 7. Work in pairs. Choose one of the problem, and student B writes the reply. Anna: played outside all day/ has sunburn/ problems. Student A writes the problem, and student B writes the reply. has a temperature Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T divides Ss into A and B then put them in pairs. T asks one student A to write a health problem on a piece of paper ( using the prompts from the book), T then asks Student A to pass the paper to Student B and Student B can write a response. - Share their questions and responses with the class. 4. Use: -T summarizes the main point of the lesson.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 Ngoc: feels weak/ feel tired/ sleeps in Khang: ate too much/ has stomachache/ feels sick.

* HOMEWORK - Do E1, E2, E3/ P.16/WB

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 15 Week: Class: UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 7: Looking back &Project (P.24-25) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson,Ss wil be able to review vocabularies and the grammar points they have learnt in this unit. II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: Review: The lexical items related to health problems and health tips. 2. Language: Review - Imperatives with more and less. - Compound sentences 3. Skills: Reading, Speaking & Writing III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures, text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHIING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

UNIT 2: HEALTH Lesson 7: Looking back &Project (P.24-25) Drink enough water

1. Warm up: - Have Ss work in two team and write as many words related to the two topic as possible. Ss work in 2 teams to play. T checks and comments.

Health tips

Watch less T.V Sun burnt Health problems

2. Building knowledge: I. VOCABULARY 1: What health problems do you think each of these people has? - T asks ss to do this activity individually. - T encourages Ss to write down the answers Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. VOCABULARY 1: What health problems do you think each of these people has? *Key: a. sunburn 57

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Ss work individually to write down the answers. - T corrects the exercise on the board to check spelling. 3. Practice: Task 1 2: Look at the pictures above. Write the health problem below each person. - T asks Ss what they see in each picture. - Ss have a brief discussion, then complete the exercise individually. - Correct as a class.

b. spots c. put on weight d. stomachache e. flu 2: Look at the pictures above. Write the health problem below each person. *Key: 1. spots 2. put on weight 3. sunburn 4. stomachache/ sick 5. flu

Task 2 II. GRAMMAR 3. Complete the health tips below. Ask Ss to complete the task individually. - Check and confirm the correct answer.

II. GRAMMAR 3. Complete the health tips below. Key: 1. Less 2. More 3. More 4.Go outside 5. Watch… TV 6. Do… exercise. 4. Draw a line to link the sentences and a coordinator to form meaningful sentences. Key: 1.I want to eat some junk food, but I am putting on weight. 2.I don’t want to be tired tomorrow, so I should go to bed early. 3.I have temperature, and I feel tired. 4.I can exercise every morning, or I can cycle to school. III. COMMUNICATION

Task 3 4. Draw a line to link the sentences and a coordinator to form meaningful sentences. - T asks Ss to do exercise 4 individually. - Ss compare their answers with a partner. - Check their answers.

Task 4 III. COMMUNICATION 5: Choose one of the following health problems. Role play a discussion. Student A is the patient. Student B is the doctor. T divides the Ss into pairs. T asks one pair to come up and role-play the example in the book. T asks the Ss to create their own role-plays from the sample problems in the book. Ss work in pairs to discuss. T chooses a pair or two to do their role-plays Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

5: Choose one of the following health problems. Role play a discussion. Student A is the patient. Student B is the doctor. Example: A: Hi, doctor. I feel weak and sick. B: Did you have enough calories? You should eat more, and I think you should get more exercise too. A: OK. Thank you doctor

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 in front of the class. Task 5 6: Discuss the following sentences about health with a partner. Do you think they are facts or myths? - T asks Ss to discuss the sentences in 6 in pairs. - T asks Ss to report back to the class. - T asks the class to decide what’s true and what’s myth. Task 6 IV. Project T guides ss to do this project at home. T divides the class into groups and each group comes up with questions to find out more about health and health habits of the people around them. Ss can ask other groups in class or ask people outside of the class (other students/teachers in school, family members, friends). Some Ss can make a brief report about the health problems they discovered and tell their groups/the class about what they found. 4. Use: * Finished T asks Ss to complete the self- assessment. T identifies any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice if necessary 5. Enlarge knowledge: -Sum up the main content of the lesson “ talk about health problems - Give health advice with imperative with more and less - Form compound sentences

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 6: Discuss the following sentences about health with a partner. Do you think they are facts or myths? E.g: When you have a headache, you should rub an egg on your head. A: I don’t think this is true. It’s a myth. B: Yes, I agree/ No, I disagree….. IV. Project HEALTH SURVEY

* Finished

HOMEWORK. - Do Project at home. - Revise all the grammartical and lexical points of Unit 2.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 18 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 1: Getting started ( P.26-27)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work. 2. Grammar: Past simple. Present perfect . 3. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about community service and volunteer work.. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: T.V, recording, laptop and textbook. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

Contents

1. Warm up: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 1: Getting started (P.26-27) To start the lesson, write ‘Green Summer Campaign’, ‘working for the community’, and ‘having a beach holiday’ on the board. Ask Ss to guess which two phrases connect to each other. Once Ss have found the answer, follow-up by asking them why they think ‘green summer’ relates to ‘ working for the community’, and what activities a person can do. If T has some volunteer experience, he/she can share with the class. 2. Building knowledge: 1. Listen and read.(13’/IW/PW) 1. Listen and read. Ask Ss to open their books to the picture. T can ask Ss prediction questions about the picture. - What can you see in the picture? - Who do you think they are? - What are they talking about? Ss answer the questions as a class. T plays the recording and has Ss follow along. After the first listening, T asks Ss to recall in formation from the listening. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

- Global Citizen is …… (the name of the radio programme). - Hai Ba Trung School/is… (the school where Mai and Phuc go to). - Be a Buddy is …… (the organisation that Mai is from). - Go Green is ………(the organisation that Phuc is from). *Vocabulary: T elicits the new words using pictures and *Vocabulary: Community service (n): công việc vì explanation lợi ích cộng đồng -Piture, antonymn,mine,synomynm… volunteer (n/v): người tình nguyện, * Check vocab : R.O.R đi tình nguyện. donate (v) hiến tặng, đóng góp. street children (n) trẻ em đường phố non- profit organisation (n): tổ chức phi T plays the recording again. lợi nhuận. Ss listen. make a different (v): làm cho tốt hơn. Ss read the dialogue in pairs. Encourage T checks some pairs. * Practice 3. Practice 1a. Read the conversation again and Task 1 1a. Read the conversation again and tick T tick T (true) or F (False). *Key: (true) or F (False). 1.T 2. T Ss do the exercise individually. 3. T 4. F 5. T Ss compare their answer with a partner and then discuss as a class. T goes through each statement and asks Ss how the text in the dialogue supports their answers. After the discussion T writes the correct answers on the board. (Teacher may explain the differences between an environmental non-profit orgarnisation and an environmental business). 1b. Read the conversation again . Answer the following questions Have Ss look at where the phrase’ make a difference’ is located in the dialogue (People donate books and clothes to homeless children, and that makes a difference). Ask Ss to think about how books and clothes can help

1b. Read the conversation again . Answer the following questions

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

* Suggested ideas. 1. Make a difference : doing something good, especially to improve a situation. 2. It plants trees... Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

to better the children’s lives. If needed, 3. It gives more green shade and explain to Ss that’ make a difference’ means makes the air fresher. doing something good, especially to improve a situation. Then ask Ss to think of a community garden in their neighborhood. Have Ss discuss the last two questions in pairs. Then T elicits answers as a class. 2. Look at the words in the box. Can 2. Look at the words in the box. Can you put you put them in the right groups ? *Key : them in the right groups ?(7’/IW/PW) Ss work individually to do the task then Nouns Verbs Adjectives donate clean compare their answers with a partner. Tell Ss help help environmental they can put some words in more than one benefit column. T writes correct answers on the board volunteer benefit plant volunteer Look out! recycle Draw Ss’ attention to the box. Ask Ss to plant identify the words in exercise 2 which can be provide both nouns and verbs, or verbs and adjectives, clean Ask Ss if they can add more examples o the encourage words they know.. Task 2

Task 3

3. Fill the gaps with the words in the 3. Fill the gaps with the words in the box. box.(5’/IW/WC) *Key: Ss complete the exercise individually . 1. volunteer T checks the answers as a class. 2. homeless people 3. donates 4. community service 5. make a difference Task 4

4.Describe the pictures with the verbs 4.Describe the pictures with the verbs in in 2. 2.(4’/PW) *Key: - Tell Ss to look at the list of the verbs Ss 1. donate 2. plant have already got from exercise 2. 3. help 4. clean - Have Ss complete the exercise in pairs. 5. recycle

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Task 5 5. Create word webs.(5’/GW) - Draw the word webs on the board. Have Ss work in groups to complete the word webs in 5 minutes on the sheets of paper. - Encourage Ss to think of as many words as possible. When time is up, swap the sheets among groups to check each other’s answers. Together with the class T elicits answers to complete the word webs on the board. Then ask each group to count how many (correct) words their friends’ group has. The group who has the most correct words is the winner 4. Use: - Model game with a student. - Have the class play the game as instructed. -Sumarize the main point of the lesson.

5. Create word webs. *Key: - Donate: books, blood, clothes, toys… - Help: children, homeless people, old people, the poor… - Clean: streets, walk, lakes, rivers, beaches,… - Provide: food, attention, life skills, education, houses, help, books…

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

5. Game: Vocabulary ping pong Example: A: provide B: food A: homeless people B: help 5. Enlarge knowledge: IV. HOME WORK - T draws the word webs on the board, have ss - Practice reading ‘Listen and read’ work in groups to complete the word webs - Create your own word webs - Do ex B2,3/P.18/WB 6. Game : Vocabulary ping pong - Model with game with a ss first, then have the class play the game as instructed

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 19 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.28-29)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work 2. Grammar: Simple present tense - Pronunciation: the sounds /g/, /k/ 3. Skills: Listening,talking about community service and volunteer work III: TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Text books, recording,laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm up: Chatting Tshows a big picture of people in need to class (children in mountainous areas who do not have enough books). Have Ss discuss what difficulties they think people in that situation face, and what they need. 2. Building knowledge: I.VOCABULARY. 1. Choose the phrases that match the pictures below. Let Ss do the matching individually. T writes the correct answers on the board then asks Ss to discuss these questions as a class: ‘What do you see in the pictures?’ ‘What are the difficulties they face?’ ‘What do they need?’ 3. Practice: Task 1 2. In pairs, take turn to describe the people above. Your partner guesses which picture you are talking about. Then, discuss how you can help the people in these situations.(PW) T can ask Ss about how the people in each of the situation in 1 can be helped. Divide Ss into pairs to do the task. Once Ss have finished, elicit ideas from the whole class. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.28-29)

I. VOCABULARY. 1. Choose the phrases that match the pictures below. Key: 1. Disabled people 2. Elderly people 3.Homeless people 4.Sick children 5.People in a flooded area 2. In pairs, take turn to describe the people above. Your partner guesses which picture you are talking about. Then, discuss how you can help the people in these situations. Example: (page 28)

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 2 3. a. Look at the photos. Which problems does each community have to face?Write a, b,or cnext to the words in the table below (IW) T asks Ss to answer the questions. - What do you see in the picture? - Does our community have similar problems? Ss answer the questions. T tells Ss to provide words include solutions as well. - Ask Ss to work individually to complete the task. 3b. In pairs, talk about the problems in a and the possible solutions. Add your ideas. Have Ss work in pairs to work out some solutions for the problems in a. Encourage Ss to add their own ideas in addition to using the words provided. Once Ss have finished, elicit their ideas as a class Task 3 II.PRONUNCIATION/g/ and /k/ 4. Listen and Repeat. - T plays the recording . Ss listen and repeat. T pauses the recording to drill difficult items. T may play the recording as many times as necessary . Task 4 5. Listen then circle the words you hear. Tell Ss that they will hear one word from each row. Play the recording and instruct Ss to circle the word that they hear. After giving correct answers, have Ss practise both words (the minimal pairs) from each row. Task 5 6. Listen and repeat. T plays the recording and ask Ss to repeat. T may use back-chaining technique if Ss find it difficult to read the sentences. T begins with the last word of the sentence for Ss to repeat. T continues to read the words in reverse order for Ss to repeat until the beginning of the sentence. 4. Use: - Model game with 2 students first before dividing Ss into groups. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. a. Look at the photos. Which problems does each community have to face?Write a, b,or cnext to the words in the table below * Key rubbish a tracffic jams c too many advertisements b dirty beaches a no trees c graffiti b 3b. In pairs, talk about the problems in a and the possible solutions. Add your ideas.

II. PRONUNCIATION: /g/ and /k/ 4. Listen and repeat. community go colour green garden glass give clothes 5. Listen then circle the words you hear. Key. 1. cold 2. green 3. clothes 4. girl 5. goal

6. Listen and repeat. 1. Go Green protects the environment. 2. The girl with the curls is so cute. 3. Last year we started a community garden project. 4. He’s collected clothes for street kids for two years. 5. She likes the colour gold. 7. Game: Stand up, sit down. 66

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - Ask Ss to think of other minimal pairs as in the table in 5. - Have the class play the game as instructed -Summarize the main points of the lesson.. 5. Enlarge knowledge:

Game: stand up, sit down (do as guided)

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

IV. HOMEWORK. -Learn by heart new words. -Practice the sounds /g/, /k/. -Do ExA1,2,3, B1 P.17, 18 in Ex book.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 20 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.29-30)

I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work. 2. Grammar : Past simple. Present perfect . 3. Skills: Listening, speaking and writing. III TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures ; text books, recording,laptop. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities 1. Warm up : Revision (5’/IW) Verb form checking: T divides the class into 2 groups. Group 1 say aloud 5 verbs in bare form, Group 2 say aloud the 5 verbs in past participle form.Then change. Which group gives more correct form of the verbs will be the winner. T comments and leads in the lesson.

Contents UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.29-30)

2. Building knowledge: I. GRAMMAR I. GRAMMAR Past simple and present perfect. Past simple and present perfect. Example : (1) T asks Ss to keep books closed. Write the Last year I went to Hoi An I have been to Hoi An (2) following on the board: T draws their attention to the difference between sentense (1) and sentence (2) by asking Ss questions such as: When do you think these actions happened: in the past, at present, or in the future? Which sentence tells you exactly when it happened? Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Ss answer the questions. Both sentences say that the person spent some time in Hoi An in the past, but sentence (1) describes a particular trip which happened last year, while sentence (2) emphasizes that the person had an experience of Hoi An and does not focus on when it exactly happened. 3. Practice: Task 1 1. a. Listen again to part of the conversation.Underline the past simple or the present perfect. Have Ss open the books and do exercise 1 individually. Ask Ss to identify the difference between the actions they have underlined ‘Last year we provided evening classes for fifty children’ and ‘We’ve asked people to donate books and clothes to the children’. b. When do we use the Past simple? When do we use the Present perfect? Can you think of the rule? - T shows the rule box on the screen and asks them to try to work out the rule first.

- Ask them if they know the time expressions that often go with the past simple and the present perfect. Remember! Go through the Remember! Box with Ss. Ask them to make sentences with these words and add more time expressions if they can.

Task 2 2. Past simple or present perfect ? Put the verb in brackets into the correct Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

II. PRACTICE 1. a. Listen again to part of the conversation.Underline the past simple or the present perfect.

b. When do we use the Past simple? When do we use the Present perfect? Can you think of the rule? Past Simple We use the past simple for an action that started and finished in the past. Present Perfect We use the present perfect for an action that happened some time before now. The exact time in not important. Remember! Một số trạng từ thường sử dụng với thì QKĐ: yesterday, last month, 2 years ago… Một số trạng từ thường sử dụng với thì HTHT: ever, never, so far= recently= lately, for several times, for a long time, for ages, for, since… 2. Past simple or present perfect ? Put the verb in brackets into the correct form. *Key: 70

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 form.(IW/WC) T asks Ss to complete the exercise individually. Then give feedback as a whole class activity. Before giving correct answers, T asks Ss to tell him/her which phrases in the sentences help them to decide if the verb should be in the present perfect or the past simple. Task 3 3. Choose the best answer.(IW/PW) Ss do the exercise individually, then compare the answers with a partner. T writes the correct answers on the board. T may explain the differences between the present perfect and the past simple in sentences 3-4 and 5-6. Task 4 4. With a partner, write sentences about yourself in the past simple and the present perfect. Use the words from the box .(PW) Ss write sentences about themselves using the time expressions, then share them with a partner. If time is short, the work can be divided between two Ss, but T should ensure that all items are covered. 4. Use: - Tell Ss they will need to use the Past simple and the present perfect to complete this task. - Go around to monitor to ensure they not just look at the fact sheet and say out the phrases for each other to copy down. - Take notes of any common errors and correct them as a class later. -Summarize the main points of the lesson.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Cleaned Have collected Collected Has flown; went Have you ever seen; saw

3. Choose the best answer. * Key: 1. b 2. b 3. c 4. a 5. c 6. b 4. With a partner, write sentences about yourself in the past simple and the present perfect. Use the words from the box .

* Pair work. In pairs, Student A looks at the fact sheet below and student B looks at the fact sheet on page 33. Each student asks and answer questions about the fact sheet to complete the information. Example: A: What happened in 2011? B: Be a Buddy was established in 2011. What did Be a Buddy do in 2012? A: In 2012…

III. HOME WORK - Recall about the past simple and the 1. Learn by heart the form of the two tenses. present perfect 2. Do B4, 5,B6/P.19 – W.B 5. Enlarge knowledge:

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 21 Week: Class: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 4: Communication (P.31) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to: II. TEACHING CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: read, write and understand the words :tutor (n), nursing home (n), blanket (n), shelter(n), mural(n), sort(n/v). 2. Grammar: Use because for giving reasons. Present perfect . 3. Skills: Reading and speaking about community service and volunteer work. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures ; text books,laptop. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activites

1. Warm up: Chatting T elicits different volunteer activities from Ss. Tell Ss to think of the activities both in the local community/city/town/Viet Nam, and from other places that they may have read about, or seen in books, or on TV, or the Internet etc. 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary - Gives new words. (Pic, synonymn,explanation,mine) - Have Ss play game: ROR

3. Practice : Task 1 1. Look at the photos and read about the following volunteer activities for teenagers in the United States. (IW) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 4: Communication (P.31)

I. Vocabulary Tutor (v) (n): dạy kèm, gia sư nursing home (n): nhà dưỡng lão blanket (n): chăn shelter (n): nhà tình thương mural (n): tranh khổ lớn vẽ lên tường graffiti (n): tường công cộng(có vẽ tranh cổ động) sort (n), (v): loại II. Practice 1. Look at the photos and read about the following volunteer activities for teenagers in the United States.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T asks Ss to look at the photos and describe what they see. Ss compare their ideas with the provided activities. Task 2 2. Look at the photos about community service in Viet Nam. Match them with the activities.(WC/PW) - Tell Ss now they will learn about volunteer activities in Viet Nam. Ask ss what they think the volunteers in the photos are doing. - Ask Ss to do the matching task. - Ask Ss if they know any other actual information about these volunteer activities, or if they know any other similar activities that take place in Viet Nam. Task 3 3. Work in groups. Discuss the benefits each activity may bring to the community. Share your answers with the class. - Ask Ss to complete the exercise in groups. - Each group choose one person from the group to report back to the class. 4. Use: 4. Ask each other: - Ask Ss to interview at least three students Ss work in groups of three to practice. Ask them take notes of their classmates’ answers so that they can share the most interesting answers with the class later. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: Recall what they can do to help the community

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

2. Look at the photos about community service in Viet Nam. Match them with the activities. - What are the volunteers in the photos doing? Key: 1. b 2. c 3. e 4. a 5. d

3. Work in groups. Discuss the benefits each activity may bring to the community. Share your answers with the class.

4. Ask each other: - Have you ever done any of these activities? - Choose three activities that you want to try. - Why do you want them? * HOMEWORK - Learn by heart new vocabs -Do exercises C1,2/ P.20 in work book

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 22 Week: Class: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 5. Skills 1 (P.32) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: Read, write and understand words : Statistics (n),Force (v),Raise money for (v),Labour (n),Mentor (n) , 2. Grammar Use because for giving reasons. Present perfect . 3. Skills: Read for specific about community service and volunteer work and speak about community service and volunteer work III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures text books,laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

1. Warm up: Chatting (6’/IW) T :Have you ever done volunteer work?

Contents

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.32)

Ss answer one by one. 2. Building knowledge: I. READING 1. Read the text about volunteer work in the United States. - Ask Ss to read the text and underline any words they don’t know. Ss read and find out the new words. - As a whole class, discuss any unfamiliar words from the text. * Checking technique: Slap the board T calls two ss to read the text again. 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Decide if the following statements are true Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. READING 1. Read the text about volunteer work in the United States. * Vocabulary Statistics (n): thống kê Force (v): bắt buộc Raise money for (v): quyên góp tiền cho Labour (n): sức lao động, lực lượng lao động Mentor (n): thầy hướng dẫn. 2. Decide if the following statements are true or false. * Key: 75

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

or false. - Remind Ss of some of the American volunteer activities they learnt about in the last lesson. - Call on Ss to read the statements from 2 aloud. - Ask ss to guess if the statements are true or false. - Ask Ss to read the passage again and answer the questions. SS work individually. - Correct the answers as a class.

1. T 2. T 3. F (The text says Americans have had the tradition of volunteering since the early days of the country. The USA was “born”, or declared its independence, in 1776.) 4. F (Americans volunteer because they enjoy it, and not because they are forced or paid to do it).

Task 2 3. Which of the activities below are traditional volunteer activities in the United States? T asks Ss to read the passage again and answer the questions. SS work individually. Correct the answer as a class.

3. Which of the activities below are traditional volunteer activities in the United States? * Key : 1. providing care for animals 2. raising money 3. cooking meals 4. donating blood 5. cleaning streets 6. teaching young children

Task 3

II. SPEAKING. 4. Idea bank: Fill in the table with II. SPEAKING 4. Idea bank: Fill in the table with your ideas your ideas for volunteer activities. • To raise money, we could… for volunteer activities. • To provide food. We could… - Give 5 minutes for ss to work individually to • To help repair things, we complete this task. could… SS work individually. • To help people with - Encourage them to think of all the volunteer transportation, we could… activities they have learnt so far in this unit, and any other activities that they know. • To tutor young children, we - Ss only need to write in note form and not could… full sentences. Task 4 5. Work in group. Share the ideas in your idea bank with your group members. Then use the most interesting ideas to create a new group idea bank and share it with the class. T divides the class into groups of four or five. Explain that after each person shares his or her ideas from 4, the group will need to choose Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

5. Work in group. Share the ideas in your idea bank with your group members. Then use the most interesting ideas to create a new group idea bank and share it with the class. Example: A: We could make postcards and sell them to raise money. 76

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

one idea and develop it in more detail. B: What types of postcards? For example, if the group chooses the idea’ C: where should we sell them? make postcards and sell them’ as a way to raise funds, they will need to think of answers to questions such as: What types of postcards? What are the postcards made of? What is written on the postcards? Who can make the postcards? Where should the postcards be sold? How will we let people know about our project? If time allows, each group can make a short presentation of their plan to the class.’ 4. Use: -Summarize the main point of the lesson by asking some questions about the lesson. 5. Enlarge the knowledge: HOMEWORK - Learn by heart new vocab. - What should you mention when you talk about community service and volunteer work? - Do D1,2,3/ P.21-22 (WB)

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 23 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 6. Skills 2 (P.33)

I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work 2. Grammar: Use because for giving reasons. Present perfect . Simple past 3. Skills: Listening and writing about community service and volunteer work III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures ; T.V,text books,laptop, recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

1. Warm up: * Network ‘Volunteer work’ T divides the class into 2 teams, - Ss work in 2 teams to write as many words and phrases relating to volunteer work as possible.. - Check and correct. 2. Building knowledge: I. LISTENING VOCABULARY -T presents some new words using pictures.

Contents

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 6. Skills 2 (P.33) * Network ‘Volunteer work’ - donating blood, food, books….. - planting trees, flowers… - cleaning the street, the beach.. -…. I. LISTENING VOCABULARY self- confident (adj): tự tin

3. Practice:

special (adj): đặc biệt PRACTICE

Task 1

1.Discuss the following questions.

• Who do you think benefits from volunteer work? T asks Ss to choose a volunteering idea from • How do people benefits form the previous lessons. Ask the class: ‘Who do volunteer work? you think benefits from that volunteer work?’ ‘In what way?’ Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Then discuss as a class the two questions in exercise 1. Ss work in pairs to discuss the two questions. If T has some volunteer experience himself/herself, talk about it with the class and tell Ss what it means to you. Task 2 2. Listen to the recording and answer the questions. T reminds Ss of the interview between the Global Citizen reporter and the two students Mai and Phuc from Hai Ba Trung School who do volunteer work with Be a Buddy and Go Green. Ss recall what happened in the first part of the interview (in Getting Started). T asks Ss if they can guess what Mai and Phuc will talk about in the second part of the interview. T plays the recording and elicit from Ss the gist of this recording. (It’s about the benefits Mai and Phuc think that volunteer work brings about.) Ss listen and find out the gist of this recording. T plays the recording as many times as necessary and have Ss answer the questions. Ss listen and answer the questions individually. T notes that another purpose of this exercise is to prepare Ss for the Writing section later where they learn how to give reasons for their ideas and opinions. T calls some pairs to ask and answer again. T checks and comments. Task 3 3. Listen again and fill in the blanks. T asks ss to fill in the blanks individually. - Play the recording again and let Ss check - Confirm and correct their answers.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 2. Listen to the recording and answer the questions. * Keys: 1. Phuc does volunteer work because he thinks it makes a difference in the community. 2. Phuc feels more self-confident because he has made new friends. 3. The reporter thinks Phuc is confident because Phuc has answered the interview very well. 4. Mai thinks volunteering is special because she can help others, and because she can see how happy the street children are when they learn.

3. Listen again and fill in the blanks. Key: 1. Volunteer 2. Feel 3. Because 4. Because, children

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 4 II. WRITING * Study skills- Giving reasons -T shows the Study Skills on the screen and goes through the study Skills box with the class. T explains that ‘because’ is used to introduce the reason for something, and it can be put at the beginning of the sentence or in the middle. For exercise 4, Ss will need to identity which sentence is the reason. T may introduce ‘as’ and ‘since’, which are similar in meaning and use to ‘because’. Task 5 4. Combine the two sentences using because. - T asks Ss to do exercise 4 individually. - T asks Ss to give their answers. - T confirms and corrects their answers.

Task 6 5. Look at your volunteer ideas in Speaking 4. Choose one idea and write a short paragraph about it. Tell Ss now they will write a paragraph using the ideas they generated in Speaking 4. T asks Ss to make notes in class then develop the notes into a paragraph as homework. Ss make notes individually. 4. Use: -Swap Ss’s writing and correct. -Summarize the main point of the lesson. *HOMEWORK -Learn by heart new words -Finish the writing at home. - Do E1,2,3/P.22-23

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 II. WRITING. * Study skills- Giving reasons + Form Because + clause 2 (reason ), + clause 1 clause 1 + because + clause 2 (reason ) + Use: To join ideas and give reasons.

4. Combine the two sentences using because. Key: 1. Because he didn’t wear enough warm clothes, he’s had a cold for two days. 2. I stayed home because it rained. 3. Because the lake is full of rubbish, they’ve decided to clean it up. 4. Because she works in that small town, she has lived three for three years. 5. Look at your volunteer ideas in Speaking 4. Choose one idea and write a short paragraph about it.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 24 Week: Class: UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 7. Looking back and Project (P.34-35) I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss wil be able to II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: Review : the lexical items related to community service and volunteer work 2. Grammar: Review : because for giving reasons. Present perfect . Simple past 3. Skills: Speaking,reading and writing. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: Poster,Pictures ; text books,laptop. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEPS: Teacher and students’ activities

1. Warm up -T asks ss something about volunteer work. 2. Building knowledge: I. VOCABULARY 1. Match the verbs in blue with the correct words in the box. T reminds Ss of the wordwebs about ‘donate’, ‘provide’ and ‘help’ then Ss complete Activity 1 in pairs. T tells Ss that some words in the box can be matched with more than one verb in blue. - Check as whole class. 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Circle the best answer. T asks Ss to complete this activity individually. Ss work individually in 3 mins. - Ask them to explain why the option they choose is suitable to complete the sentences but the other two options are not. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents

UNIT 3: COMMUNITY SERVICE Lesson 7. Looking back and project (P.34-35) I. VOCABULARY 1. Match the verbs in blue with the correct words in the box. Key: • Donate: food, books, clothing, blood. • Provide: evening classes, food, care, books, education, clothing, attention. • Help: the community, homeless people, the elderly, the disabled. II. GRAMMAR 2. Circle the best answer. Key: 1. Never 2. Last week 3. Already 4. Yet 5. Yesterday Try again. 83

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 3. Put the verbs in the past simple or present perfect. - T asks ss to complete this exercise individually. Ss works individually then share their answers with a partner. - Before giving correction, T asks Ss to explain the differences between sentences 2 and 3, and 4 and 5. - Quickly review the past simple and the present perfect. Task 2 COMMUNICATION 5. Role-play. T divides Ss into pairs of As and Bs. -T tells Ss to read their role cards and ask and answer questions with each other. - Have them role play the interview for the class. Task 3 PROJECT Ss propose their own volunteer project: Give Ss several days to complete the project, and ask them to present their project in the form of a poster. If the project is useful and practical, T can even help, or ask the school to help, to realize the proposal! 4. Use: -Summarize the main point of the Unit. - Ss do the Finished * HOMEWORK. - Complete the project. - Review all the lexical and grammatical items in Unit 3. - Prepare Review 1.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. Put the verbs in the past simple or present perfect. Key: 1. Has ever met 2. Visited 3. Has visited 4. Did Shakespeare write 5. Has she written

III. COMMUNICATION 5. Role-play. Student A is a reporter and student B is a volunteer. Student A asks the questions and writes down student B’s answers. Then swap your roles. Use the following questions as prompts. IV. PROJECT YOUR VOLUNTEER WORK

.............

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: / / 2019 Teaching date: / / 2019 Period: 26 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

REVIEW 1(LANGUAGE)

I.Objectives: - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise pronunciation, vocab, grammar from unit 1 to unit 3 II. Language contents: - Grammar: present simple and simple future, Past simple , the present perfect tense. Verbs of linking V_ing. Compound sentences. Imperative with more and less and present perfect - Vocabulary: Words expressing hobbies, health issues, community sevice and volunteer work - Pronunciation: Practice pronouncing the sounds: / ə / , / Ǭ: / / f / , /v/, / k/ , /g/ III.Teaching aids: - Textbooks, teaching plan, extra board, radio, CD IV. Teaching step: Teacher's and Students’ activities Content 1. PRONUNCIATION. (10’) PRONUNCIATION Exercise 1: 1. Listen and tick ( ) the word if it is the - T asks students to pronounce these words same as what you hear and cross ( x) if it first and correct Ss’ mistakes. is different. He / She then plays the recording as many 1. lock x 7. cream x times as needed. 2. community 8. grocer x 3. kind x 9. vampire 4. cracker x 10. bread 11. fruit 5. flavour 6. fear 12. vary x Tapescript: 1. log 7. gleam 2. community 8. closer 3. find 9. vampire 4. fracture 10. bread 5. flavour 11. fruit 6. fear 12. carry Exercise 2: 2. Choose the word in which the - T may let students do it in groups and underlined sound is pronounced encourage them to read the words out loud differently. among themselves. 1. A 2. C 3. C 4. B 5. - Then T checks them as a class and encourages students to repeat the words. 2. VOCABULARY (10’) VOCABULARY Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Exercise 3: 3. Put the phrases below into the correct All these activities have been taken from the categories and tick the activity/ activities first three units, so they are expected to be you do yourself quite easy for students to do. T gives students Activities to help… about 10 minutes to read and write down the yourself Your community phrases into the correct columns and tick their - washing your - helping the old activities. For more advanced Ss, T can ask hands before - raising money them to add more activities into the columns. meals for the poor - tidying up your -collecting rubbish room in your area - gardening - opening classes - eating a lot of for street children fruit Exercise 4: 4. How much can you remember? - This exercise is a combination of reading Choose one of the words/ phrases below comprehension and vocabulary use. to match the description. The first one is - T helps by making suggestions or giving the an example. first letter of the word. Key: 1. obesity 2. cleaning the street - At the end, T writes the correct answers on 3. calories 4. staying in shape board. 5. donating 6. hobby 3. GRAMMAR (13’) GRAMMAR Exercise 5: 5. Choose the best answer A, B, or C to - This is a revision of the use of simple complete the sentences. present, simple past and present perfect and 1. A 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. C 6. B the time signals that go with each. - Students can complete this exercise with ease. Exercise 6: 6. Match the beginnings in A with the - T. may let students read the beginnings and endings in B. the endings for a few minutes, then match 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. c 5. B individually. - T calls on some students read their answers. - T corrects their answers. - T corrects the answers if necessary. 4. EVERYDAY ENGLISH (7’) EVERYDAY ENGLISH Exercise 7: Suggested interpretation of your • If you answer “ Yes” to all the answers: questions, you do have very If you answer “Yes” to all the questions, you healthy eating habits. do have very healthy eating habits. For each • If your score is under four, change wrong answer, take off 1 point. your habits! If your score is under four, change your habits! IV. Homework. (2’) 5. Use: - Do Test yourself in the Workbook. - Remind the aim of the lesson from - Prepare: Review 1: Skills students:Revise pronunciation, vocabulary, grammar, everyday English about hobbies, health and community service.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 27 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

REVIEW 1(SKILLS)

I. OBJECTIVES. - By the end of the lesson, students will be able to revise reading, speaking, listening and writing about hobbies, health and community service. II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS - Reading for specific information about hobby. - Speaking community activities. - Listening for general and specific information about Nga’s birthday party. - Writing about some environmental activities. III. TEACHING AIDS - Books, lesson plan, cassette IV. TEACHING STEP:

Teacher's& Students’ activities II. Warm up. (3’). Chatting: What should you do if you have sore eyes? III. The new lesson 1. Reading (10’) LIVE TO BE HAPPY - T asks students to read the questions first and identify the keywords in each question.

Content

4. Writing (8’) T asks students to determine the subjects and the verbs of each sentence to see if it is a

I. Reading. LIVE TO BE HAPPY 1. Read the passage, then choose the most appropriate answer A, B or C to each question. Students can then read the text and choose the answers. Give the key 1. A 2. B 3. C 4. B II. Speaking ARE YOU A COMMUNITY PERSON? 2. Work in pairs. Interview each other to complete the questionnaire below. Circle the correct answers and report the results to your class. III. Listening 3. Listen to two friends talking about different situations and tick the correct answer to each question. Conversation1: 1. A 2. B Conversation2: 1. B 2. C IV. Writing 4. Make complete sentences from the prompts below and put them under the

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

2. Speaking (10’) ARE YOU A COMMUNITY PERSON? - Let students start with the question-andanswer through speaking and listening. Then they can exchange their results and take turns to report it to class. 3. Listening (9’) - T plays the recording - students listens - T helps if necessary - Check the results

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 simple or a compound sentence. T may allow students to translate the sentences into Vietnamese. - T checks all the answers before betting students do the second task of the exercise.

5. Use: Remind the aim of the lesson from students:Revise reading, speaking, listening and writing about hobbies, health and community service.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 correct pictures. Picture 1: 5. This activity is often done in spring. 6. They dig a hole to put the young tree in. 1. They water and take great care of the trees during the first month. Picture 2: 2. They carry recycle bags to put the rubbish in 4. They walk along the beach and collect all the rubbish. 3. The community organizes this activity once a month. * Homework. (2’) - Review yourselves at home - Do Test yourself in the Workbook. - Prepare for the 45- minute test.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 28 Week: Class: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 1: Getting started (P38-39) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to the topic “Music and Arts”. 2. Grammar: - Comparison with: as…as . 3. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about music and arts III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up: T writes on the board: Music + Arts + Then asks: - Do you often listen to music? When? How often? - What kind of music do you like? Why? - What is art/ are arts? Give example? + T asks Ss to look at the title/ the picture and guess what the conversation between Duong and Nick might be about ? 2. Building knowledge: 1.Listen and read

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 1: Getting started (P38-39) A. GETTING STARTED Art: the use of the imagination to express ideas or feelings, particularly in painting, drawing or sculpture. - the arts ( in general): art, music, theater, literature, etc…When you think of them as a group. 1. Listen and read

Set the scene by using the picture. * Teacher plays the recording. Ss listen twice then find out the new words for themselves. * Vocabulary Teacher explains the new words. Students copy the new words down. (explain) (synonym: directly) (word form: music=>musician) (translate) (picture)

* Vocabulary - live (adv): trực tiếp stream - in person (adv P): - musician (n):nhạc công - atmosphere (n):không khí - crowd (n):đám đông

+ Check vocabulary : R O R T plays the CD again. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Ss listen and then practice the dialogue again in pairs. 3. Practice. Task 1: 1.a, Are these sentences true (T) or false (F). ,Ss work independently or in pairs to answer the questions. T may let them discuss in groups. T checks their answers, and gives explanation. 1b, Finish the following sentences by writing one word/ phrase from the conversation. Ss work individually to fill the gaps in the sentences. T lets them check the answers in pairs or groups, then T gives the key. T calls some Ss to read the sentences. Teacher has Ss read again the dialogue then find out the sentence with “as…as”. 1c, Find these expressions in the conversation. Check what they mean. -Ss refer back to the conversation to find the phrases. Ss practise saying them together. T explains the meaning to the Ss, then give some examples.

1d, Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practise them. T asks Ss to practise the short conversations in pairs before creating their short roleplays. Ss work in pairs to make similar dialogues. T calls some pairs to practise.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

* Practice. 1.a, Are these sentences true (T) or false (F). *Key : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F 1b, Finish the following sentences by writing one word/ phrase from the conversation. *Key: 1. as good as 2. loud 3. fantastic 4. in person 5. cinema * Model sentences It’s not as good as it was before. => Comparison. 1c, Find these expressions in the conversation. Check what they mean. *Key : 1. used when you are thinking what to say or reply. 2. used to show that you don’t agree with what Sbd has said. 3. used to show that you don’t like something. 1d, Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practise them. Example: A: There’ll be a music concert on teacher’ Day. B: Really? Are we going to sing? A: Yes, of course.

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 2: 2. Write the correct word/ phrase under each of the pictures. Then listen and repeat. (10’/PW) Ss write the words/ phrases under the right pictures. T plays the recording. Ss listen and repeat. T calls some ss to read the words and phrases to check and correct their pronunciation. Give them the meaning of the words. Task 3: 3. Complete these sentences with words from 2.(6’/GW) T asks Ss to write the correct words in the spaces. Ss wok in pairs to check their answers. The class gives comments, and T gives correction. 4. Use: -Summarize the main point of the Unit. * Game : Play with words in Activity 2. Teacher gives definitions. Ss compete in teams to call the word.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 2. Write the correct word/ phrase under each of the pictures. Then listen and repeat. 1. microphone 2. camera 3. painting 4. musical instrument 5. portrait 6. art gallery 7. crayons 8. museum 9. opera 10. paintbrush

3. Complete these sentences with words from 2. 1. art gallery 2. paintings 3. museum 4. camera 5. opera.

5. Enlarge knowledge: Recall how to use the expression in P39. * HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Extending their conversation. - Review the lesson. - Do B1 /P29 - WB

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 29 Week: Class: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.40) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : read write and understand the lexical items related to musical instruments. 2. Language: Use some combinations: draw/ paint a picture, play the guitar…to talk about music and arts. - Pronunciation : Pronounce sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ / correctly in isolation and in context. 3. Skills: Listening, speaking about music and arts. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Contents and Board Display

1. Warm up:

UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.40)

* Freetalk: - Do you often listen to music? - What kind…? Can you play any kinds of musical instruments? Can you name some kinds….? 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary (20’/IW/PW) 1. Listen and repeat these words. T plays the recording and lets Ss listen. T plays it again with pauses for them to repeat each word. T corrects their pronunciation. T explains any words that ss don’t know. 3. Practice: Task 1: 2. Match a word in A with a phrase in B Ss work individually to match the words with the phrases. T calls one or two Ss to write the combinations on the board. Then T checks the answers. Task 2: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. Vocabulary 1. Listen and repeat these words. painter artist actress musician puppet dancer singer song writer

2. Match a word in A with a phrase in B. * Key: 1. e 2. b 3. a 4. d 5. c

3a, Put these letters in order to make musical instruments. *Key: 1. drum 2. piano 3. cello 4. guitar 93

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 3a, Put these letters in order to make musical instruments. T lets Ss work in pairs and put the letters in order to form the correct words. Then check their answers. 3b, Write the type of musical instrument in the box under each picture. Let Ss work in pairs. Ss discuss in pairs. T checks their answers. Then let them read the words after T checks their answers. T lets ss talk about these musical instruments Task 3 4. Put one of these words in each blank to finish the sentences. T asks ss to the task individually in 2 minutes. T calls some Ss to write the answers on the board. Then let class comments. T calls some Ss to read the sentences. Task 4 5. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ /. T lets Ss practice the sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ / together. T shows Ss how to pronounce the two sounds. T plays the recording and lets Ss listen and repeat. Tcorrects their pronunciation. Task 5: 6. Listen to the words and put them into two groups. T plays the recording 2 or 3 times. T helps Ss distinguish the two sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ /, and put the words in the right columns. Ss work independently. T checks and comments T asks Ss to give more words having two sounds. Task 6: 7. Listen and repeat… T plays the recording as many times as possible and let Ss repeat the sentences. T corrects their pronunciation and help them do the task as directed. T asks ss to refer to the following: * Sound / ʃ / can be presented by sh/ ch/ s/ t/ c * Sound / ʒ / can be represented by s Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 5. violin 6. saxophone. 3b, Write the type of musical instrument in the box under each picture. *Key: 1. a guitar 2. a drum 3. one string guitar 4. a violin 5. a cello 6. a piano 7. a saxophone 4. Put one of these words in each blank to finish the sentences. *Key: 1. painter 2. Pop 3. singer 4. draw 5. puppets 6. instrument

II. Pronunciation / ʃ / and / ʒ / 5. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to the sounds / ʃ / and / ʒ /. Tapescript: / ʃ /: condition, ocean, shy, sugar, machine / ʒ /: measure, pleasure, usual, vision, decision 6. Listen to the words and put them into two groups. /ʃ/ /ʒ/ anxious closure occasion musician dishwasher leisure rubbish version 7. Listen and repeat… 1. Can you show me the new machine 2. They sing the song “ Auld Lang Syne” on some occasions 3. The musician is very anxious about the next performance. 4. She wanted to share her pleasure with other people. 5. The new cinema is opposite the bus station. 6. Are you sure this is a modern version of “Romeo and Juliet?”

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

4. Use: -Summarize the main point of the lesson. 5. Enlarge knowledge: - T assigns the homework.

I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

A. collection A. usually A. closure A. essential A. discussion A. painter A. music A. actor A. hard A. musical

B. tradition B. leisure B. leisure B. traditional B. vision B. prefer B. so B. guitarist B. talent B. delicious

C. exhibition C. version C. pleasure C. picture C. treasure C. concert C. saxophone C. attract C. happy C. special

D. question D. composer D. sure D. audition D. decision D. perform D. expensive D. gallery D. Similarity D. physician

- Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully * HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice listening more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1,A2, B2 , B3/ P.28- P30 – W.B

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 30 Week: Class: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.41-42) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGAUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Adjectives and the lexical items related to the topic “Music and Arts”. 2. Language: - Comparison with: as…as ; different from; the same as. - Agreement with too and either. 3. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing. III. TEACHING AIDS Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, real things in class. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Wảm up: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.41-42) - Teacher asks ss to work in 2 groups to write as • Network many adjs as possible . T checks and gives comments 2. Building knowledge:

- Big, small, ………………

Grammar 1. Comparisons (not) as……..as / the same as / different from - as + adjective + as to show that two things are similar. - not as + adjective + as to mean - Explain the uses of three structures to Ss and something is more or less than give some examples about the topic ‘music and something else. - the same as… to show similarity. arts’ - different from to show that two or Ss listen carefully and copy down. more things are different. * Examples - Classical music is not as exciting as rock and roll. - The price of the food is the same as it was last year. - City life is quite different from life in the country. 3. Practice. * Practice.

Grammar 1. Comparisons (18’/IW/PW) - Different types of comparisons and vocabulary related to them were already studied in Tieng Anh 5 and Tieng Anh 6. - Ask Ss to recall what they know and give examples.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Task 1: 1. Put as, than, or from in the gaps. (IW/PW) T lets Ss work by themselves and write down the missing words. Ss work individually. T asks some Ss to read the sentences. T correct Ss’ mistakes. Task 2 2. Put one of these phrases in each gap in the passage. (IW/PW) Let Ss do the task individually. First Ss read the text by themselves, then put a suitable word in each gap, and compare their answers with a classmate. T corrects Ss’ answers. T may call some Ss to read out their answers separately. T explains if necessary. Let Ss read in chorus. Correct their pronunciation and intonation. Task 3 3. Work in pairs. Compare the two music clubs in the town. Young talent and Nightingale.(PW) T lets Ss work in pairs. T helps them interpret the table first and gives them instructions on how to do the task. Ss work in pairs to practice. - Encourage Ss to talk as much as possible with fluency and accuracy. - While Ss do their task, T goes around to monitor the class. Task 4 2. too & either (12’/IW/PW) Teacher has Ss read the sample dialogues in pairs. Ss pay attention to the difference between the 2 dialogues. - In the first one, B shows agreement to a positive statement=> He uses “too”. - In the second one, B shows agreement to a negative statement=> He uses “either”. Task 4: 4: Complete the following sentences with “too” or “either”.(IW) Ss work independently, writing down the Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

1. Put as, than, or from in the gaps. * Key: 1. as 2. as 3. as 4. from 5. as 6. as

2. Put one of these phrases in each gap in the passage. *Key: 1. the same as 2. as quite as 3. different from 4. as narrow as 5. friendly as 6. the same as

3. Work in pairs. Compare the two music clubs in the town. Young talent and Nightingale. * Example: Young talent is more friendly than Nightingale. Nightingale is not as friendly as Young Talent, but it is safer.

2. too & either - too: used to express agreement with a positive statement. - either: used to express agreement with a negative statement. * Examples: * A: I like pop music. B: I like it, too. * A: My mum doesn’t like Rand Roll. B: My mum doesn’t like it, either. 4: Complete the following sentences with “too” or “either”. * Key: 1. too 2. either 3. Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

answers. T lets them work in groups to check and read out the sentences. T goes round and corrects mistakes or gives help when and where necessary. Task 5 5: What music and arts are you interested, or not interested in? Make a list by completing the sentences below. ( You can use the words given or your own ideas.) Ss work independently, writing down their sentences to make a list of the likes and dislikes. They have their choices, so long as their sentences are correct grammatically. T encourages them to give their own ideas. 4. Use: 6: Work in pairs. Share your list with your partner. Then, report to the class using too/ either. Ss work in pairs to share their lists of ideas. T may ask some more able Ss to report their results to the class. *Summarize the main point of the lesson.

either 4. too

5. too

5: What music and arts are you interested, or not interested in? Make a list by completing the sentences below. ( You can use the words given or your own ideas.) E.g: I’m very interested in…..Pop music…

6: Work in pairs. Share your list with your partner. Then, report to the class using too/ either. *Examples: Nam is interested in drawing and I am too. Phong doesn’t like folk music and I don’t either.

5. Enlarge knowledge: - T assigns the homework.

1. The hotel in New York was better than the hotel in California. .........................................................................................................

2. French is easier than German. ..............................................................................................................

3. Rick is friendlier than Glenn. ..............................................................................................................

4. Indonesia is hotter than Viet Nam. ..............................................................................................................

5. Football is more exciting than volleyball. .............................................................................................................. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully Homework - Learn by heart vocabulary and structures. - Ex B4,5,6 P30 - 31 (Workbook) - Prepare next lesson

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

100

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 31 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 4: Communication (P.43)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand words : composer (n), curriculum (n), academic (n), originate (v), anthem (n), compulsory (a). 2. Language: Present simple tense 3. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about music and arts. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

101

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 1. Wảm up: - Brainstorming - Teacher elicits the topic from students. ? Brainstorm in groups to geve the names of famous musician, actors, actresses, painters, drama director... you know in 2' - Teacher models ? Work in groups to add as many names as possible. ? Show your list that you have written. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. - The group has the longest list wins the game.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 4: Communication (P.43) Brainstorming Pham Tuyen

..............

Famous people in music and arts

................. ...

.................

2. Building knowledge: VOCABULARY (7’/IW) - Teacher follows the seven steps of teaching vocab - Use different techniques to teach.

3. Practice Task 1: 1. Music Quiz: What do you know? Work in groups and answer the questions. (6’/GW) Ss work in groups and find answers. Then T gives the correct answers. Task 2 2. Read the following passage. In groups, discuss the questions below.(10’/IW/PW) Ss answer teacher's questions a. Do you like music and arts? b. Do you think they are necessary or not at school? T gives Ss plenty of time to work independently, read the text, and understand the main ideas. Then divide the class into groups of four or five to discuss the questions. T goes round the class to give support if necessary. Task 3: 3. Look at the different subjects below. In Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

VOCABULARY - composer : (n) - curriculum

: (n)

nhà soạn nhạc, nhạc sĩ chương trình giảng dạy thuộc nghiên cứu bài quốc ca bắt nguồn ép buộc, bắt buộc

- academic : (a) - anthem : (n) - originate : (n) - compulsory (a) *Practice 1. Music Quiz: What do you know? Work in groups and answer the questions. * Key : 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. B 6. B 2. Read the following passage. In groups, discuss the questions below. - Do you think music and the arts should be compulsory subjects at schools in Viet Nam? Why or Why not?

3. Look at the different subjects below. In groups, make a list from the most useful to the least useful in the space below. How can the top three subjects 102

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 groups, make a list from the most useful to the least useful in the space below. How can the top three subjects on your list help you in other areas of school and life?(10’/PW) Ss work in groups of four to six to make a list from the most useful to least useful subjects given. How can the top three subjects on the list help them in other areas of school and life? After the discussion, each group presents their list, and gives a talk to the class. T then gives comments. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 32 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020 on your list help you in other areas of school and life? - Music - Dancing - Singing - Painting - Photography.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,C2P.32 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.44)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words :puppet (n), rural (a), melodic(a), unique(a), tic tac toe (n). 2. Language: Present simple tense 3. Skills: - read for specific information about traditional arts: water puppetry - speak and do other activities related to music and arts. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Warm up: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Game: Shark attacked Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.44) - Teacher write on the board Game 1: Shark attacked Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

103

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - Give instructions on how to do shark attack. ? Guess one by one letter. - Teacher monitors and gets feedback. ? Read the word aloud and give its meaning. 2. Building knowledge: I. READING (18’/IW/PW) Vocabulary - Teacher follows the seven steps of teaching vocab - Use different techniques to teach. * Checking: What and where 3. Practice Task 1: T shows 4 questions on the screen and asks ss to discuss with a partner in 3 mins. Ss work in pairs, look at the picture on page 44 to do - Teacher elicits the answers from students and gives feedback. Today we are going to read for more information about water puppetry. Ex 1 : Find the words in the text which mean: T asks ss to read the text two or three times in 3' Ss work individually to find the words then compare with their partner. T calls on some students to say the words. - Teacher writes on the board. -T corrects the answers: Ex2. Answer the following questions. T runs through the questions in P44 Ss read the text again then answer the questions individually. Ss compare with their partner. T calls on some individuals to read aloud to the class. - Teacher checks their pronunciation and intonation. Task 2 II. SPEAKING (10’/PW) Ex3. Match the types of music in A with the adjectives to describe them in B. Ss work in pairs to match the two columns Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

-----/-------(water puppetry) I. READING 1. Vocabulary - puppet - rural - unique - melodic

: (n) : (adj) : (adj) : (adj)

Con rối thuộc nông thôn độc đáo du dương, ngọt ngào trò chơi cờ ca rô

- tic tac toe : (n) 2. Practice * Questions : a.What kinds of traditional Vietnamese performances do you know about? b. Do you know about water puppetry? c. Have you ever been to a water puppetry show? d. If yes, did you like it? Why/ Why not? Ex 1 : Find the words in the text which mean: 1. special or different 2. started 3. showed or presented 4. from the countryside 5. events or celebrations *Key: 1. unique 2. originated 3. performed 4. rural 5. festivals Ex2. Answer the following questions. * Key: 1. It began in the 11th century. 2. It takes place in a pool. 3. They are controlled by puppeteers. 4. They are made of wood 5. They are about everyday life in the countryside and about folk tales.

II. SPEAKING Ex3. Match the types of music in A with the adjectives to describe them in B. *Key: 1. e 2. a 3. b 4. c 5. d 104

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 then compare with their partner. Teacher checks their answers. - Allow students some time to talk about their favourite kind of music. (Base on some suggested questions) * Suggested questions: 1. What kind of music do you like best? Why? 2. Do you play any musical instruments? 3. When and how often do you listen to music? 4. How useful is music to you? 4. Use: 4. Game: Tic Tac Toe - Teacher explains the rules of the game Tic Tac Toe to students. ? Work in pairs, decide which partner is "X", which is "O" and who will go first. - Teacher models: - Continue the game - The first person to get three Xs or Os in a row, wins!

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 E.g: I like classical music best because of its sweet melody. I often listen to my favourite music every day before going to bed. It makes me relaxed and sleep well after a hardworking day.

4. Game: Tic Tac Toe 1. Give the names of two Vietnamese musical instruments. 2. Sing a song in English. 3. Who is your favourite singer? Why? 4. Talk for 30 seconds about what you see when you visit an art gallery. 5. How often do you go to a concert? Tell your partner about the last concert you went to. 6. Who is your favourite Vietnamese musician? Why? 7. Talk about 30 seconds about your favourite instrument. 8. Name one of your favourite painters. 9. Who can draw the best in your class? What does he/ she often draw? Decide which partner is X , which is O and who will go first. The first player chooses a box and calls out a number. III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1, D2, D3/P.33/34 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

105

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

106

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 33 Week: Class:

N¨m häc 2019-2020

UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.45)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENT: 1. Vocabulary : - Revision of words related to arts and music. 2. Language: - Invitation with: How about….? - Past simple tense. 3. Skills: - Listen to get information about and artist. - Write an informal letter of invitation. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Warm up: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 6: Skills 2 (P.45) *Chatting: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

107

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T explains Listening Tip to Ss, telling them if they are going to apply the listening tip, then they must be given time to take notes. T shows some pictures about Picasso on the screen. Then tell Ss to look at the picture and say what they know about Picasso. 2. Building knowledge: I. LISTENING 1. Listen to the passage about Picasso and circle the words you hear. T asks Ss to close their books, listen and note down the keywords in their notebooks. T plays the listening once. T asks Ss what they learned about Picasso. Ss open their books. T plays the recording again and ask Ss to listen carefully and circle the words they hear in the passage. T checks by calling some students to write their answers on the board. 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Listen to the passage again and choose the correct answers. T plays the recording again. While Ss listen, they have to circle A, B, or C for their answers. T checks their answers and gives explanation if necessary. Task 2 3. Listen to the passage one more time. As a class, discuss how the listening is organized ( according to a timeline, the order of important events, or another way) T plays the recording again once more. As a class, Ss discuss how the listening is organised.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 *Chatting: Suggested ideas: Was a Spanish painter. 25 October 1881 Sculptor, printmaker, ceramicist, stage designer, poet and playwright who spent most of his adult life in France. As one of the greatest and most influential artists of the 20th century. I. LISTENING 1. Listen to the passage about Picasso and circle the words you hear. * Key: 1. artists 2. training 4. portrait 6. paintings. - Look at the words you’ve circled. Do you know what all of these words mean?

2. Listen to the passage again and choose the correct answers. *Key: 1. A 2. B 3. A 4. C

3. Listen to the passage one more time. As a class, discuss how the listening is organized ( according to a timeline, the order of important events, or another way) *Key: According to timeline.

108

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Task 3 II. Writing. Informal letter of invitation. T asks Ss why they would write an informal letter of invitation and to whom ( to invite sb to do sth, and to sb who has close relationship to you) Then focus their attention on the writing tip. Task 4 4. Read the following letter and choose the correct answer. Have Ss read the sample letter carefully, and note down the useful expressions (cues) for writing an informal letter of invitation. T writes them on the board. Ss choose the correct answers individually. Task 5 5. Now write a letter to invite a friend to an art exhibition, using the following. Ss read the cues carefully, then practise writing the letter. T tells Ss to pay special attention to spelling and punctuation. T may collect some Ss’ writing papers and mark them, then give comments to the class. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson.

II. Writing. Informal letter of invitation.

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework.

III. HOMEWORK - Do E1,2,3/P.34,35 – W.B. - Write their own letter .

- Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Writing tip When you write an informal letter of invitation, you use: How about + V-ing ? 4. Read the following letter and choose the correct answer. *Key: 1. A 2. B

5. Now write a letter to invite a friend to an art exhibition, using the following. - Event: Exhibition of Modern Art. - Time: 9 o’clock, Saturday morning - Place: Arts centre - Time to meet: 8.15

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 34 Week: Class: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.46-47) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

109

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

1. Vocabulary : Review 2. Language: Review 3. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about music and arts. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Warm up: UNIT 4.MUSIC AND ARTS Lesson 7: Looking back and Project * Chatting. (P.46-47) Teacher asks ss to tell something about their favourite singers, artists .ect. 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary: (8’/IW/PW) 1. Match the words in column A with the ones in column B. Ss do this task individually to match the words in two columns. T corrects their mistakes. 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the passage. T lets Ss work in pairs. Ss work in pairs then write the answers in their notebooks. Give explanation if necessary. Then T corrects the mistakes. T calls some ss to read the complete passage . Task 2 3. Put the words/ phrases from the box in the gaps to complete the sentences. Ss work in pairs or in groups and write their answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers. Task3: 4. Rewrite these sentences, using the words in brackets. Ss work individually first to write the sentences. Then they work in pairs to swap their sentences. T gives correction and calls some Ss to read the sentences aloud.

Task 4 Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. Vocabulary: 1. Match the words in column A with the ones in column B. *Key: 1. e 2. c 3. b 4. a 5. d 2. Put a word from the box in each gap to complete the passage. *Key: 1. music 2. arts 3. stages 4. go 5. films

II. Grammar 3. Put the words/ phrases from the box in the gaps to complete the sentences. *Key : 1. art gallery 2. artistic 3. films 4. in person 5. sung 4. Rewrite these sentences, using the words in brackets. *Key: 1. The photograph is not as big as the painting. 2. My painting is not as expensive as this painting. 3. This picture is not different from the picture in our room. 4. This film is the same as the one we saw last week. 110

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

5. Complete the following sentences, using “too” or “ either” Ss do the task individually. Then they check their answers with a partner. T gives correction and calls some Ss to read the sentences aloud.

5. The journey was not as long as we thought at first. 5. Complete the following sentences, using “too” or “ either” 1. too 2. either 3. either 4. too 5. too

Task 5 6. Match the questions 1-6 with the answers A-F. Ss read the questions and answers once or twice. Then match them. Ss work in pairs and role-play the questions and answers, then write all sentences in their notebooks. Finish! T asks Ss to complete the self-assessment. Identify any weakness and provide further practice if necessary. Task 6 Dong Ho paintings 1. Ss work in groups. T tells them to look at the pictures and read the passage carefully. Explain words and anything difficult for Ss. Make sure they understand everything thoroughly. 2. Ss work independently. T encourages them to use their imaginations and make their own paintings. 4. Use: - Teacher guides and sets this activity as homework. *Summarize the main point of the lesson IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework.

III. Communication 6. Match the questions 1-6 with the answers A-F. *Key: 1. B 2. A 3. E 4. C 5. D 6. F Finish! Now I can….

- Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

IV. Project Dong Ho paintings 1. Work in groups. Look at the following pictures and read the information below. 2. Based on the information about Dong Ho paintings and your own ideas, draw a picture of animals or the things around you….

IV. HOMEWORK -Finish their paintings at home . Write sentences to compare those paintings. and next time bring them to class for the show. -Review the lesson.

111

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

112

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 35 Week: Class: REVIEW ( UNIT 3 - 4 ) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary: review the vocabulary and grammar items in unit 3-4: the items related to COMMUNITY SERVICE, MUSIC AND ARTS

2. Grammar: Tenses of verbs ; Imperatives with more, less; sounds .... 3. Skills: Listening, speaking, reading and writing. II. TEACHING AIDS: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

113

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Teacher : Projector, text book, pictures, lesson plan. Students :Textbooks, note books … IV. TEACHING STEP: - T gives handouts to Ss and asks them to do all exercises.

PRACTICE UNIT 3-4 I. Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B: A B 1. do a. swimming Answers: 1 + _____ 2. have b. pottery 2 + _____ 3. go c. a temperature 3 + _____ 4. make pottery d. exercise 4 + _____ II. Choose the best answer by circling A, B, C or D: 1. I __________ Nha Trang when I was a child. A. visit B. visited C. will visit D. have visited 2. He ___________ to the USA so far. A. is B. was C. will be D. has been 3. Americans eat a lot of junk food, __________ junk food causes obesity. A. but B. and C. so D. because 4. Tim: I feel itchy and my nose is running. ~ Doctor: ____________ A. Wash your hair more. B. I think you have the flu. C. Drink more water. Eat less meat D. I think you have a stomachache. 5. Pick out the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. A. allergy B. headache C. temperature D. obesity 6. Choose the word that has the underlined part pronounced differently from the others. A. cold B. curly C. ocean D. clothes READING COMPREHENSION I. Choose the best answer to complete the passage: Headache is a very common disease. The symptoms (1) ________ a headache are various. People may (2) _________ pains only one side of the head. Sometimes when the pain goes away, the head is sore. People have a headache (3) _________ they work too hard or they are too nervous about something. (4) _________ can help cure the disease but people usually have to do more than taking tablets. They can prevent headaches by changing their diets or their (5) __________ or simply by going to bed. 1. A. on B. in C. of D. at 2. A. be B. have C. happen D. take 3. A. when B. but C. so D. and 4. A. Medicine B. Doctor C. Sport D. Fruit 5. A. life B. lifestyles C. hobbies D. working II. Read the passage and complete the list of 5 volunteer activities in the passage: Ho Chi Minh Young Pioneer Organization is planning to help the community by encouraging you to participate in a recycling program. All you have Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

114

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

to do is to collect used glass and cans, and send them for recycling. You can also donate old books to poor students in the city. By doing this, we can help save natural resources and earn some money for the organization. If possible, you can participate in other programs such as donating money to people in a flooded area, helping street children, giving away school uniforms to poor students and cleaning up the school yard. We hope you will join our programs. These are ways to change the world. 0. collect used glass and cans. WRITING I. Combine each pair of the following sentences into one, using the suggested conjunctions in the brackets. (1.5 pts) 1. Mr. Hai usually has stomach problems. He eats dinner very close to the bedtime. (so) → __________________________________________________________ 2. My dad has a lot of carved eggs. He has never sold any of them. (but) → ________________________________________________________________ 3. You will get a breathing problem. Clean your bed room more regularly. (or) → _______________________________________________________________ II. Complete these sentences using the provided words:(1.0 pt) 1. It/ be/ good idea/ eat/ different/ kinds/ fruit/ vegetable/ every day. → _______________________________________________________________ 2. My brother/ not like/ ice-skating/ because/ think/ it/ dangerous. → __________________________________________________________

Period 36: 36: Test I.Objectives: By the end of the test, students will review all the structures and new words they have learnt II. Language content 1. Vocabulary: review from U1-U3 2. Grammar: review from U1-U3 3. Skills: Writing III. Teaching aids : test paper IV. Teaching steps : - gives sts a test paper, explains and lets them do the test --- 0 --I. Listening: (2pts) A) Listen and decide whether the following statements. Circle T or F: (1pt) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

115

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

1. Picasso was born in 1881.

2. Picasso received artistic training from his father at thirteen.

3. In 1896, he completed ‘Portrait of Aunt Pepa’.

4. Picasso died in Malaga.

B) Listen to a conversation and fill in each blank with one word you hear: (1pt) Reporter: So Phuc, why do you volunteer? Phuc: I (1)………………. because it makes a difference in our community. We can encourage people to protect the (2)……………….. and our community will be a better place. Reporter: Do you think volunteering is good for yourself too? Phuc: Oh yes, I’ve made many new friends and I (3)………. much more self- confident. Reporter: I agree. You’ve answered the interview very well... And you Mai? Mai: Volunteering is special to me because I can help others. It’s special because I can see how happy the (4)……………. are when they learn.

II. Multiple choice (3 pts) 1. Circle the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. A. Girl B. Germany C. Group 2. Teenagers in Korea listen to K-pop, and those in Viet Nam do………….. A. either B. too C. so 3. My brother’s taste in art is quite different……….. mine. A. from B. in C. of

4. Did you ………. “Iron man” on TV last night? A. watched B. watch C. have watch 5. She always to………. money to charitable organizations. A. help B. provide C. raise 6. ………… will you do on next holiday? – I’ll go to the mountain. A. What B. When C. Where 7. Mozart was one of the most famous………..of classical music. A. actors B. composers C. artists 8………………… your homework yet?. A. Are you doing B. Have you done 9. Tien Quan Ca is the national…………of Viet Nam A. pop music B. folk song

C. Do you do

C. anthem

10. Find an error: Has Tom and his friends known about that new? A B C 11. “What sports do you like?.” - “_______” A. Well. I like soccer B. No, I don’t know C. I think it’s boring 12. The room smells bad. Somebody………. in here. A. smoke B. smoked C. has smoked III. Reading: (2 pts) Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

116

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

A) Read the following passage, and answer True or False: (1pt) COMMUNITY SERVICE Community service is very important in social life. As you know, our social life has both the rich and the poor people. So it is necessary for us to take part in volunteer activities to help poor people and elderly people. We can help them various ways. Firstly, it is easy for us to collect old clothes which we don’t need. Besides, we can join volunteer activities to raise funds for the poor and the homeless in our country. Finally, we can spend time talking with older people, sharing with poor children. Through these activities, we can develop our leadership skill by organizing fund raising, providing food as well. 1. Community service is not necessary in our life. .……. 2. We take part in volunteer activities to help rich people. .……. 3. We can spend time talking with older people, sharing with poor children. ……. .….... 4. Community service can develop our leadership skill. B) Read the text then choose the best answer: (1pt) There are many kinds of musical (1)……….. and people listen to music all over the world. They turn (2)……….. music in parties, club, weddings and restaurants as well. People like music (3)…………. it helps them forget sadness and makes them feel more love in life. After a hard (4)………….. day, people come back home and feel so tired. Music now can help them close their eyes and relax themselves. Sometimes it is difficult to understand music, but people still enjoy it. 1/ A. instrument B. art C. guitar 2/ A. on B. of C. in 3/ A. so B. but C. because 4/ A. playing B. working C. watching IV. Do as directed: (3 pts) 1. The lake is full rubbish. They’re decided to clean it up. (Combine the sentence using “because”) → ………………………………………………………………………………………… 2. The painting is bigger than the photography. (Rewrite the sentence using: “not as….as”) → The photography ………………………………………….……………………………

3. My favorite kind of music is Pop music. (Make the question for underlined word) → What……………………………………………………………………..?

4. ever/ water puppetry/ Have/ seen/ a/ show?/ you/. (Rearrange this sentence) →…………………………………………………………………………………….. 5. Write an invitation to one of your friends or relatives:

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

117

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

118

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 37 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 1: Getting started (P48-49) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand words related to : - Food and drink: lemonade, omelette, sweet soup, turmeric, eel soup. - Adjectives describing food: bitter, fragrant, salty, sour, tasty, spicy, delicious. 2. Language : - Countable and uncountable nouns, How much and how many….. . 3. Skills: Listening, speaking about different food and drinks. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, projector. Students: pictures about food and drink. IV. TEACHING STEP: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

119

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Teacher and Students' activities 1. Warm up: Free talk: - What is your favorite food? - What do you often have for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner? T writes the Unit tittle on the board. T shows the photo on the screen. Ss look at the picture and answer T’s questions. - Where are Phong and his mum? - What might be happening to them? - What are they doing? - What is there in the fridge? 2. Building knowledge: 1.Listen and read (10’/IW/PW) *Vocabulary: T elicits some new words (pictures, realias, situations ….) Have Ss read twice * Checking vocab: matching T plays the recording. Ss listen and read the dialogue in pairs. T checks some pairs. 3. Practice: Task 1 1a) Read the conversation and answer the questions: Ss work in pairs, discuss the answers to the questions. T checks and give comments.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 Contents and Board Display UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 1: Getting started (P48-49) A. GETTING STARTED Dinner alone

1. Listen and read *Vocabulary: - tofu (n): đậu phụ - warm sth up ( v): hâm nóng gì - mineral water (n): nước khoáng - carton (n): hộp bìa cứng *Practice: 1a) Read the conversation and answer the questions: *Key: 1. Because his parents are going to the opera tonight and they won’t be home until 9 pm. 2. There’s some rice left from lunch. 3. Phong should warm it up. 4. She’ll buy some milk tomorrow. 5. He can have some orange juice instead of milk. 1b) Find the word about Food and Drink.

1b) Find the word about Food and Drink. - Ask Ss not to look at the book and try to remember which food and drinks are mentioned in the conversation. Then let them open their book and check their answer. Ss work independently.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Food meat tofu fried vegetables bread noodles rice

120

Drink milk Juice mineral water orange juice

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 2 2. Match the food and drink with the pictures. (7’/IW/PW) Have Ss quickly match each word/ phrase with its picture. T plays the recording. Ss listen to check and repeat. T can explain the words that ss don’t know. T calls some weak ss to read these words again . Task 3 3. Think about your favourite food and drink. What questions can you ask about them? Ask and answer questions with a partner. (7’/PW) - T asks Ss to think about their favorite food and drink, and what questions they can ask about their partners’ favorite food and drink. T calls 2 students to practice the example dialogue. - Model this activity with a more able student. Ss work in pairs to make their own dialogues. T checks and give comments. Task 4 4. Listen and repeat the adjectives. (7’/PW) - T plays the recording twice and asks Ss to listen and repeat the adjectives. T explains some words if they don’t know. T calls some weak ss to repeat the adjectives to make sure they pronounce them correctly. - Ask Ss to add more adjectives and allow them to write the adjectives on the board. Then Ss individually describe the food in activity 2 using the adjectives. 4. Use: 5. Game WHAT’S YOUR FAVOURITE FOOD AND DRINK? - Demonstrate the game to the class first. Describe one or two favourite foods or drinks and ask some more able Ss to guess their name. then when Ss know exactly what to do, ask them to work in groups. Ss work in groups. One student describes his favourite food or drink. The rest of the group tries to guess which food or drink it is. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 2. Match the food and drink with the pictures. *Key: 1. J 2. F 3. A 4. B 5. D 6. I 7. G 8. H 9. E 10. C 3. Think about your favourite food and drink. What questions can you ask about them? Ask and answer questions with a partner. Example: A: What’s your favourite food? B: It’s Pho bo – beef noodle soup. A: When do you usually eat it? B: In the morning.

4. Listen and repeat the adjectives. 1. bitter 5. salty 2. delicious 6. spicy 3. tasty 7. fragrant 4. sweet 8. sour

* Example: Green tea is bitter.

5. Game WHAT’S YOUR FAVOURITE FOOD AND DRINK? Example: A: It’s my favourite drink. It’s a bit sour, but it’s also sweet. B: Is it lemonade? A: Yes, it is. / No, try again.

121

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 -Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Review the lesson. - Do B1,B2/P36,37 - WB

122

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 38 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.50) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand verbs for cooking and lexical items related to food and drinks : - heat (v), pour (v),fold (v), beat (v), serve (v), turmeric (n), pepper (n) 2. Language: Imperative to make instructions. - Pronunciation : pronounce correctly the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ in isolation and in context 3. . Skills: Listening, speaking about recipes. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, projector. Students: pictures of ingredients to make their dishes. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Contents and Board Display

1. Warm up: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD 123

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 * Chatting T : Do you often help your mum with the housework? Do you know how to cook rice? What is your favorite food? Can you cook it ? Ss answer T’s questions . 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary (20’/IW/PW)

N¨m häc 2019-2020 AND DRINK Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.50) *Chatting

I. Vocabulary

* Vocabulary

* Vocabulary -T elicits the new words using pictures and - heat (v): đun nóng - pour (v): rót explanation. - fold (v) gấp, cuộn Ss repeat in chorus and individually - beat (v) đánh - serve (v) phục vụ - turmeric (n) củ nghệ + Check vocabulary “ Matching” - Ss work individually then compare in pairs. T - pepper (n) hạt tiêu checks then gives feedback. * Practice. 1. Look at the pictures and complete 3. Practice: the instructions with the verbs in the Task 1 box. 1. Look at the pictures and complete the *Key: instructions with the verbs in the box. 1. Beat - Have Ss complete the instructions with the 2. Heat verbs in the box. 3. Pour Ss work independently. 4. Fold - T checks and asks ss to gives other 5. Serve instructions for their favorite recipes. Task 2 2. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences. Then reorder the 2. Put the words in the correct order to make sentences. Then reorder the sentences to give sentences to give the instructions on the instructions on how to make a pancake. how to make a pancake. - Ask ss to do the exercise individually and then Key: check with the whole class. 1. Beat the eggs together with sugar, Ss do the exercise individually. flour , and milk. When checking, ask Ss to refer to 1 to make the 2. Pour ¼ cup of the mixture into the meanings of the verbs clearer to them. pan at a time. 3. Heat the oil over a medium heat in a frying pan. 4. Cook until golden. 5. Serve the pancake with some vegetables. Reordering: 1-3-2-4-5

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

124

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 3 3. Put the nouns in the correct columns. Some may fit in both categories. - Check Ss’ understanding of the meanings on the nouns given. - Explain the meanings by using pictures, example. - Have Ss put nouns in the correct columns. - Remind Ss that some nouns may fit in both columns. Ss do the exercise individually. T checks with the whole class. II. Pronunciation (13’/IW/PW) / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. Task 4 4. Listen and repeat the words. Pay attention to the sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. - Model the sounds /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ first and let Ss see how the sounds are formed. - Ask Ss to practice the /ɒ/ and /ɔ:/ sounds together. Play the recording and ask Ss to listen and repeat. Ss listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to listen again and put the words in the correct column. Ss do the exercise individually then compare their answers in pairs. T checks with the whole class. Task 5 5. Listen to the sentences and circle the words you hear. T plays the recording . Ss listen and circle the words they hear T checks with the whole class. T calls some ss to read correct sentences. T asks ss to give some words that contain the two sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. 4. Use: -Summarize the main points of the lesson T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. Put the nouns in the correct columns. Some may fit in both categories. Key: Dishes Ingredients pancake, beef salt, cooking oil, noodle soup, spring flour, pork, turmeric, rolls, noodles, pork, pepper, noodles. omelette, sandwich.

II. Pronunciation / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. 4. Listen and repeat the words. Pay attention to the sounds / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. *Key: - / ɒ / : soft, hot, bottle, pot, rod. - / ɔ: / : pork, salt, fork, sport, sauce.

5. Listen to the sentences and circle the words you hear. Key: 1. Cod 2. Port 3. Sports 4. Fox 5. Short .

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sound / ɒ / and / ɔ: /. more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2/P.3; B4/P.37- W.B 125

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

126

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 39 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.51-52) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : the lexical items related to “Vietnamese food and drink”: spinach(n), pork(n), beef (n), 2. Language: Use : - Countable and uncountable nouns, How much and how many…... - A, an, some, any……. to talk about food and drink. 3. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about food and drink. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, the recording, projector. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents and Board Display

127

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 1. Warm up: T shows the picture on page 51 on the screen. Ss look at the picture and identify countable and uncountable nouns. - In two teams, ss groups the nouns given on page 51 in two column. T checks and gives comments

N¨m häc 2019-2020 UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.51-52) Countable Uncountable Banana Bread Apple Beef Pepper Pork Turmeric Spinach

2. Building knowledge: I. Grammar Countable and uncountable nouns (7’/IW) - Ask Ss to study the Grammar box. Draw Ss’ attention to the difference between countable nouns and uncountable nouns and the use of measurement phrase, by analyzing the examples in the Grammar box. Then ask Ss to give some more examples. T reminds Ss that they should use a good dictionary to check if a noun is countable or uncountable.

I. Grammar Countable and uncountable nouns For uncountable nouns we can use phrases like a bottle of, a piece of, a bar of, a glass of, a kilo of, and a bag of, etc. Example: - A bottle of water

Task 1

A/ an/ some/ any

A/ an/ some/ any (14’/IW/PW) * Teacher gives some unfinished sentences. Ss work individually to complete using a/an/some/any. T and Ss check. *Concept check: T : When do we use a/an/some/any? Ss look at the examples and tell… T has ss look at the Remember on page 52.

Task 2 2. Game: Give me an egg! Ss play in 2 teams. One team says a word related to food and drink. The other adds a/an/some/any.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

1. There is……an……egg. 2. There are …… some …eggs. 3. There isn’t…… an ……egg. 4. There aren’t… any ………..eggs. 5. Is there……… an …egg? 6. Are there …… any………eggs? 7. There is…… some …….milk. 8. There isn’t… any ………milk. 9. Is there……… any …milk? Remember/P.52 *We can use Some is in an offer or a request . Ex : Would you like some orange juice? Can I have some milk, please ? 2. Game: Give me an egg! One team says words related to food or drink. The other team adds some /a/ an. Example: Team 1: egg 128

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Team 2: an egg Team 1: flour Team 2: some flour. Task 3 3. Fill the blanks with a/ an / some or any in 3. Fill the blanks with a/ an / some or the following conversation. any in the following conversation. Ss work individually to complete the *Key: dialogue. 1. any T and Ss check. 2. some Ss practice the dialogue in pairs. 3. some 4. any T checks some pairs. 5. a 6. an Task 4 How much / how many Eg1: How many eggs do we have? How much / how many (12’/IW/PW) - T makes some examples. Eg2: How much milk do you need? Ss look at the examples and tell the use. => Ask about quantity. T asks Ss to study the Grammar Box. - How many + plural countable nouns. - How much + uncountable nouns. 4. Fill each blank with How many or 4. Fill each blank with How many or How How much. much. *Key: Ss do individually. 1. How many Ss share the result with their partners. 2. How much T checks and gives comments 3. How many 4. How many 5. How much Task 5 5. Work in pairs. Use the suggested words to make questions with How much/ How many, then interview your partner. - Ask Ss to work in pairs, ask and answer the questions with How many and How much. - Call on some pairs and give comment.

5. Work in pairs. Use the suggested words to make questions with How much/ How many, then interview your partner. Example: How much milk do you drink every morning? *Key: 1.How much water do you drink every day? 2.How much rice do you eat for dinner? 3.How may vegetables do you eat every day? 4.How many apples do you eat every day?

4. Use: Summarize the main points of the lesson. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

129

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

- T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

- Do part B3,5,6,7/P.37,38 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

130

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 40 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 4: Communication (P.53) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand words : - sticky rice (n), sauce (n), sausage (n) yoghurt (n), tuna (n), ham (n). 2. Language: - Wh-questions to ask about one’s favorite food and drink. 3. Skills: - Listening, speaking about favorite food and drink. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, projector. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

131

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 1. Warm up:

N¨m häc 2019-2020 UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 4: Communication (P.53)

*Chatting Teacher asks ss some questions their favorite food and drink. T leads in the lesson. T: Today, we are going to do an interview with your classmates about their favorite food and drink. Please think of the questions you may ask your friends in your interview with them. 2. Building knowledge: 1: Vocabulary (6’/IW) 1. Vocabulary Teacher uses different techniques to teach - sticky rice: (n) xôi vocab (situation, realia ) - sauce: (n) nước sốt - Ss read chorally, individually. - sausage: (n) xúc xích - Checking: R0R. - yoghurt: (n) sữa chua - tuna: (n) cá ngừ - ham : (n) giăm bông 3.Practice Task 1 Ex1. Listen to a celebrity chef, Austin Nguyen talking about his favorite food. Which food in Extra vocabulary does he talk about? (8’/IW/PW) - Ask Ss to look at the picture of the chef and predict which food or dishes he might like. - Play the recording and let Ss check their predictions. Play the recording again and ask Ss to tick the food the chef mentions from the Extra vocabulary box. Task 2 Ex2. What are your favorite foods and drinks? Write your answers in the table below.(7’/IW/PW) - First, have Ss read the questions in the table carefully and ask them to note their answers. Ss work individually then share their answers in pairs to find out what they have in common their partners. Task 3 Ex3. Now, interview three students about their favourite foods and drinks. Write their answers in the table below. (10’/PW) T asks Ss to move around and ask different Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

2.Practice Ex1. Listen to a celebrity chef, Austin Nguyen talking about his favorite food. Which food in Extra vocabulary does he talk about? * Answer: - sticky rice - sausage - yoghurt - tuna (steak) Ex2. What are your favorite foods and drinks? Write your answers in the table below. Example: My favorite food is spring roll. It tastes delicious. ….

Ex3. Now, interview three students about their favourite foods and drinks. Write their answers in the table below. Questions: 1.What’s your favourite food? 132

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

classmates every question. T reminds Ss to write the names of the people they interview and note the answers in the table. Ss work in group of 4, one by one ask and answer the questions. - Have Ss practice the results of their interview in pairs. 4. Use: 4. Report your result to the class. - T calls on some Ss to report the results of their interviews before the whole class. - T invites some comments from other Ss. - T corrects the common errors. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

2.How does it taste? 3.What’s your favourite drink? 4.When do you often drink it? 5.What foreign food / drink do you like? 6.What new food do you want to try? 7.What food do you hate? 8.What food can you cook?

4. Report your result to the class. * Example: His favorite food is steak. It is tasty but a bit spicy. His favorite drink is yoghurt. He often drinks it after dinner. …………………… III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,C2/P.49 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

Period 41: CORRECT THE TEST I. Aims: - Know their mistakes - Understand the lesson clearly II. Language content: Review vocabulary and grammar III. Teaching aids : Sub-board IV. Teaching steps: Method

Content ANSWER KEYS

- Lets sts look at their paper test, then explains and corrects all the exercises in it ( from E1 – E5)

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

133

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

* Homework - prepare Unit 4: Getting started

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

134

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 42 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.54-55) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words : stew (v), bone (n), broth (n), boneless (adj), teaspoon (n), pinch (n), ingredient (n). 2. Language: - Nouns (countable/ uncountable) - How much? / How many? - a/ an, some, any… 3. Skills: Reading for special information about pho, a popular food in Vietnam. Speaking about some recipes. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Warm up: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK *Chatting: Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.54-55) -T shows the picture of a bowl of pho on the screen. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

135

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Teacher asks ss some questions about it. T : What dish do you think it is ? - Which place is famous for this dish? - What are the ingredients for it? - When do people often have it? - Do you like to have it? Why or Why not? 2. Building knowledge: 1. Read Phong’s blog. Find the words from the box below in the text an underline them. Use the words around each underlined word to help you understand the meaning. T asks Ss to scan the passage to find where the words: stewing, bones, broth, boneless and slices are in the passage. Ss work individually. T uses some techniques to present new words Check understanding: Rub-out and remember. 3. Practice: Task 1 2.Read Phong’s blog again and answer the questions. - T asks Ss to read the text again and answer the questions. Ss work individually. T asks Ss to note where they found the information that help them to answer the questions. Ss compare their answers before discussing before the whole class. T calls some pairs to practice.

N¨m häc 2019-2020

I. READING 1. Read Phong’s blog. Find the words from the box below in the text an underline them. Use the words around each underlined word to help you understand the meaning. * Vocabulary: - stew (v) (picture) : hầm - bone (n) (pic) xương - broth (n) : nước luộc thịt, nước xuýt - boneless (adj): không xương - slice (n): lát 2.Read Phong’s blog again and answer the questions. * Key: 1.We can enjoy pho all kinds of meals during a day, from breakfast to dinner and even for a late night snack. 2.They are made from the best variety of rice. 3.The broth for ph obo is made by stewing the bones of cows for a long time in a large pot. The broth for pho ga is made by stewing chicken bones. 4.It is boneless and cut into thin slices.

Task 2: II. SPEAKING (20’/IW/PW) 3. Look at the list of ingredients below. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the ingredients for an omelette. * Vocabulary: T uses some techniques to present new words Check understanding: Matching.

II. SPEAKING 3. Look at the list of ingredients below. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the ingredients for an omelette. * Vocabulary: - teaspoon (n) (pic) thia cà phê - pinch (n) nhúm - ingredient (n) thành phần

- T reminds Ss of form and use of a/ an, some, any and phrases of quantity used with uncountable nouns. Ask Ss to work in pairs,

• Example: A: I want to cook an omelette. What ingredients do I need?

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

136

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 asking and answering the questions about the ingredients for an omelette. Ss work in pairs to practice. T goes around to help weaker ss. T calls some pairs to practice in front of the class. Task 3 4. Look at the pictures of how to cook an omelette.Use the phrases in this book to complete the above instructions. - Ask ss to work individually, using the phrases in the box to complete the instructions on how to cook an omelette. T guides ss how to give instructions. - Have ss share their answers with their partner. Task 4 5. Work in pairs. Practice giving instructions on how to make a dish or drink. - T gives Ss 3 minutes to think about some food and drink and how to make them. Ss work individually to take notes about the steps to make their food and drink. Ss work in pairs to practice. T calls some pairs to present as a class. T checks and gives comments. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 B: You need…. A: How much/ How many?..... 4. Look at the pictures of how to cook an omelette.Use the phrases in this book to complete the above instructions. * Notes: give instructions First,….. Then,…………. Next,………….. After that,……… Finally,………… * Key: 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. b 5. c 5. Work in pairs. Practice giving instructions on how to make a dish or drink. * Example: A: Can you tell me how to cook the rice, please? What should I do first? B: First, put some water in a pot and heat it until it boils. A: And then?

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2/P.40,41 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

137

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

138

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 43 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.55) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words : eel soup (n), shrimp cake (n), rice noodles (n). pastry (n)… 2. Language: - Food description. 3. Skills: Listening, speaking and writing about some traditional dishes. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents and Board Display

139

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 1. Warm up: • Chatting - T asks Ss to talk about traditional food or drink where they live using some questions. + What are the traditional food or drink in your village/ town/ city/ province? + Which one is the most popular? + What are the ingredients for it? 2. Building knowledge: I. LISTENING(15’/IW/PW) 1. Listen to three people talking about traditional dishes where they live. Match the places with the dishes. *Vocabulary: T uses some techniques to present new words Check understanding: Matching T asks Ss to read the instructions carefully and remind them to remember the name of three places and three dishes mentioned in the conversation they are going to listen. T plays the recording. Ss listen then match. - Ask Ss to write the answers on the board. T plays the recording again for ss to check their answers. 3. Practice: Task 1: 2. Listen again. Tick the ingredients for each dish. Some ingredients are in more than one dish. - T asks Ss to read the rubric and study the table carefully. T plays the recording again and has Ss tick the correct items as the listen. Ss work individually. - Play the recording again for Ss to check the answers. Task 2 II. Writing.(20’/GW) 3. Make notes about some popular foods or drinks in your neighbourhood. Ss work in groups of 6 to make notes about some of their popular local food. T checks.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 6: Skills 2 (P.55) • Chatting

I. LISTENING 1. Listen to three people talking about traditional dishes where they live. Match the places with the dishes. *Vocabulary: - eel soup (n): súp lươn - shrimp cake (n) : bánh tôm - rice noodles (n): mỳ gạo - pastry (n): bột nhão *Key: 1. Ha Noi 2. Nghe An 3. Da Nang 2. Listen again. Tick the ingredients for each dish. Some ingredients are in more than one dish. * Key: banh tom : shrimp sup luon : eel, pepper, turmeric, my quang : rice noodles, shrimp, pork

II. Writing. 3. Make notes about some popular foods or drinks in your neighbourhood. * Suggested ideas: dish ingredients How to make Square Rolling cakes ………….. Nem Crab,Shrimp …………. Pork,Noodles Pepper,Salt,Carrot 140

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 3 4. Write a paragraph about popular foods or drinks in your neighborhood. Choose one or more. Use the information in 3, and Phong’s blog , as a model. - Ask Ss to Ask Ss to write a draft first. Then have them write their final version in class. Ss work in groups of 6 to do. T checks some groups and comments. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 4. Write a paragraph about popular foods or drinks in your neighborhood. Choose one or more. Use the information in 3, and Phong’s blog , as a model.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.42 – W.B. - Write the paragraph in your notebook.

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 44 Week: Class: UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND DRINK Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.56-57) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENT: 1. Vocabulary : Review 2. Language: Review 3. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about food and drink. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Contents and Board Display

1. Warm up:

UNIT 5. VIETNAMESE FOOD AND

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

141

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Teacher asks ss to tell something about their writing at home.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 DRINK Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.56-57)

2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary: (10’/IW/PW) 1. Add the words/ phrases you have learnt to the columns. Ss work in 6 groups in 3 minutes. Which group has more correct words will be the winner. T checks with the whole class and gives comments.

I. Vocabulary: 1. Add the words/ phrases you have learnt to the columns. *Suggested key: Dishes: omelette, pancake, beef noodle soup, chicken noodle soup, rice, noodles, pork, sandwich, meat, tofu, bread… Ingredients: shrimp, salt, cooking oil, flour, pork, turmeric, pepper, noodle, vegetable, egg, meat, tofu… Phrases: a slice, a can, a bottle, a kilo, a 3. Practice: bar, a glass, a bag, a teaspoon… Task 1 2. Fill each gap with a verb from the box. 2. Fill each gap with a verb from the - T asks Ss to read the sentences carefully box. and complete them with the verbs from the * Key: box. T reminds Ss that the words, phrase, 1. Fold and sentences around the blanks will provide 2. Pour the context form them to choose the correct 3. Beat verbs. 4. Heat Ss work individually. 5. Serve T calls some ss to read aloud the complete sentences. Other ss give comments. Task 2: II. Grammar II. Grammar (10’/IW/PW) 3. Choose a/ an or some for the following words. 3. Choose a/ an or some for the following words. * Key: 5. Some Ss work individually to complete the grid. 1. A 6. Some T checks and comments. 2. Some T calls some ss to repeat the use of 3. Some 7. An 8. some a/an/some. 4. Some Task 3 4. Complete the sentences with some or 4. Complete the sentences with some or any. any. - T asks Ss to do the task individually to * Key: complete the sentences with SOME and 5. any, 1. Any ANY. 2. some some - Correct their answers. 3. any 4. some, any Task 4 5. Make questions with How many/ 5. Make questions with How many/ How How much for the underlined words in much for the underlined words in the the following sentences. following sentences. * Key: T asks Ss to make question with How many/ Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

142

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

How much for underlined words. Ss work individually to do. - Ask them to write the answers in the board. - Invite some comment from other Ss.

1.How much milk is there in the bottle? 2.How many cans of lemonade do you need? 3.How many apples has Peter got in his bag? 4.How much rice is left in the electric cooker?

Task 5 III. Communication (5’/PW) 6. Choose sentences (A-D) to complete the following conversation. Practice the conversation with a partner. Ss complete the dialogue first. Ss work in pairs, one is Mi, the other is Phong to practice the dialogue. Task 6 IV. Project (10’) A CLASS COOK BOOK. 1. Read this page from a cook book on how to make the perfect pancake. T asks ss to read the recipe for the pancake carefully. Ss read and pay more attention on how to write a recipe. 2. Choose one of your favorite dishes and write a recipe for it. Ss work in groups of 4 to discuss and take notes. 3. Combine your recipes into a class cook book. - Teacher guides and sets this activity as homework. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. Communication 6. Choose sentences (A-D) to complete the following conversation. Practice the conversation with a partner. Key: 1. D 2. B 3. A 4. C

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

IV. Project A CLASS COOK BOOK. 1. Read this page from a cook book on how to make the perfect pancake.

2. Choose one of your favorite dishes and write a recipe for it. 3. Combine your recipes into a class cook book.

III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Complete the recipe for their favorite food.

143

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

144

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 45 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 1: Getting started (P58-59) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : - Historic places and things: Temple of Literature, Imperial Academy. - Things to take on a trip: warm clothes, bottled water, blanket, found (v), locate (v). 2. Language : - Simple future, give advice. 3. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about the first university in Vietnam

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

145

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 1: Getting started (P58-59)

Chatting Teacher writes ‘The first university in Vietnam’ on the board and show the picture of The Temple of Literature and the Imperial of A. GETTING STARTED Academy on the screen: T : Do you know the first university in Vietneam? Where is it? Why is it famous? Have you ever been there? Teacher sets the scene by asking Ss about the picture . Who are they? What are they doing? What are they talking about? S1:Mai is preparing for a trip to the Temple of Literature. S2:Her mother is talking to her about the place and the preparation. 2. Building knowledge: 1.Listen and read (12’/IW/PW) T introduces some new words. (real things, pictures, situation) Check ‘R.O.R’

1. Listen and read

T plays the recording.

* Vocabulary - Imperial Academy (n): Quốc tử giám - Temple of Literature (n):Văn miếu - found (v):thành lập - (v):tọa lạc ở - consider (v): xem xét - surround (v): bao bọc

Ss look at the conversation, listen to the tape and then work in pairs to practice the conversation. T checks some pairs. 3. Practice Task 1 1a: Read the conversation again and answer the questions: Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the

* Practice 1a: Read the conversation again and answer the questions: *Key: 1. She is going to visit the Temple of

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

146

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

questions. T checks as a class.

Literature - the Imperial Academy. 2. It’s the first university in Viet Nam. 3. About one thousand years ago. / in the 11 century. 4. In the center of Ha Noi. 5. Because it will be cold. 1b: Read the conversation again. 1b: Read the conversation again. Complete Complete the table. the table. * Key: T. asks Ss to read the conversation again and Things Mai needs to take and why: underline the things Mai needs to take and why. - Warm clothes - will be cold Ss work individually to write the words/ - camera - take photos of interesting things. phrases in the right column. Things Mai doesn’t need to take and why not. - an umbrella - cold (winter) and not much sunlight and rain. Task 2 2. Imagine that you are going to take a trip to a temple or a pagoda.(17’/IW/PW) a) Look at the table and tick the items you would like to take with you. T goes through all the words in the table with students and explains any words they don’t know. - Ss work independently to tick the items they would like to take with them.

2. Imagine that you are going to take a trip to a temple or a pagoda. a) Look at the table and tick the items you would like to take with you. Blanket Warm clothes Tent Bottled water Ball Umbrellas Camera Mobile phone/ cell food phones compass b) Work in pairs. Tell your partner about b) Work in pairs. Tell your partner about three of the items you would take with three of the items you would take with you you for the trip and explain why. You can for the trip and explain why. You can use the use the following suggestions. following suggestions. *Example: I’ll take warm clothes because it’ll be cold. Ss work in pairs in 2 minutes. … T calls some pairs to practice before class. c) Work in pairs .Give advice to your T gives comments. partners about what to take and what not to take on the trip. Give reasons. c) Work in pairs.Give advice to your * Suggested ways to give advice: partners about what to take and what not to - Should…/ought to …. take on the trip. Give reasons. - had better (’d better) Ss work in pairs to practice. - It’s not necessary…. S1 suggests a place he/she wants to go. - you don’t need….. S2 gives advice about things to take then gives *Example: reason using giving advice structures. A : I want to take a trip to Sapa. T calls some pairs to present before class. B : You’d better take warm clothes because it’s cold. 4. Use: 3.Imagine that your class is planning a trip 3.Imagine that your class is planning a Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

147

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 to Huong Pagoda. Work in groups. Ask and answer questions about how to make arrangements for the trip. Then fill in the table. - T asks Ss to work in groups about how to plan a trip to a place. Ss use the suggested information in the table and the questions and answers in the example. Ss write the information in the table. T checks some groups’ table and asks a student for each group totell about their plan. -Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 trip to Huong Pagoda. Work in groups. Ask and answer questions about how to make arrangements for the trip. Then fill in the table. • Example: A: Where will you go? B: We’ll go to Huong Pagoda. A: When will you go? B: …..

III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Practice the structure they’ve learnt. - Review the lesson. - Do C1,2 /P46 – WB.

148

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 46 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.60) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : - historic places and things. 2. Language: Passive voice Prepositions of positions. Pronunciation : sounds / tʃ / and / dʒ / 3. Skills: Listening, speaking about the first university in Vietnam. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

149

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up: * Chatting T : Have you ever been to the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy? T: How did you go there? T: What do you know about it? …………………………………………….. 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary (20’/IW/PW) 1.Match the words with the pictures. T asks ss to look at the names of some sections in the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy. T reads – Ss read after aloud. T explains some new words T asks Ss to match the words with the pictures. T corrects the exercise as a class. 3. Practice: Task 1 2. Read the names in 1 again and listen to the recording. Complete the layout of the Temple of Literature. Ss look at the lay out of the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy and guess the names of five sections (1-5) in the layout. T explains some new words - T plays the recording twice. Ss listen carefully do the exercise individually. T plays the recording again for ss to check. T corrects the exercise as a class.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.60) * Chatting

I. Vocabulary 1.Match the words with the pictures. * Vocabulary - well (n) : giếng - stone tablet (n) bia đá - pavilion (n) đình, tạ * Key: 1.d 2.c 3.e 4.b 5.a 2. Read the names in 1 again and listen to the recording. Complete the layout of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy. . * Vocabulary - courtyard (n) : sân nhỏ, sân trong. - consist of (v) : bao gồm - rebuild (v) : xây dựng lại. * Key: 1. Van Mieu Gate 2. Khue van Pavilion 3. Thien QuangTinh Well 4. Doctor’s stone tablets 5. The Temple of Literature

150

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 2 3. With a partner, use the prepositions in the box below to describe the layout of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy.Share your descriptions with the class. Have Ss describe the layout using the prepositions suggested. T may ask some to write the sentences on the board. T calls some ss to give the description of the lay out for the class. T checks and gives comments. Task 3 II. Pronunciation (13’/IW/PW) / tʃ / and / dʒ / 4. Listen and write the words in the correct columns. Pay attention to the sounds / tʃ / and / dʒ /. Practise sounding out the two sounds / tʃ/ and /dʒ / together. Teacher plays the CD. Ss listen and repeat the words. Ss write the words in 2 columns. Ss do individually. Check if they do this correctly.

Task 4 5. Listen and repeat the chant. Teacher plays the recording. Ss listen and repeat the chants. Task 5 6. Write the words from 5 with the sounds / tʃ / and / dʒ / in the right columns. Ss work individually. T checks.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. With a partner, use the prepositions in the box below to describe the layout of the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Academy.Share your descriptions with the class. * Example: Thien Quang Tinh Well is in the middle of the Temple of Literature. ….

II. Pronunciation / tʃ / and / dʒ / 4. Listen and write the words in the correct columns. Pay attention to the sounds / tʃ / and / dʒ /. * Answer / tʃ / / dʒ /. Children Job Jeans Chair Architectural Engineer Heritage Cultural Watch Village Teach Question

5. Listen and repeat the chant.

6. Write the words from 5 with the sounds / tʃ / and / dʒ / in the right columns. * Answer: / tʃ / / dʒ / Orange Chicken Jam Chop Cherry Juice Jill Children Chip John Cheap Cheaper Which Lunch

4. Use: -Summarize the main points of the lesson Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

151

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sound / tʃ / and / dʒ /.. more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2/P.43- W.B

152

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 47 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.61-62) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : - historic places and things. 2. Language: - The present simple passive.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

153

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

3. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

Contents and Board Display

1. Warm up:

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM * Pelmanism Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.61-62) Ss play in two teams to revise the PII form * Pelmanism of verbs. take taken T checks and gives comments . sell sold build built regard regarded construct constructed 2. building knowledge: I. Grammar A.The present simple passive (20’/IW/PW) Teacher gives an example. Ss look at it and tell the meaning and the form.

3. Practice Task 1 Ex1. Complete the passage using the past participle of the verbs in the box. * Vocabulary: T explain some new words Ss do the exercise individually. T checks the exercise as a class. Ex 2. Using the verbs in brackets, write sentences in the present simple passive. Ss do the exercise individually. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. Grammar A. The present simple passive *Example : The Temple of Literature is located in the centre of Ha Noi. * Form: (+) Subject + be (am/are/is) + PII. (-)Subject + be not (am/are/is not) + PII. (?)Be (am/are/is)+ Subject+ PII? * Use : We use the present simple passive to emphasise the action done at present. * The person/thing doing the action is placed at the end. * The passive voice is commonly used in writing. * Practice Ex1. Complete the passage using the past participle of the verbs in the box. * Vocabulary: relic (n) di tích regard (v) coi construct (v) = build * Key: 1. located 2. surrounded 3. displayed 4. taken 5. considered Ex 2. Using the verbs in brackets, write sentences in the present simple passive. *KEY: 154

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T checks the exercise as a class.

Ex3. Using the words in the box below, can you make sentences in the present simple passive to talk about the Temple of Literature. Ss discuss in groups to make sentences. T checks.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 1. Many precious relics are displayed in the Temple of Literature. 2. Many old trees and beautiful flowers are taken care of by the gardeners. 3. Lots of souvenirs are sold inside the Temple of Literature. 4. Khue Van pavilion is regarded as the symbol of Ha Noi. 5. The Temple of Literature is considered as one of the most important cultural and historical places in Viet Nam Ex3. Using the words in the box below, can you make sentences in the present simple passive to talk about the Temple of Literature. * Example: The Temple of Literature is surrounded by brick walls * Suggested answer Trees and flowers are watered by the gardeners everyday. The courtyards are cleaned up/ swept everyday. Food and drink are sold outside the Temple/ not sold in the Temple… Tickets are sold outside the Temple…..

B. The past simple passive (10’/IW/PW) Teacher gives an example. Ss look at it and tell the meaning and the form.

B. The past simple passive * Example: The One Pillar Pagoda was built in 1094. * Form: (+) Subject + be (was/ were) + PII. (-)Subject + be not (was/ were) +not + PII. (?)Be (was/ were) + Subject+ PII? * Use : We use the past simple passive to emphasise the action done in the past. * Practice Task 2 Ex4: Complete the sentences with the words Ex4: Complete the sentences with the from the box. words from the box. * Vocabulary: Emperor (n) hoàng đế * Vocabulary: T explain some new words scholar (n) người có học thức erect (v) xây dựng Ss do the exercise individually. * Key: T checks the exercise as a class. 1. was 2. constructed 3. were 4. regarded 5. renamed Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

155

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Task 3 5. Put the parts of the passage below in the correct order. Then circle the examples of the past simple passive in the text. T asks Ss to read and put the passage in the correct order and underline the phrases/ sentences in the past simple passive. T checks and gives comments. 4. Use: 6. Can you make sentences in the present and past passive voice about the places below? T asks ss to work in groups of five to write as many sentences as possible about the topic given. T checks and gives comments. Summarize the main points of the lesson. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020 5. Put the parts of the passage below in the correct order. Then circle the examples of the past simple passive in the text. * Key: D-C- A -B Was built, was used, were selected, were carefully prepared.

6. Can you make sentences in the present and past passive voice about the places below? *Example: The One Pillar Pagoda is located in the centre of Hanoi. The One Pillar Pagoda was built in 1094.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do part B3,4,5,6/P.44,45 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

156

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 48 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 4: A Closer Look 2 + Communication (P.63) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : - words about historic places and things to take on a trip. 2. Language: - Passive voice. - Structure of giving advice. 3. Skills: Speaking what they should do and shouldn’t do while taking tourist trips. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

157

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up *Chatting Teacher asks ss some questions about their latest trips. T : Where did you visit ? T: Where did you stay during your trip? T: Did you buy any souvenirs? ……………………………………..

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 4: Communication (P.63)

2. Building knowledge: 1.Tips for trips (18’/PW)

1.Tips for trips. 1a: Imagine some overseas friends 1a: Imagine some overseas friends are are planning a trip to Ha Noi. Advise planning a trip to Ha Noi. Advise them them what they should and shouldn’t what they should and shouldn’t do. do. Write Do or Don’t in each box. Write Do or Don’t in each box. 1. Book a hotel in advance. Teacher shows 10 things to do or not to do 2. Learn some VNs… before the trips. 3. Stay in a mini hotel… Ss go through. 4. Eat in small restaurants. Ss discuss in pairs to decide what they 5. Rent a bike or motorbike if you should do, what they shouldn’t do and why. want to travel around. 6. Walk around…. 7. Take summer clothes…. 8. Shop in local markets…. 9. Swim in the lake 10. Pay a visit to the T of L…. 3, Practice: 1b. Work in pairs. Practise giving Task 1 1b. Work in pairs. Practise giving advice advice to your partner. * Example: to your partner. A: You’d better book a hotel in advance T reminds ss of the structures for giving so that you are sure you have a room. advice Ss work in pairs to practice giving advice. B: Good idea. * Notes: T calls some pairs to demonstrate before - Should=Had better=Ought. class. Task 2 2.Game cards * Cards: 2.Game cards (15’/GW) Ss have five pieces of paper on which the - speak English. - Grow flowers and trees. following phrases are written. - visit the T of L. - sell tickets - buy souvenirs. T models the way to do this with a student * Example: A: They grow a lot of trees in the Ss work in 2 groups of 5 to play the card Temple of Literature. games. B: A lot of trees are grown in the One makes a sentence in active. The other Temple of Literature. change it into passive. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

158

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

T goes around to monitor. T checks as a class.

4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Rewrite 5 active sentences using the cards then change them in 5 passive ones. -Review the lesson.

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 49 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.64) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : - words about historic places. 2. Language: Passive voice Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

159

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

3. Skills: Reading a passage about the first university in Viet Nam for specific information. Speaking some famous scholars and Emperors in Viet Nam. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up: *Chatting about Van Mieu-Quoc Tu Giam. T asks Ss to look at the pictures and discuss the questions. 1. Do you think the Temple of LiteratureImperial Academy is a good English name for Van Mieu- QTG? 2.Why do many students pay a visit to the Temple of Literature before their exams? 3.What do you think will happen to this historic place in the future? Ss discuss in pairs and then as the whole class.

2. Building knowledge: I. READING (18’/PW/GW) 1 Read the passage and answer the questions. T uses some techniques to present new words Check understanding: Rub-out and remember.

Ss read the text to find out the answers to the four questions. Ss in groups of four discuss the questions. T calls some pairs to ask and answer the questions. T and other ss give comments. 3. Practice: Task 1: 2. Read the passage again and match the time in A with the events in B. Ss read the text carefully again and match. T moves around to help weak Ss with any unfamiliar words. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.64)

I. READING 1 Read the passage and answer the questions. * Vocabulary : - statue (n) bức tượng - recognize (v) công nhận - recognition (n) sự công nhận - reconstruct (v) = rebuild * Key: 1. in 1076 2. Because thousands of Vietnamese scholars graduated from it. 3. Chu Van An was. 4. It is considered the first university in Viet Nam. 2. Read the passage again and match the time in A with the events in B. * Key: 1.D 2.A 3.B 4.C

160

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T corrects the answers as the whole class. Task 2 4. Work in groups. Look at the four statues and talk about them. You can use the information in 2 or 3 and the other parts of the unit to help you. T shows the four pictures on the screen. Ss look at the pictures and speak about the people in the pictures. T asks Ss to do exercise 4 in groups. And ask some Ss to give answers in front of the class. The rest of the class listens and gives comments. T gives the key and Ss check.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 II. SPEAKING 4. Work in groups. Look at the four statues and talk about them. You can use the information in 2 or 3 and the other parts of the unit to help you.

• Key: 1. Emperor Ly Thanh Tong is considered the founder of the Temple of Literature. 2. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong is regarded as the builder of the Imperial Academy. 3.The erection of the first doctors’ stone table was ordered by King Le Thanh Tong. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2/P.47- 48 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 50 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.65) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: 1. Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words: Educator (n), remarkable (adj), royal (adj), doctoral (n), regional (adj), resign (v), career (n). Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

161

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

2. Language: - Past simple to talk about history. 3. Skills: - Listen to get information about a famous person. - Write a short passage about a historic place. III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display 1. Warm up: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM * Chatting Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.65) Chatting about Chu Van An Teacher shows a picture of Chu Van An and *Chatting ask ss some questions about him. 1. When was Chu van An born? 2. What did he do? 3. What was he like? 4. How old was he when he died? Ss discuss in pairs and then as the whole class. 2. Building knowledge: I. LISTENING(15’/IW/PW) 1. Listen to the recording and circle the appropriate answer (A, B, or C). * Vocabulary : T uses some techniques to present some new words. - syn = teacher - explain= surprising to notice - explain= belong to the King - W.F= adj of Doctor - syn= local - trans - eg: teaching is my career. Ss read and copy the words. Check understanding: Rub- out and remember. T plays the recording twice. Ss listen then tick. T checks and gives comments. 3. Practice: Tssk 1: 2. Listen to the passage again and write short answers to the questions below. T plays the recording again . Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

I. LISTENING 1. Listen to the recording and circle the appropriate answer (A, B, or C). * Vocabulary : - Educator (n) : - remarkable (a): - royal (a): - doctoral (a): - regional (a): - resign (v); - career (n): * Keys : 1-C 2-B 3-B 4-A 2. Listen to the passage again and write short answers to the questions below. * Key: 1. in 1292 2. He was an honest man. 162

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Ss listen and work in pairs to ask and answer.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 3. He continued his career and wrote books. 4. 78

T checks some pairs and gives comments. T calls on some Ss to write their answers on the board. Task 2 II. Writing.(15’/IW) 3. Discuss the table in groups. Complete the table about the Temple of Literaturethe Imperial Academy.

II. Writing. 3. Discuss the table in groups. Complete the table about the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy. Time Event Constr Attractio uction n T asks Ss to discuss in groups to find the 1070 The T OF Empero One of information to complete the table. L r Ly the Ss in groups of four discuss the questions. Thanh historic Tong and cultural sites of VN 1076 The Empero First Emperial r Ly university Academy Nhan in VN Tong 1484 Doctors’ King World stone Le Heritage tablets Thanh Tong 2003 The four Ha Noi Founders statues People’ and 4. Write a passage about the history of s developer the Temple of Literature - the Imperial commit s of the T Academy. tee of L. T tells Ss to write a short passage about the 4. Write a passage about the history of history of the Temple of Literature - the the Temple of Literature - the Imperial Imperial Academy. Academy. Ss base on the table write a short paragraph about the history of the T of L (max 10 sentences). 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) III. HOMEWORK - T assigns the homework. -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.48,49 – W.B. - Ss copy their homework. - Complete the writing in your notebook. - T explains it carefully

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

163

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

N¨m häc 2019-2020

164

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Prepared date: Teaching date: Period: 51 Week: Class: UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.66-67) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: II. LANGUAGE CONTENTS: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

165

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

1. Vocabulary : Review 2. Language: Review 3. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about historic places III. TEACHING AIDS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. IV. TEACHING STEP: Teacher and Students' activities

1. Warm up: Teacher asks ss something about historic places in their neighborhood. 2. Building knowledge: I. Vocabulary: (7’/IW/PW) 1. Write the past participle of the following verbs. Ss work individually to do exercises. T asks Ss to compare their answer with their partner Gives the answers Let them repeat the words. Check their pronunciation.

3. Practice: Task 1 2. Complete the sentences with the past participle form. Ss complete the exercise individually. T asks Ss to compare their answer with their partner Gives the answers Task 2 II. Grammar (10’/IW/PW) 3. Change the sentences from the present simple active into the simple present passive. Ss complete the exercise individually. T asks Ss to compare their answer with their partner Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 6. THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN VIET NAM Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.66-67) I. Vocabulary: 1. Write the past participle of the following verbs. * Key: Base Form Past Participle Sell sold grow grew speak spoke buy bought build built see saw consider considered name named visit visited locate located recognise recognised start started 2. Complete the sentences with the past participle form. * Key: 1. considered, stated 2. named 3. spoken 4. located 5. recognized II. Grammar 3. Change the sentences from the present simple active into the simple present passive. * Key: 1. Tickets are sold at the gate of the tourist site. 2. A lot of flowers are grown in Da Lat 166

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

T asks Ss to write full sentences on the board. T checks with the whole class.

3. The Hung King’s Temple is visited by thousands of people every day. 4. Many beautiful Cham Towers can be seen by tourists in Binh Duong province. 5. many kinds of goods can be bought by tourists in Ben Thanh Market. Task 3 4. Change the sentences from the past 4. Change the sentences from the past simple passive into the past simple simple passive into the past simple active. active. Ss complete the exercise individually. * Key: T asks Ss to compare their answer with 1. Emperor Ly Thai Tong founded One Pillar Pagoda. their partner T asks Ss to write full sentences on the 2. Emperor Ly Nhan Tong constructed board. the Imperial Academy. 3. King Le Thanh Tong ordered the T checks with the whole class. erection of the first Doctor’s stone tablet. 4. They built Tan Ky House in Hoi An two centuries ago. 5. They completed the construction of Tu Duc Tomb in 1876. Task 4 III. Communication III. Communication (10’/PW/GW) 5. Work in pairs.Ask and answer questions about the Temple of 5. Work in pairs.Ask and answer questions about the Temple of Literature- the Imperial Academy. Use the suggestions below to help you. Literature- the Imperial Academy. Use the suggestions below to help you. • Example: Ss work in pairs to ask and answer A: Where is the Temple of Literature? questions about the Temple of Literature – B: It’s located in the centre of Ha Noi. the Imperial of Academy, using the ….. information in the table. T goes around to help weak ss. 6.Work in groups. Report your Task 5 discussions, using the information in 5. 6.Work in groups. Report your discussions, using the information in 5. Ss work in groups then report their results of their discussion to the whole class. Task 6 IV. Project IV. Project (8’) TOURIST GUIDE TOURIST GUIDE 1.The following is a brochure made by 1.The following is a brochure made by Phong and his classmates after a trip to Phong and his classmates after a trip to the temple of literature- the imperial the temple of literature- the imperial academy. academy. T asks ss to read the brochure and answer some questions about it to understand it well. T: What is the tittle of the brochure? How many parts/ sections/ pages does 2.Choose one of the most famous tourist Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

167

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

the brochure consist of? What can you see in each part? 2.Choose one of the most famous tourist sites in your community (village/ district/ province) and make a brochure as in 1. - Teacher guides and sets this activity as homework. 4. Use: *Summarize the main point of the lesson.

sites in your community (village/ district/ province) and make a brochure as in 1.

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Do Project

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

168

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Date of planning: Dec 17th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Dec 24th,2018 Date of teaching 7B: Dec 24th ,2018 Period 52 REVSION 1 I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

169

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review: The lexical items they’ve learnt in Unit 4,5,6. - Grammar: Review: The passive voice. Noun ( countable and uncountable) …. 2. Skills: Speaking, writing, Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Get ready for the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in Unit 4,5,6. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercise. - Let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (3’/GW) T asks ss some question about their health, weather……. II. NEW LESSON. I. PRONUNCIATION: (7’/IW) 1. Circle the word in which the underlined sound is pronounced differently. Listen, check and repeat the words. Ss do the exercise individually, and then share their answers. T plays the recording. Ss listen and read after. T writes the correct answers on the board. II. VOCABULARY(10’/IW/GW) 2. Do the crossword puzzle and complete the sentences. Ss do the exercise individually, and then share their answers. Ss write their answer on the board. T checks with the whole class.

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

contents and Board Display REVIEW 2 - LANGUAGE

I. PRONUNCIATION: 1. Circle the word in which the underlined sound is pronounced differently. Listen, check and repeat the words. * Key: 1. sure 2. cinema 3. compose 4. architect 5. question II. VOCABULARY 2. Do the crossword puzzle and complete the sentences. *Key: 1. music 2. food 3. art 4. drink 5. university 6. Temple.

170

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

III. GRAMMAR (14’/IW)

III. GRAMMAR

3. Complete the following two passages about camping. Use the words or phrases in the boxes. Ss do this exercise individually. T quickly checks Ss’s answers.

3. Complete the following two passages about camping. Use the words or phrases in the boxes. * Key: 1. How many 2. How much 3. How much 4. How many 5.a 6. much 7. some 8 many 4. Write the sentences using the suggested words or phrases. * Key: 1. I think classical music is as exciting as country music. 2. These clothes are not as expensive as I thought. 3. My taste in art is the same as hers ( her taste) 4. The price of foods in HaNoi is not the same as it is in Hai Phong. 5. Life in Viet Nam is different from life in England. 5. Rewrite the sentences in the passive. *Key: 1. The song Auld Lang Syne is sung on some occasions. 2. Vietnam’s anthem Tien Quan Ca was composed by Van Cao. 3. Water puppetry is ferformed in a pool. 4. A lot of meat was bought ( by his mother ) yesterday. 5. The rice noodles are made from the best variety of rice. IV.EVERYDAY ENGLISH 6. Complete the conversations with the questions in the box. Act them out with your partner. * Key: 1. C 2. E 3. A 4. B 5. D

4. Write the sentences using the suggested words or phrases. Ss do the exercise individually, and then share their answers. Ss write their answer on the board. T checks with the whole class.

5. Rewrite the sentences in the passive. T elicits the form and use of the passive voice. Ss do the exercise individually, and then share their answers. Ss write their answer on the board. T checks with the whole class.

IV.EVERYDAY ENGLISH (5’/PW) 6. Complete the conversations with the questions in the box. Act them out with your partner. T may call a pair of Ss to do the exercises in front of the class. Check Ss’ answers. Ask them for explanation if necessary. Ss practice in pairs. Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (IW)

contents and Board Display REVIEW 2- SKILLS

* Chatting: T asks ss some questions about their favorite film, food and drinks. II. NEW LESSON. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

SKILLS 171

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

I. READING (/IW/PW)

I. READING

1.Two people are talking about their favorite films: Gone with the wind and A space Odyssey.Read their descriptions and tick the boxes. - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T confirms the correct answers

1.Two people are talking about their favorite films: Gone with the wind and A space Odyssey.Read their descriptions and tick the boxes. *Key: - Gone with the Wind: 3,5 - A Space Odyssey: 1,2, 4

- T checks Ss’s answers . II. SPEAKING: (/PW/GW)

II. SPEAKING:

2. Work in pairs. Plan a trip to a place. Ask and answer questions about the following ideas. You can use will or would like. Ss work in pairs, asking and answering question with the suggestions. T may go around to help weaker Ss. T calls some pairs to checks

2. Work in pairs. Plan a trip to a place. Ask and answer questions about the following ideas. You can use will or would like. - Where and when you go - Who you go with - How you travel - What you bring - What you do

3. Work in groups. Take turns talking 3. Work in groups. Take turns talking about the arrangements for the trip. about the arrangements fro the trip. Have Ss work in groups taking turns to talk about arrangements for the trip. Then ask each group to choose the St who does the task best to talk in front of the class. Ask some Ss give comments. III.LISTENING (/IW) III.LISTENING 4. Listen to a man talking about his meal in a restaurant and tick the adjectives you hear. Have Ss look at the adjectives which the man uses to describe his meal in a restaurant. Play the recording once for Ss to listen and tick their answers. - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner. T checks with the whole class. 5.Listen again and complete the menu Have Ss look at the menu. Play the recording again for Ss to complete the menu. - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T confirms the correct answers. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

4. Listen to a man talking about his meal in a restaurant and tick the adjectives you hear. *Key: 1. great 3. fresh 4. delicious 5. sweet 6. tasty 8. good

5.Listen again and complete the menu *Key: Menu Appetizer Salad Main dish Fish, vegetables Dessert An ice cream Drink A cup of tea 172

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

IV. WRITING (/IW)

IV. WRITING

6. Look at the pictures below. Write the instructions of how to cook a mushroom omelette. Set up the writing activity. T reminds Ss that the first and most important thing is always to think about what they are going to write. In this case, Ss may use the sequence of activities ( first, then, next, after that, and finally) Ss work in groups of four to write. T checks and gives comment. III.WRAPPING –UP

6. Look at the pictures below. Write the instructions of how to cook a mushroom omelette. * Key: First, slice the mushrooms. Then, beat the eggs in a bowl Next, add salt to the egg mixture. After that, pour the eggs into a frying pan. Add the mushrooms and cook. Finally, fold the omelette in half

T summarizes the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

HOMEWORK -Do the “Test yourself 2: Exercise 5,6,7,8 (P.52-53/ WB) -Review from unit 1 to unit 6. -Review Unit 4-5-6. -Prepare for the next lesson Skills. -Do the “Test yourself 2: Exercise 1, 2 ,3 ,4 (P.50-51/ WB)

Date of planning: Dec 18th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Dec 25th,2018 Date of teaching 7B: Dec 25th ,2018 Period 53 REVISION 2 I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

173

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

- Vocabulary : Review. - Grammar: Review. 2. Skills: Review 4 skills: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competences: - Get ready for the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in 6 units in the first semester. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: Text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercises. - Let them do at home, IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/T-WC) - Chatting REVISION II. NEW LESSON. Exercise 1: Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T confirms the correct answers

Ex 2: Arrange these words/ phrases into the meaning sentences. - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T . T calls some ss to write sentences on the blackboard. T confirms the correct answers

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

Exercise 1: Give the correct form of the verbs in brackets. 1. I enjoy (fish) ............................... because it (be) ………….… relaxing. 2. Jane will play chess after she (finish) ……………. school. 3. What …………… your mother often (do) ………………at weekends? 4. I think, in the future people (not play) …………………individual games. 5. We find (arrange) …………… flowers interesting because it (help) …………………… us relax. 6. I (not collect) ………….……… dolls when I grow up. Ex 2: Arrange these words/ phrases into the meaning sentences 1.. sunburn / yesterday / was / because / outside / has / Alice / she / all / day . 2. and / difficult / boring / that / eggshells / people / carving / Some / say / is . 3. girl / have / is / the / kind-hearted / She / most / ever / I /met 4. organization / the / to / encouraged / people / Big Heart / has / protect / 174

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Exercise 3 :Rewrite sentences: - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T . T calls some ss to write sentences on the blackboard. T confirms the correct answers

N¨m häc 2019-2020 environment. Exercise 3 :Rewrite sentences: 1. I didn’t go to school because I was sick. I was sick, so ……………………. 2.It will be good if you eat less meat and more vegetables. You should ………………………… 3. He likes playing computer games in his free time. His hobby is ……………………… 4. I am interested in watching TV in the evening. I enjoy ……………………………… 5.I think that learning English is important. I find ……………………………… Exercise 4:Read the following passage and choose the correct answer

Exercise 4:Read the following passage and choose the correct answer - Ss do individually and check their answers with a partner before giving their answers to T . T calls some pairs to check. T confirms the correct answers

III.WRAPPING –UP (4’) T summarizes the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take of their families. If that’s the case, try rethinking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. 1. How do people often feel when they volunteer? 2. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? 3. How can your family help the old homeless people?

HOMEWORK

175

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback:

N¨m häc 2019-2020 -Review from unit 1 to unit 6. -Prepare to do the first semester test.

............................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................

Date of planning: Dec 18th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Dec 28th,2018 Date of teaching 7B: Dec 27th ,2018 Period 54 REVISION 3 I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review. - Grammar: Review. 2. Skills: Review 4 skills: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competences: - Get ready for the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in 6 units in the first semester. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: Text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercises. - Let them do at home, IV. PROCEDURES: PART 1: PHONETICS (1 point) Choose the word whose underlined part pronounced differently from that of the others by circling A, B, C or D 1. A. dependent B. enjoy C. absent D. government 2. A. volunteer B. Engineer C. committee D. clear A. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

176

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

3. A. hat B. Map C. what D. cap A. 4. A. was B. Wall C. walk D. water A. 2: LISTENING (2 points) PART Listen to the recording and circle the appreciate answer A, B, or C. 2. He passed the 1. Chu Van an was born in ____________. _________________. A. Thanh Xuan District A. doctoral examination B. royal examination B. Thanh Ba District C. Thanh Tri District C. regional examination 3. He began his career as a 4. He died in ______________. __________. A. 1370 B. 1373 C. 1337 A. a worker B. teacher C. doctor PART 3: READING (2 points) Read the passage and answer the following questions Pho – A popular dish in Ha Noi Among the many special dishes in Ha Noi, pho is the most popular. It is a special kind of Vietnamese soup. We can enjoy Pho for all kinds of meals during the day, from breakfast to dinner, and even for late night snack. Pho has a very special taste. The rice noodles are made from the best variety of rice. The broth for pho bo ( beef noodle soup) is made by stewing the bones of cows for a long time in a large pot. The broth for another kind of pho, pho ga ( chicken noodle soup) is made by stewing chicken bones. The chicken meat served with pho ga is boneless and cut into thin slices… It’s so delicious. Answer the questions: 1. When can we enjoy pho? ………………………………………………………………………………… How is the chicken meat served with pho ga? ………………………………………………………………………………… What are the noodles made from? ………………………………………………………………………………… How is the broth for pho bo made? ………………………………………………………………………………… THE CORRECTION PART 1: PHONETICS (1 point=> 0.25 points/ correct answer) Choose the word whose underlined part pronounced differently from that of the others by circling A, B, C or D B. enjoy C. absent D. government 1. A. dependent 2. A. volunteer B. engineer C. committee D. clear A. 3. A. hat B. Map C. what D. cap A. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

177

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

4. A. was B. Wall C. walk D. water A. 2: LISTENING (2 points => 0.5 points/ correct answer) PART Listen to the recording and circle the appreciate answer A, B, or C. 1. Chu Van an was born in 2. He passed the ____________. _________________. A. Thanh Xuan District A. doctoral examination B. Thanh Ba District B. royal examination C. regional examination C. Thanh Tri District 3. He began his career as a 4. He died in ______________. __________. A. 1370 B. 1373 A. a worker B. teacher C. C. 1337 doctor

Tapescript: Hi class. Come to the next building of the Temple of Literature and let me tell you about Chu Van An. Chu Van An is considered the most famous teacher at the Imperial Academy and one of the most remarkable educators in Vietnamese history. He was born in 1292, in Thanh Tri District, Ha Noi. He was an honest man. He passed the royal examination. First he opened a school in his home village. Then, he became a teacher at the Imperial Academy. He taught many talented and successful students for the nation. Later, he resigned and returned to his home village. For the rest of his life, Chu Van An continued his teaching career and wrote books. He died in 1370. PART 3: READING (2 points=> 0.5 points/ correct answer) Read the passage and answer the following questions Pho – A popular dish in Ha Noi Among the many special dishes in Ha Noi, pho is the most popular. It is a special kind of Vietnamese soup. We can enjoy Pho for all kinds of meals during the day, from breakfast to dinner, and even for late night snack. Pho has a very special taste. The rice noodles are made from the best variety of rice. The broth for pho bo ( beef noodle soup) is made by stewing the bones of cows for a long time in a large pot. The broth for another kind of pho, pho ga ( chicken noodle soup) is made by stewing chicken bones. The chicken meat served with pho ga is boneless and cut into thin slices… It’s so delicious. Answer the questions: 1. We can enjoy Pho for all kinds of meals during the day. 2. The chicken meat served with pho ga is boneless and cut into thin slices. 3. The rice noodles are made from the best variety of rice. 4. The broth for pho bo ( beef noodle soup) is made by stewing the bones of cows for a long time in a large pot. V. Feedback: ............................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

178

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Date of planning: Dec 24th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Dec 31st,2018 Date of teaching 7B: Dec 31st ,2018 Period 55 REVISION 4 I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review. - Grammar: Review. 2. Skills: Review 4 skills: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competences: - Get ready for the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in 6 units in the first semester. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: Text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercises. - Let them do at home, IV. PROCEDURES: PART 4: GRAMMAR AND VOCABULARY (3 points) Choose the best options to complete these sentences 1.

Have you ever ____________to Sapa?

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

179

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 seen 2.

N¨m häc 2019-2020 Been

Gone

visited

Don’t eat that type of fish, you may have a/an energy

Sick

. Allergy

Sore

What ___________do i need to cook an omelette? menu Food material

My cousin, Hoa, is the same age _________me.

as A lot of flowers grow

Ingredients

Of Too in Da Lat throughout the year.

Are grown

Grew

grown

___________ bottles of milk does your family need for a week? how How many How much How old My brother doesn’t like ice-skating because he thinks it is ___________.

dangerous

endangered

Danger

In danger

Eating a lot of junk food may lead to your

fitness obesity Pain stomachache The villagers are ________they were years ago. There is many changes at all. as friendly as

different from

as friend as

time on computer games. 10. You shouldn’t spend A. A few B. more C. less 11. Bach Mai National Park close to the sea. A. locates B Located is located . 12. The Imperial Academy was regarded for A. to B As . PART 5: WRITING (2 points) I. Supply the correct verb tense (1 pt)

1. 2.

I (visit) John (read)

not as friend as

D. few

D is being located the.first university in Viet Nam. D of .

our form teacher in the hospital already. the letter from Mary yesterday.

II. Change into passive voice (1 pt)

1. Ms Linh teaches our English lessons. (Change into passive voice) Our English lessons ..........................................................................................

2. King Ly Nhan Tong built the Imperial Academy as the first university in Viet Nam in 1076. Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

180

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

The Imperial Academy ..................................................................................... THE CORRECTION PART 5: WRITING (2 points => 0.5 points/ correct answer) I. Supply the correct verb tense (1 pt) 1. I (visit) have visited our form teacher in the hospital already. 2. John (read) read the letter from Mary yesterday. II. Change into passive voice (1 pt) 1. Ms Linh teaches our English lessons. (Change into passive voice) Our English lessons are taught by Ms Linh. 2. King Ly Nhan Tong built the Imperial Academy as the first university in Viet Nam in 1076. The Imperial Academy was built as the first university in Viet Nam in 1076 by Ling Ly Nhan Tong.

V. Feedback:

GOOD LUCK 

............................................................................................................................................... ...............................................................................................................................................

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

181

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2019-2020

Date of planning: Dec 24th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 1st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 1st ,2019 Period 56 EXAMINATION I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : - Grammar: . 2. Skills: Review 4 skills: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competences: - Do the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in 6 units in the first semester. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS

Nhận biết

Thông hiểu

4 0.3

4 0.3 5 0,3

A Listening B. Reading C. Use

5 0.2

Vận dung Cấp độ thấp KQ TL

Cộng Cấp độ cao KQ TL

8 2.4 10 2,5

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

182

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 English D. Writing Total

N¨m häc 2019-2020

0,2

16 3.2 % 32 % % Trắc 32.% nghiệm KQ % Tự luậ

4 1.2

0.2 5 0.3 7

9 2.7

39%

5 0.2 5 1

1.9 19 %

10%

12 % 27 %

19%

2.6 10 2.5 41 10 100% 44 %

10% 56 %

IV. PROCEDURES:

Giáo Viên: Nguyễn Đoàn Ngọc Anh

183

Trường THCS Hùng Vương

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

UBND HUYỆN KIẾN THUỴ ĐỀ THI HỌC KÌ I TRƯỜNG THCS DU LỄ NĂM HỌC 2018-2019 ĐỀ CHÍNH THỨC Môn thi : Tiếng Anh ( Thời gian làm bài: 45 phút. Thí sinh làm bài ngay vào đề thi này) Họ và tên thí sinh:............................ Ngày sinh:................................................ SỐ PHÁCH SBD:.................................................. Trường THCS:......................................... Giám thị 1:........................................ Giám Thị 2:.............................................. --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Điểm (thống nhất):...................................

Bằng chữ:.........................................SỐ PHÁCH

Giám khảo 1:............................................

Giám khảo 2:...................................

A. LISTEN: I. Listen to Sue talking to her friend. Jim. About the new sports center. Choose A, B or C. You will hear the conversation twice. 1.Which bus goes to the sports centre? A. 15 B. 18 C. 25 2.From Monday to Saturday, the sports centre is open from A. 6 a.m B. 7 a.m C. 9 a.m 3.If Sue goes swimming. She must take A. soap B. a swimming hat. C. a towel. 4.At the sports centre, you can buy A. sandwiches B. fruit C. drinks 5.Jim and Sue are going to go to the sports centre next A. Wednesday. B. Thursday. C. Saturday. II.Listen and filling the gaps. Mary’s hobby is singing. She enjoys (1) ____________ very much. When her brother (2) _________ a karaoke set last month, Mary was so glad that she sang every day after dinner. She likes to sing only (3) ____________ songs. In fact, she has already sung all the songs found (4) __________ the karaoke discs. Mary is singing in the karaoke (5) __________ organized by the RC Center this Saturday. Her family is going (6) _____________ to support her. B. USE OF ENGLISH (2.6 pts) I. Choose the word that has the underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.(0.4pt) 1. A. healthy B. ahead C. bread D. seatbelt 2. A. played B. closed C. filled D. needed II. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. (0.2 pt) 1. A. traffic B. agree C. noisy D. student III. Choose the best answer by circling A, B, C or D: (2pts) 1. Mai used to ________ morning exercise when she was a girl. A. did B. does C. doing D. do 2. Traffic accidents can be prevented if everyone __________ the rules. A. remember B. obey C. go after D. take care of 3. People should look right and left when they go________the road. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

184

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

A. down B. across C. up D. along 4. The play was so boring. ________, Hoa saw it from beginning to end. A. Therefore B. Despite C. However D. Although 5. ____________ being frightened by the images, Lan still liked the film so much. A. In spite B. Despite C. Although D. Nevertheless 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7. The signal says “ left turn only”

A B 8. The signal says “ traffics lights”

IV. Use the correct form of the words in brackets (0.4 pt) 1. Nam liked the ____________ of that actor. (PERFORM) 2. This history book is ……………. I get more interested in history. (INTEREST) C. READ (2.5 pts) I. Read and match the types of films with their definitions. (1 pt) Types of film Definitions. 1.science fiction A. a. film that tries to make audiences laugh. 2. romantic comedy b. A film that features cartoon characters. 3. animation c. A film that is set in the future, often featuring science 4. comedy d. A film which combines comedy with a love story 5 documentary e. A film that shows real life events or stories. II. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions. (1.5 pts)

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

185

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 People of ethnic minorities in Phu Yen celebrate Hoi Mua Festival every March. It is held to thank the Rice God for the crop, and to pray for better crops in the future. Families also worship their ancestors and parents on this occasion. Villagers voluntarily contribute money and other things to celebrate the festival. In this festival monks are invited to preach. People play drums, sing songs and dance. They also drink rice wine through a long thin bamboo tube. There are some other activities such as cultural shows, buffalo races, and traditional games. The festive atmosphere is felt around all the villages.

Questions: 1. Who in Phu Yen celebrate Hoi Mua Festival every March. 2. When is it held? 3. What do villagers voluntarily contribute to celebrate the festival? 4. Are monks invited play drums, sing songs and dance? 5. Where is the festive atmosphere felt ? D. Write (2,5) 1-Rewrite these sentences, so that their meaning stays the same, using the beginning given for each.(1 pt) 1. What is the distance between Quang Ngai and HCM city? => How…………………………………………………………….? 2. I often walked to school when I was a student. => I used…………………………………………………………… 3. Although Tom was a poor student, he studied very well. => In spite of =>………………………………………………………………………… 4. Although the weather was bad, she went to school on time. => Despite II. Write about from 80 100 words about the festival which you attended (1.5) .........................................................................................................................………… ………………………........................................................................................................... .………………………................................................................................................ .........................................................................................................................………… ………………………........................................................................................................... .………………………................................................................................................ .........................................................................................................................………… ………………………........................................................................................................... .………………………................................................................................................ .........................................................................................................................………… ………………………........................................................................................................... .………………………................................................................................................ .........................................................................................................................……… Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

186

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Dec 24th, 2018 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 3rd,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 2nd ,2019

Period 57 CORRECTION EXAMINATION I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : - Grammar: . 2. Skills: Review 4 skills: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competences: - Do the first semester test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in 6 units in the first semester. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS IV. PROCEDURE

Keys: A. LISTEN: I. Listen to Sue talking to her friend. Jim. About the new sports center. Choose A, B or C. You will hear the conversation twice. Which bus goes to the sports centre? A. 15 B. 18 C. 25 From Monday to Saturday, the sports centre is open from A. 6 a.m B. 7 a.m C. 9 a.m If Sue goes swimming. She must take A. soap B. a swimming hat. C. a towel. 4.At the sports centre, you can buy A. sandwiches B. fruit C. drinks 5.Jim and Sue are going to go to the sports centre next A. Wednesday. B. Thursday. C. Saturday. II.Listen and filling the gaps. 1. singing 2. Bought 3.English 4. On 5. competition 6. there B. USE OF ENGLISH (2.2 pts) I. Choose the word that has the underlined part is pronounced differently from the others.(0.4pt) 1.D 2.D II. Choose the word whose main stress is placed differently from the others. (0.2 pt) 1.B III. Choose the best answer by circling A, B, C or D: (1.2pts) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 187

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1. Mai used to ________ morning exercise when she was a girl. A. did B. does C. doing D. do 2. Traffic accidents can be prevented if everyone __________ the rules. A. remember B. obey C. go after D. take care of 3. People should look right and left when they go________the road. A. down B. across C. up D. along 4. The play was so boring. ________, Hoa saw it from beginning to end. A. Therefore B. Despite C. However D. Although 5. ____________ being frightened by the images, Lan still liked the film so much. A. In spite B. Despite C. Although D. Nevertheless 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7. The signal says “ left turn only” C

C C

A B 8. The signal says “ traffics lights”

IV. Use the correct form of the words in brackets (0.4 pt) 1. Nam liked the … PERFORMANCE.. of that actor. (PERFORM) (PERFORMANCE) 2. This history book is … INTERESTING …I get more interested in history. (INTEREST) C. READ (2.5 pts) I. Read and match the types of films with their definitions. (1 pt) Types of film Definitions. 1.science fiction A. a. film that tries to make audiences laugh. 2. romantic comedy b. A film that features cartoon characters. 3. animation c. A film that is set in the future, often featuring science 4. comedy d. A film which combines comedy with a love story 5 documentary e. A film that shows real life events or stories. 1c

2d Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

4a 188

5e Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

II. Read the passage carefully then answer the questions. (1.5 pts) 1. People of ethnic minorities in Phu Yen celebrate Hoi Mua Festival every March. 2. It is held every March 3. Villagers voluntarily contribute money and other things to celebrate the festival. 4. No, they aren’t. 5. The festive atmosphere is felt around all the villages. D. Write (2,5) 1-Rewrite these sentences, so that their meaning stays the same, using the beginning given for each.(1 pt) 1. What is the distance between Quang Ngai and HCM city? => How far is it from Quang Ngai to HCM city? 2. I often walked to school when I was a student. => I used to walk to school when I was a student. 3. Although Tom was a poor student, he studied very well. => In spite of being a poor student, Tom studied very well 4. Although the weather was bad, she went to school on time. => Despite the bad weather, she went to school on time II. Write about from 80 100 words about the festival which you attended (1.5) Writing right and enough above requests.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

189

Date of planning: Jan 1st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 7th,2019 Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 7th ,2019

Period 58 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 1: Getting started (P.6-7) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary :- Read write and understand words and expressions : traffic jam (n), except (prep), used to (v), hey, great idea, can’t wait. - the lexical items related to the topic “Traffic”. - Language : ‘How…..’ question to ask about means of transport. 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about traffic 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more and be able to choose suitable means of transport to keep them healthy and the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to questions about means of transport. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may have difficulty in extending the conversation. - Guide them by making model conversation. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display UNIT 7. TRAFFIC I. WARM UP (6’/IW) Chatting Lesson 1: Getting started (P.6-7) Chatting - T introduces the topic “ Traffic” by asking some questions: T :- How/ By what means do you go to school every day? -On foot? By bicycle? By bus? On your parents’ motorbike… - What means of transport is faster? What mean is safer? What means do you like most?Why? - What can you see on the way to school every day? Ss answer. T asks ss to look at the picture and asks some questions about it - Who are Mai and Oanh? - What may they talk about? + Play the recording. Ss listen and read. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

A. GETTING STARTED Monday in the playground

190

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 II. NEW LESSON 1.Listen and read (15’/IW/PW) T introduces some new words. (real things, pictures, situation) Check ‘R.O.R’

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1. Listen and read * Vocabulary - used to (v): - traffic (n): jam - except (prep)

đã từng sự tắc ngẽn giao thông ngoại trừ, trừ ra

T plays the recording. Ss look at the conversation, listen to the tape and then work in pairs to practice the conversation. T checks some pairs. *Practice 1a. Choose the correct answer. Ss work independently or in pairs to choose the correct answer to the questions. T then checks their answers, and gives explanation if necessary. 1b. Answer the following questions. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer. T calls some pairs to read the questions and give answers. T gets feedback.

*Practice 1a. Choose the correct answer. *Key: 1. B 2. A 3. B 4. C

1b. Answer the following questions. *Key: 1. She played with her brother/ stayed at home. 2. It’s about 2 kilometers. 3. She usually goes to school with her dad. 4. Because sometimes there are traffic jams 5. She goes to school by bike. 1c. Can you find the following in the 1c. Can you find the following in the conversation? Do you know what they conversation? Do you know what they mean? mean? T tells Ss to refer back to the conversation to *Key: find the phrases. 1. to have someone’s attention. Ss practise saying them together 2. when you strongly support or agree T explains the meaning to the Ss, then give with something. some examples. 3. very excited and keen to do something. 1d. Work in pairs. Make short role-plays 1d. Work in pairs. Make short role-plays with the expressions above. Then practice with the expressions above. Then them. practice them. T asks ss to role-play the short conversation . *Example: Ss work in pairs to creat short conversations A: How about cycling to school with me using the colloquial expressions in 1c P7 tomorrow? T calls some pairs to present the dialogue B: Great idea! before class. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 191

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Means of transport. 2. Means of transport.(8’/IW/PW) Ss work in pairs and write the means of Write the words using the first letter transport under the right pictures. given. T lets Ss read each word correctly. *Key: T checks and corrects their pronunciation. 1. bike/ bicycle 2. bus 3. plane 4. boat 5. ship 6. train 7. motorbike 8. car * Example: T introduces the question ‘How’ = ‘By what A: How do you come to school? = By what means do you come to school? means’ to ask about means of transport. Ss work in pairs to practice asking and B: I come to school by bike. A: How do you go to the supermarket? = answering. By what means do you go to the supermarket? B: I go to the supermarket by bus. 3. Match a verb on the left with a means of 3. Match a verb on the left with a means of transport on the right. There may be transport on the right. There may be more than one correct answer. (7’/IW) more than one correct answer. -T asks Ss to work individually to do the *Key: task, and write their answers in their 1. ride a bike 2. drive a car notebooks. 3. fly by plane 4. sail on/ in a boat -T check their answers as a class. 5. get on/ get off a bus/ a train/ a bike/ a - Ask Ss to make sentences with the phrases. motorbike. T gets feedback. * Example: My father taught me how to ride a bike./I often ride my bike to school. III. WRAPPING-UP (7’) 4. Find someone in your class who Let Ss stand up and go round the class to ask never. everyone the question: Find someone who never....... Ss have to take notes, and then some of them 1. ...walks to school Nam report their result to the class. 2. ...goes to school by bus - Get feedback and correct. 3. ...cycles for exercise -Summarize the main point of the lesson. 4. ...takes a train 5.... sails on/in a boat 6. ... flies by plane * Example: A : Do you often walk to school? B(Ba) : Yes, I do. A : Do you often walk to school? C (Nam): No. I never walk to school. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

192

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Review the lesson. - Make at least five questions and answers about means of transport.

Date of planning: Jan 4th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 10th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 10th ,2019 Period 59 Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

193

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.8-9)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : lexical items related to the topic ‘Road signs’. - Pronunciation : sounds /e/, /ei/ 2. Skills: Listening, speaking about road signs. 3. Attitude and competencies: Know more and be able to obey the traffic rules and use the road safely. - Understand and actively respond to different road signs on the way to school. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not be able to identify some road signs. - Explain carefully by giving picture and words. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.8-9) * Brainstorming T let them give all road signs they see every day on the way to school, or elsewhere, and all the words they know related to the topic of traffic and transport T encourages them to say out as many words as possible.

* Brainstorming Suggestion: - stop - no left turn/ no right turn - parking/ no parking - go ahead - no cycling - one-way

II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary (20’/IW/PW)

I. Vocabulary -T elicits the new words using pictures and - traffic sign/ road explanation. sign Ss repeat in chorus and individually. - lane T calls some ss to read the words in the box - seatbelt/ again. safetybelt Check vocabulary “Slap the board” - traffic rule - obey - pavement 1. Have you seen these road signs? Talk Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

194

(n):

- biển báo giao thông

(n): (n):

làn đường, đường hẹ đai an toàn

(n):

luật giao thông

(v): (n):

tuân theo vỉa hè (cho người đ

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

about the meaning of the signs below with a partner. - Ask ss to work in pairs to talk about the meaning of the road signs. Ss work in pairs .

1.Have you seen these road signs? Talk about the meaning of the signs below with a partner.

2. Label the signs in 1 with the words/ phrases below. Ss work individually to label the road signs in 1 with the words/ phrases. - Call some pairs to write these on the board. - Check their answers. Look out: There are usually three kinds of signs: informative, prohibitive, and warning.

2. Label the signs in 1 with the words/ phrases below. *Key: 1. traffic lights. 2. no parking 3. no right turn 4. hospital ahead 5. parking 6. cycle lane 7. school ahead 8. no cycling Look out! - A sign within a red triangle will warn you of something. - Signs with red circle are mostly prohibitive- that means you can’t do something. - Signs in blue are usually to give information.

3. Work in pairs. Discuss which of the signs you see on the way to school. T lets Ss work in pairs and talk about the traffic signs they see on the way to school ( or else). T goes around and gives assistance if necessary, and check their answers. T gives comments.

3. Work in pairs. Discuss which of the signs you see on the way to school. * Example: A: On the way to school, I can see a “ no left turn” sign. B: On my way to school there is a hospital, so I can see a “hospital ahead” sign.

II. Pronunciation (13’/IW/PW) /e/ and /ei/ 4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to sounds /e/ and /ei/ T: How to pronounce the sounds /e/ and /ei/? Teacher models and give examples. T asks students to observe teacher's mouth and listen carefully -Then play the recording for them to listen and repeat the words. - SSs listen and repeat - Play the recording every words many times for ss to recognize it Ss recognize the difference in the pronunciation of the two words. 5. Listen to these sentences carefully. Single

II. Pronunciation /e/ and /ei/ 4. Listen and repeat. Pay attention to sounds /e/ and /ei/

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

5. Listen to these sentences carefully. 195

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

underline the words with sound /e/ and double –underline the words with sound /ei/. T plays the recording as many times as necessary. Ss do individually. Check if they do this correctly. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’) - Refer back to the page 8. Ask Ss to find all the words having the sounds /e/ and /ei/ in section 1-3. - Correct their mistakes. Let them practice saying these words together. -Summarize the main points of the lesson T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

Single underline the words with sound /e/ and double –underline the words with sound /ei/. * Key: /e/: ever, very, left, when, next. /ei/: break, way, railway, station, always, obey, safely, UK, they, waiting, train. 6. Find the words containing sound /e/ and the words containing sound /ei/ in 1-3 on page 8. Key: /e/ / ei/ Ahead Phrases Red Lane Left Information Way III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sounds /e/ and /ei/ more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2,B1/P.3-4- W.B

Date of planning: Jan 4th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 11th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 11th ,2019 Period 60 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.9-10) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

196

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : names of places - Language: - It indicating distance. -Used to 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about distances and the activities in the past. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more and be able to choose suitable activities at present. - Understand and actively respond to questions about the distances and activities in the past. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - There may not be enough time for all the activities. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.9-10) T asks ss some questions about their house, means of transport to different places.

Chatting

II. NEW LESSON I. Grammar It indicating distance (20’/IW/PW) 1. Write sentences with it. Use these cues. - T explains, then give example - Ss work by themseves and write down the sentences. T observes and help when and where necessary. T asks some Ss to read their sentences. T corrects Ss’ mistakes.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Grammar 1. It indicating distance - We can use it in the position of the subject to indicate distance 1. Write sentences with it. Use these cues. • Key: 1. It is about 700 metres from my house to the Youth Club 2. It is about 5 km from my home village to the nearest town. 3. It is about 120 km from Ho Chi Minh to Vung Tau. 4. It is about 384,400 km from the Earth to the Moon. 5. It is not very far from HaNoi to Noi Bai Airport. 1. What 2. Where 3. How long 197

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about distances in your neighbourhood. T makes model first. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer questions about distances in their neighbourhood, following the example. T encourages them to talk as much as possible. T corrects their answers, and their pronunciation and intonation. - T asks Ss to look at the answer in order to choose the correct question word. Ss work individually to do the exercise. -Play the recording. Let Ss look at the conversations as they listen and check their answers. T calls some pairs to practice the dialogue again. 2- Used to (14’/IW/PW) T explains to the Ss that used to is the same form for all persons. It is used to describe an action, a habit or a state that happened regularly in the past, but does not happen now.

3. Complete the sentences with used to or use to and the verbs in the box below. - Ss work independently, writing down the answers. Then work in groups to check and say out the sentences. - T goes round giving help when and where necessary. - Some Ss may write their answers on the boards. - Other Ss give comments and T give corrections. 4. Rewrite the sentences using used to. T lets Ss work individually to rewrite the sentences in their notebooks. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about distances in your neighbourhood. * Example: A: How far is it from your house to school? B: It’s about a kilometre.

2- Used to - We use used to to describe an action or a state that happened regularly in the past but does not happen at present. * Example: There used to be many trees on the street, but now there are only shops. Form: (+) S + used to + V (-) S + didn’t use to + V (?) Did + S + use to Watch out: In questions and negative sentences, the final “d” in used is dropped. 3. Complete the sentences with used to or use to and the verbs in the box below. be ride play go feel * Key: 1. used to ride 2. used to be 3. used to go 4. Did…use to play 5. did…..not use to feel 4. Rewrite the sentences using used to. 198

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- While Ss do their task, T goes round to monitor the whole class. - When Ss finish their task, call some to read out their sentences. - Let others give comments, T corrects mistakes if necessary.

* Key: 1. My mum used to live in a small village when she was a girl. 2. There did not use to be (as) many vehicles on the road. 3. We used to cycle to school two years ago. 4. Now there are more traffic accidents that there used to be. 5. My uncle used to be a bus driver some year ago, but now he has a desk job.

III. WRAPPING-UP (4’) Ss work in groups to ask and answer. 5. Work in groups. Did you use to do Summarize the main points of the lesson. those things? Ask and answer. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve Example: Did you use to play marbles? learnt the lesson well. Yes, I did IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do part B1,2,3/P.4,5 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Jan 7th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 14th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 14th ,2019 Period 61 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 4: Communication (P.11) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

199

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : read, write and understanding “roof, illegal, Laws, Reverse, Righthanded” - Language: The Present Simple Tense. 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about strange driving laws around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about strange driving laws around the world. - Understand and actively respond to driving laws. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough knowledge about strange driving laws around the world . - T gives some extra information to encourage them to guess. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (8’/IW) UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 4: Communication (P.11) * Guessing Game: Look at the flags of some countries. Give the names of these countries. T shows these flags on the screen. Ss work individually to guess. T confirms the answer and lead to the new lesson. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary:. (8’/IW) * Vocabulary: -T introduce some vocab by using pictures, situations -Ss repeat and write down in their book….. 1. Why do these countries drive on the left? Listen to the text then write your answers below. (15’/IW/PW) - T plays the recording. - Ss listen carefully and check their answer to 1. Then T gives the correct answers - T plays the recording again. - Let Ss complete the table by themselves, then share their answer with a partner. T goes round the class to gives support if necessary. 2. Look at the strange driving laws Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

* Guessing Game: 1. The UK 2. Australia 3. India 4. Thailand 5. Malaysia I. Vocabulary: - roof (n) : nóc, mái nhà - illegal (adj): bất hợp pháp, trái luật - Laws (n) : luật, phép tắc - Reverse (v): đảo, nghịch, lùi xe - Right-handed (adj): thuận tay phải 1. Why do these countries drive on the left? Listen to the text then write your answers below. Reasons this happened: 1. some countries used the same system as UK. 2. many people are right-handed ( so on the left-hand side, it is easier for them to use a sword or something when they 2. Look at the strange driving laws 200

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

below. Five of them are true, but one is false. In pairs, can you find the false driving law? (5’/PW) - Ss work in pairs, discussing to find one false driving law. T may ask the question: Which one do you think seems most unreasonable? Then let Ss think and give the answer. III. WRAPPING-UP (7’/GW) 3. Now, work in groups. Discuss the laws and put them in order from the strangest (1) to the least strange (5) Ss work in groups to discuss the laws in 3 and put them in order. The groups may have different results. T asks them to explain for their results. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

below. Five of them are true, but one is false. In pairs, can you find the false driving law? - “In France, you can only reverse your car on Sundays”. This sentence is false!

3. Now, work in groups. Discuss the laws and put them in order from the strangest (1) to the least strange (5)

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,2,3 /P. 6,7- W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Jan 10th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 17th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 17th ,2019 Period 62 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.12) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Revise the vocab about traffic rules. - Language: - Simple Present Tense. - Modal Verbs : should, must Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng 201

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Skills: read for specific information about traffic rules/ laws. Talk about obeying traffic rules/ laws, and how to use the road safely. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Get to know about traffic rule and road safety. - Understand and actively respond to road safety and traffic rules. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to catch up with the whole class. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (5’/IW)

Contents and Board Display UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.12) Chatting: Chatting T: Look at the picture. What can you see in 1. Look at the picture. Can you see the picture? anything that is dangerous? T: Can you see anything dangerous? Ss : It is dangerous to ride a motorbike on the pavement. …………………………………………….. II. NEW LESSON I. READING (25’/IW/PW) 1. Now match these words to make common expressions. Ss work in pairs to do the matching T checks their results. Then T asks Ss which they can see in the picture in 1. 2.Answer the following question. When you are a road user, what should you NOT do? Ss work in group. Tell them to answer the question: When you are a road user, what should you Not do? Then they make a list to compare with other groups. T may give some cues: not pay attention, not look around, go in red light,…. 3. Read the following text and do the tasks below. T asks Ss to read the passage two or three Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. READING 1. Now match these words to make common expressions. *Key: 1. g 2. d 3. b 4. c 5. a 6. h 7. f 8.e 2. Answer the following question. When you are a road user, what should you NOT do? * Suggested answers: - not pay attention - not look around - not go in red light,.. + Make a list in groups. Compare your list with other groups. 3. Read the following text and do the tasks below. 202

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 times in 5 minutes. Ss read quickly for specific information. T explains the new words and clarifies anything difficult. T may ask questions to see if Ss understand the passage. 4. Answer these questions. T asks Ss to read the passage again, then they work with a partner to answer the questions. T checks some pairs.

II. SPEAKING (10’/PW) 6. Class survey. Ask your classmates the question. Ss do the class survey in 2 minutes. T calls some Ss to report to the class. T and other students comments. 7. Read the following sentences. In groups, discuss who is using the road safely, and who is acting dangerously. Give reasons. T allows Ss to read individually in 2 minutes. Then they work in groups to discuss who is using the road safely, and who is acting dangerously, and give reasons.

III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

4. Answer these questions. *Key: 1. We should cross the street at the zebra crossing. 2. He/ She must always fasten the seatbelt. 3. No, He/ She shouldn’t. Because it is dangerous.( He/ She may cause an accident.) 4. We must give a signal. 5. Because the other road users can see them clearly and avoid crashing into them II. SPEAKING 6. Class survey. Ask your classmates the question. How do you go to school every day? + Make a list of the means of transport that is used the most, and use the least. 7. Read the following sentences. In groups, discuss who is using the road safely, and who is acting dangerously. Give reasons. * Suggested answers: 1. safely 2. dangerously ( because he is likely to have an accident) 3. safely 4. dangerously ( it is difficult for him to see the road properly, and to ride) 5. dangerously ( a car or motorbike may crash into him) 6. dangerously ( She may have an accident if something happeneds unexpectedly.)

III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Do D1,2, 3/P.7,8 – W.B. - Review the lesson.

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 203

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

...............................................................................................................................................

Date of planning: Jan 10th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 18th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 18th ,2019 Period 63 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.13) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : lexical items related to traffic problems. - Language: Simple Present 2. Skills: Listen to get information about traffic problems in big city. Write a paragraph about traffic problems in a city/ an area. 3. Attitude and competencies: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 204

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Know more about traffic problems and respect traffic rules. - Understand and actively respond to traffic problems and respect traffic rules. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Ss may get confused in writing. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (8’/GW) UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.13) * Chatting: T shows pictures of traffic problems in big cities on the screen. Teacher asks ss some questions about the traffic jam. II. NEW LESSON I. LISTENING(15’/IW/PW) 1. Work in groups. Where do you think this picture was taken? Why is it special? Ss work in groups. They study the picture and answer the two questions. T elicits as many answers as possible. 2.Look at the following headline and check your answers. T tells Ss to look at the newspaper headline and check their answers. 3. Now listen to the passage and choose the correct answer. T asks Ss to read the questions and guess the answers T plays the recording twice. Ask Ss to listen carefully and circle the correct answers. T checks and gives comments. II. Writing.(15’/IW) T asks ss some questions about the traffic problems in Vietnam T : What do you think about traffic problems in big cities in Viet Nam are. 4. Tick the traffic problems in big cities in Viet Nam. Have Ss look at the pictures, read the Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. LISTENING Traffic problems in a big cities 1. Work in groups. Where do you think this picture was taken? Why is it special? - In a big city….. 2. Look at the following headline and check your answers. * Key: - In Brazil - long traffic jam ( very long line of vehicles). 3. Now listen to the passage and choose the correct answer. * Key: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. C II. Writing.

4. Tick the traffic problems in big cities in Viet Nam. * Suggested answers : 205

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 passages and tick the problems Then Ss write full sentences. T calls some Ss to write on the board. Others give comments. T gives corrections.

5. Write a paragraph about the traffic problems where you live, or in a town, or a city you know well. Use the cues above, and the following outline. T tells Ss to study the sentences they have written, then practise writing the paragraph. Tell Ss to use proper connector: first/ firstly, second/ secondly, ……and pay attention to spelling and punctuation. - Collect some Ss’ writing papers and mark them, then give comments to the class. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Picture: 1,2,3,4,6 * Suggested answers : - There are too many vehicles ( on the road). - Many roads are narrow and bumpy - There are traffic accidents every day. - Many young children ride their bikes dangerously. 5. Write a paragraph about the traffic problems where you live, or in a town, or a city you know well. Use the cues above, and the following outline. Introduction: Problem1: Problem 2: Problem 3: Conclusion: ( Reason or advice/ suggestion)

III. HOMEWORK IV. HOMEWORK (2’) -Learn the new words. - T assigns the homework. - Do E1,2/P.9 – W.B. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully -Review the lesson. V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Date of planning: Jan 14th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 21st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 21st ,2019 Period 64 UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.14-15) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review - Language: Review 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about road signs, means of transport and traffic problems. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about road signs, means of transport and traffic problems to have better travelling habits. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

206

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 7 - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (2’/IW) UNIT 7. TRAFFIC Lesson 7: Looking back and Project Teacher asks ss about their favourite means (P.14-15) of transport. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary: (8’/IW/PW) 1. What do these signs mean? Write the meaning below each sign. Then put them into the correct box. Ss do this task individually to write the meaning below each sign. T corrects their mistakes and lets them read the words correctly. - Then let Ss work in groups and put the signs into the correct boxes. 2. Write the names of means of transport in the word web below. Then draw lines joining the correct verbs to the transport. T lets Ss work in pairs. Ss write the answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers. II. Grammar (10’/IW/PW) 3. Change the sentences according to the prompts in brackets. T asks Ss to work in pairs or in groups and write their answers in their notebooks. T checks their answers and gives comments.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Vocabulary: 1. What do these signs mean? Write the meaning below each sign. Then put them into the correct box. *Key : 1. Traffic lights 2. School ahead 3. Hospital ahead 4. Cycle lane 5. Parking 6. No parking 7. left turn only 8. No cycling Prohibition signs: 6,8 Warning signs: 1,2, 7 Information signs: 3,4,5 2. Write the names of means of transport in the word web below. Then draw lines joining the correct verbs to the transport. - Suggestion: bicycle, motorbike, car, bus, taxi, train, plane, boat, ship… II. Grammar 3. Change the sentences according to the prompts in brackets. *Key: 1. Did you use to go to school on foot? 2. Mr. Van didn’t use to ride his motorbike dangerously. 3. Did the streets use to be cleaner and more peaceful? 4. I used to go out on Sundays. 5. They didn’t use go to on holiday 207

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 4. Write sentences using these cues. Ss work individually first to write the sentences. Then they work in pairs to swap their sentences. T gives correction and calls some Ss to read the sentences aloud.

III. Communication (10’/PW) 5. Match the questions 1-6 with the answers a-f. Ss read the questions and answers once or twice ( they can read aloud), then match them. Ss work in pairs and role- play the questions and answers, then write all sentences in their notebooks. Finished! Finally ask Ss to complete the selfassessment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice if need be. IV. Project (10’) Road SIGns display. T guides Ss to work in groups make their own traffic signs with the materials available. Ss work in groups of five at home. T asks ss to bring their traffic signs to class to explain and ti display next period. III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 together. 4. Write sentences using these cues. *Key: 1. It is over 100 km from my home-town to HCM city. 2. It is about 25 km to my grandparents’ house. 3. I used to ride a small bike in the yard before my flat. 4. There used to be a bus station in the city centre, but it was/ has been moved to the suburbs. 5. Children must learn about road safety before they are allowed to ride a bike on the road. III. Communication 5. Match the questions 1-6 with the answers a-f. *Key: 1. b 2. a 3. e 4. d 5. f 6. c Finished! Now you can…………

IV. Project Road SIGns display.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. -Review the lesson. - Do Project

208

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Date of planning: Jan 17th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 24th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 24th ,2019 Period 65 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 1: Getting started (P.16-17) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘ Film’: - Language : The Present Simple Tense. 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about different types of film. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different types of film and can choose suitable film for themselves. - Understand and actively respond to questions about films Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

209

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may know more about other films. - Collect more interesting information about these activities. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/IW) Chatting UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 1: Getting started (P.16-17) Chatting T writes the title on the board “Films” then elicits any information Ss know about films by asking about types of film they know, the latest films they have seen, their favourite films and film stars. II. NEW LESSON 1.Listen and read (8’/IW/PW)

A. GETTING STARTED

1. Listen and read

T asks Ss some questions about the picture: - Where are Phong and his sister Mai? - What might be happening to them? - What are thet doing? - What are they talking about? - Can you guess what kind of films Phong and Mai would like to see. - Have you ever gone to see a film with your brothers/ sisters? When and where? What film did you see then? How did you feel then? T plays the recording. Ss look at the conversation, listen to the tape and then work in pairs to practice the conversation. T checks some pairs. 1a. Read the conversation again and and answer the questions. (6’/IW/PW) T asks ss to work independently first. Then ss share their answers with their partner before discussing as a class.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

1a. Read the conversation again and and answer the questions. *Key: 1. b 2. a 3.a 4. c 5. b

210

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1b. Find the questions in the conversation that ask about Coconut Crazy. Then listen, check and repeat the question. (7’/IW/PW)

1b. Find the questions in the conversation that ask about Coconut Crazy. Then listen, check and repeat the question. *Key: . First, Ask Ss not to look at the book and try a. What kind of film is it? to remember what questions Mai asks Duong b. Who does it star? about the film they are going to see. Then let c. What is it about? Ss open their books and check their answers. d. What do critics say about it? 2. Match the types of films with their 2. Match the types of films with their definitions. Then listen, check and repeat. definitions. Then listen, check and repeat. (6’/IW) *Key: T asks ss to quickly match the types of film 1. d 2. f 3. a 4. c with their definitions. 5. b 6. e 7. h 8.g Ss work independently. T plays the recording for Ss to check their answers. T asks ss to listen and repeat. T asks ss questions to make sure ss understand all the phrases well. T: Do you often see a sci-fi/ horror film…..? T checks and gives comment. 3a. Think of a film. Fill in the blank below. . (5’/IW) Ss work independently, filling in the table with the information of the film they have seen recently. T reminds them to use the words and phrases they have learnt in 2 and from the conversation in 1. III. WRAPPING-UP (7’) First, T models this activity with a more able Ss. Ss work in pairs. T goes around to help weaker Ss. T calls some pairs to practice in front of the class -Summarize the main point of the lesson.

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

3a. Think of a film. Fill in the blank below. Type of film………………. Actors/ stars………………. The plot…………………… Reviews……………………

* In pairs, interview each other and try to guess the film. Example: A: What kind of film is it? B: It’s an action film A: Who does it star? B: It stars Daniel Craig. A: What is it about? B: It’s about a spy called 007. A: Is it Skyfall? B: Yes! III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Practice listening more at home. - Review the lesson. - Do B3,4 /P11 - WB 211

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Date of planning: Jan 17th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 25th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 25th ,2019 Period 66 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.18-19) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

212

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Adjectives for films : boring, hilarious, gripping, scary, entertaining, violent, moving, shocking. - Language : - ing and –ed adjectives - Pronunciation : sounds : /t/, /d/, /id/. 2. Skills: Listening, speaking about things and activities related to Films 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different types of film and can choose suitable film for themselves. - Understand and actively respond to questions about films and know how to describing the films. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not be able to identify the difference between the sounds /t/, /d/, /id/. - Explain carefully and Provide further practice by asking them doing Ex 5 many times. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.18-19) * Chatting T asks ss about their favorite films? T: Do you like watching films ? What kind of film do you like best? Can you tell us some information about the film you saw last night ? II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary (20’/IW/PW) 1. The following are adjectives which are often used to describe films. Can you add some more? T asks Ss to work independently. Then, ask them to share their answers with one or more partners. T asks for translation of some adjectives in the box to check their understanding. Ss make some examples with the adjectives they have learnt. T checks and comments. Remember: -ed and – ing adjectives T asks Ss to study the Remember Box and explain it carefully to them. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

*Chatting

I. Vocabulary 1. The following are adjectives which are often used to describe films. Can you add some more? *Key: 1. hilarious 2. moving 3. boring 4. gripping 5. shocking 6. scary 7. violent 8. entertaining * Remember: -ed and –ing adjectives

213

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Complete the table with the –ed and – ing forms of the adjectives. T asks Ss to do the task independently. T calls some Ss to answer. T checks their understanding and gives comments.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. Complete the table with the –ed and –ing forms of the adjectives. *Key: 1. interested 2. embarrassing 3. exciting 4. disappointed 5. exhausted 6. surprising 7. confused 8. frightening

3. Choose the correct adjectives. 3. Choose the correct adjectives. T asks Ss to do the exercise individually and *Key: then check with the whole class. When 1. moving 2. frightened checking, ask Ss to refer to the Remember 3. disappointed 4. amazed Box to make the meanings of the adjectives 5. terrified clearer to them 4a. Work in pairs. Look at the questions 4a. Work in pairs. Look at the below. Tell your partner how you felt, questions below. Tell your partner how you felt, using –ed adjectives. using –ed adjectives. T models this activity with some more able Example: I felt terrified before my last Maths test. Ss. Ss work in pairs. T may go around to help weaker Ss. T calls some pairs to practise in front of the class. 4b. Now use –ing adjectives to describe 4b. Now use –ing adjectives to describe these things and experiences in your these things and experiences in your life. T models this activity with some more able life. Ss. Example: The last film I saw was called Ss work in pairs. T may go around to help weaker Ss. Norwegian Wood. It was really moving. T calls some pairs to practise in front of the class. II. Pronunciation (13’/IW/PW) II. Pronunciation /t/, /d/, and /id/ /t/, /d/, and /id/ 5. Listen and repeat the verbs. Pay 5. Listen and repeat the verbs. Pay attention to the sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/ at attention to the sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/ the end of each verb. at the end of each verb. T models the sounds /t/ /d/, and /id/ in /t/ /d/ /id/ different words with the ending –ed. watched waited played T plays the recording and asks Ss to listen danced needed bored and repeat the words, paying attention to the walked hated closed sounds /t/, /d/, and /id/ at the end of each word. Ss put the words in the correct columns while they listen. Ss compare their answers in pairs. T checks. *Remember: * Remember: T asks Ss to look at the rules in the Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 214

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

remember Box. Tell them the rules of pronunciation. 6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the pictures. Then listen to the recording. T models this activity with some more able Ss. Ss work in pairs. T may go around to help weaker Ss. T calls some pairs to practise in front of the class. -T checks and gives comments. T plays the recording. Ss listen then repeat. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’) -Summarize the main points of the lesson T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

6. Work in pairs. Ask and answer questions about the pictures. Then listen to the recording. Example: cry a lot/ laugh a lot A: He cried a lot, didn’t he? B: No, he didn’t. He laughed a lot.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the sounds more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2/P.10- W.B

Date of planning: Jan 21st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 28th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 28th ,2019 Period 67 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.19-20) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : the lexical items related to films Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

215

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Language: Although, despite/ and in spite of However and nevertheless. 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about the contrast between two pieces of information in the same sentence and the contrast between two sentences. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know how to express contrast politely. - Understand and actively respond to the grammatical items. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - There may not be enough time for all the activities. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/IW) UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.19-20) - Teacher shows some pictures of things and people on the screen and ask ss to tell the difference between them. Ex : The dress is expensive but it is ugly. The girl is fat but she is weak. II. NEW LESSON I. Grammar Although, despite/ and in spite of (18’/IW/PW) T asks Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw Ss’ attention to the meaning and use of although, despite, and in spite of by analysing the examples in the grammar Box. Ss work individually to study the Grammar Box. T asks some more able Ss to give some more examples. 1. Complete the sentences. Use although + a clause from the box. T asks Ss to do the grammar exercises individually. T reminds them to look back to the Grammar Box and use a dictionary if necessary. Ss work individually then compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Grammar Although, despite/ and in spite of We use although, despite/ in spite of to express contrast between two pieces of information in the same sentence. We use although before a clause and despite/ in spite of before a noun or a phrase.

1. Complete the sentences. Use although + a clause from the box. * Key: 1…..although few people came to see it 2. Although they spent a lot of money on the film 3. Although the acting is excellent. 4. ….although it was a comedy 5. …although it is set in modern times. 2. Complete the sentences, using 216

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Complete the sentences, using although, despite/ in spite of. Sometimes, two answers are possible. T asks Ss to do the grammar exercises individually. Ss work individually then compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. 3. Rewrite these sentences using the words in the brackets. Change other words in the sentence if necessary. Ss work individually then compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. T checks and gives comments. However and nevertheless. (14’/IW/PW) T asks Ss to study the Grammar Box. Draw Ss’ attention to the meaning and use of However and Nevertheless by analysing the examples in the grammar Box. Ss work individually to study the Grammar Box. T asks some more able Ss to give some more examples. 4. Complete the sentences… T guides first. T asks Ss to do the grammar exercises individually. T reminds them to look back to the Grammar Box and use a dictionary if necessary. Ss work individually then compare answers in pairs before checking with the whole class. III. WRAPPING-UP (7’) 5. Use your own ideas to complete the following sentences. Then compare your sentences with a partner… T asks Ss to do the exercise individually, using their own ideas to write sentences. Ss work individuall to write sentences then work in pairs, comparing their sentences. Summarize the main points of the lesson. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 although, despite/ in spite of. Sometimes, two answers are possible. * Key: 1. Although 2. despite/ in spite of 3. although 4. Despite/ In spite of 5. Although 3. Rewrite these sentences using the words in the brackets. Change other words in the sentence if necessary. * Key: 1. I don’t think…..although he is… 2. Although many…, … 3. Despite having to work…,….. 4. Although he has….,….. 5. In spite of (having) a happy ending,… However and nevertheless. We also use however and nevertheless to express contrast between two sentences. We usually use a comma after them.

4. Complete the sentences… 1. However/ Nevertheless 2. Despite/ In spite of 3. However/ Nevertheless 4. Although 5. Although

5. Use your own ideas to complete the following sentences. Then compare your sentences with a partner… Ss’ ideas

III. HOMEWORK 217

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework.

-Learn the new words. - Do part B1,2, 7/ P.10,11,12- W.B. -Review the lesson.

- T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Date of planning: Jan 24th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Jan 31st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Jan 31st ,2019 Period 68 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 4: Communication (P.21) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words related to films : survey (n), go ahead (v), violence (n). Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

218

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Language: The Present Simple Tense. 2. Skills: Listening, Reading, and speaking about films. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love arts and choose suitable films for themselves. - Understand and actively respond to the survey about films. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough knowledge about actors and actresses. - T prepares some information about famous actors and actresses like Tom Cruise …… IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display UNIT 8. FILMS I. WARM UP (5’/IW) Lesson 4: Communication (P.21) * Chatting: T shows some famous films and famous actors and actresses on the screen. Then ask ss what they’ve known about these films and these people . T: - What kind of films you like to see? - Who are your favourite actors/ actresses? - Today, we are going to do an interview with your classmate about films. Please think of the questions you may ask your friends in your interview with them. II. NEW LESSON I.Vocab: (5’/IW) T introduce some vocab for Ss using pictures, situation. Ss repeat and write down into their book. Check “ Matching” II.Practice : 1. Listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks with the words you hear. (9’/PW) T asks Ss to look at the picture and read the conversation and guess what the missing words from the blanks may be. Ss discuss in pairs to guess. T plays the recording and lets Ss check their guesses. T playa the recording again for Ss to check the answers

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I.Vocab: Survey (n) : cuộc khảo sát go ahead (v) : cứ làm đi, cứ tự nhiên violence (n): có nhiều cảnh bạo lực II.Practice : 1. Listen to the conversation and fill in the blanks with the words you hear. * Key: 1. survey 2. actor 3. Tom Cruise 4. actress 5. Angelina Jolie

219

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Work in groups of six or eight. Each student chooses one of the following sets of survey questions. (10’/GW) T asks Ss to work in group of six or eight, asking their group members one set of questions. Ss write the names of names of the people they interview and note the answers in the table. 3. Make notes of your results.(7’/GW) T asks ss to make notes of their survey result. Ss make note then practice reporting the results of their surveys in groups. T checks some groups and comments. III. WRAPPING-UP (7’/GW) T asks Ss to join another group, reporting the results of their survey to the new members. T chooses some Ss to report the results of their interviews before the whole class. After each S has finished his/her report, T invites some comment from other Ss. T makes comments and corrects Ss’ mistakes. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. Work in groups of six or eight. Each student chooses one of the following sets of survey questions. - Survey on favourite actors - Survey on the best films. - Survey on action films - Survey on cartoons 3. Make notes of your results. - Most people I have surveyed…. - About half of the people I have surveyed……. - Almost no one I have surveyed….

4. Join another group. Report your results to those group members.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,2 /P.13– W.B. -Review the lesson.

V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................... Date of planning: Jan 24th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 1st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 1st ,2019 Period 69 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.22) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review lexical items related to films. - Language: The Simple Present Tense. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 220

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Skills: Reading about the film Titanic and speaking about films they would or would not like to see. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love arts and choose the suitable films for themselves. - Understand and actively respond to questions about the film Titanic and the films they would like or would not like to see. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to catch up with the whole class. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (5’/IW) *Chatting T shows a short scence of the film Titanic and asks ss some questions about the film. Now, look at the picture of the film Titanic. - Have you ever seen this film? - Do you know who actor and actress in the picture are? - Do you like him/her? Why/ Why not? II. NEW LESSON I.READING (15’/IW/PW) 1. Read Nick’s review of the film Titanic on his blog. Then find and underline the words from the box below. What do they mean? T asks Ss to scan the passage to find where the words sinking, must-see, special effects, and visuals are in the passage. T may help Ss work out the meanings of these words out of the context. 2. Read Nick’s blog again and answer the questions. T asks Ss to read the text again in 5 minutes and answer the questions. Ss read the blog individually. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions. Ss note where they found the information Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Contents and Board Display UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.22)

I. READING 1. Read Nick’s review of the film Titanic on his blog. Then find and underline the words from the box below. What do they mean? * Vocab: sinking: (sự) chìm, sự đánh chìm must-see: bộ phim hấp dẫn cần xem special effects: kỹ xảo đặc biệt, hiệu ứng đặc biệt visuals: thị giác, nhìn 2. Read Nick’s blog again and answer the questions. * Key: 1. It is a romantic film. 2. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. 3. It is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage. Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 221

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 that helped them to answer the questions. T checks some pairs. T and other ss comment.

II. SPEAKING (15’/IW/PW) 3. Look at the film posters below. Work in pairs. Talk about the films you would/ wouldn’t like to see. First T aska Ss to read every film poster. Ss read the posters individually. T helps ss with the new vocabulary. Ss work in pairs, talking about the films they would/ wouldn’t like to see. T may go round to help. T calls some pairs to practise in front of the class. 4.Now, ask and answer questions about the films. Ss work in pairs to ask and answer about the films from the posters. T may go round to help. T calls some pairs to practise in front of the class. III. WRAPPING-UP (8’/GW) * Interview: First,T reminds Ss of the words phrases about films. Ss may refer to the words and phrases they can use to talk about films. Ss work in groups. T goes around to provide support if necessary. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 4. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Buckater. Jack saves Rose from killing herself by jumping from the ship. Although they are from different social class and Rose is already engaged, the two fall in love. 5. The ending of Titanic is very sad. 6. They say it is a must-see in the 20th century. II. SPEAKING 3. Look at the film posters below. Work in pairs. Talk about the films you would/ wouldn’t like to see.

4.Now, ask and answer questions about the films. Example: A: I want to see War of the Worlds. B: What kind of film is it? A: It’s a science fiction B: What is it about? A: It’s about…. 5- Hotseating: In groups, choose a student to play the role of a character in any of the films above. Brainstorm questions you’d like to ask. Then interview the student. Example questions: - Can you describe your new film in three words? - Did you enjoy making the film? - Why should we watch this film? III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2/P.14,15– W.B. -Review the lesson.

V. Feedback : Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

222

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ....................

Date of planning: Feb 4th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 11th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 11th ,2019 Period 70 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.23) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review lexical items related to films. - Language: The Simple Present Tense. 2. Skills: Listen to get information about Tom Hanks, a Hollywood film star. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

223

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Write a review of their favorite film. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love arts and choose the suitable films for themselves. - Understand and actively respond to questions about Tom Hanks and films they like. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Ss may get confused in writing. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/IW) UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.23) * Chatting T asks Ss to tell about their favourite actors/ actresses T : Who is your favourite actor/actress? - What does he/she look like? - What are his/her sucessful films? - What awards/ prizes has he/she won? - What do critics say about him/her? II. NEW LESSON I. LISTENING(15’/IW/PW) Ex1 :Nick and his father are talking about Tom Hanks, a Hollywood film star. Listen to their conversation and correct the following statements. T asks Ss to read the instruction carefully and remind them to remember key words in the statements. T plays the recording and asks Ss to correct the statements while listening. Ss listen and correct the sentences individually. T calls two or three Ss to write their answers on the board. T plays the recording again for Ss to check the answers. Ex 2. Listen again. Answer the questions below. T asks Ss to read the rubric and study the questions carefully. Ss work in pairs to discuss the answers from the information they have heard in 1. T plays the recording again and have Ss answer the questions as they listen. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. LISTENING Ex1 :Nick and his father are talking about Tom Hanks, a Hollywood film star. Listen to their conversation and correct the following statements. * Keys : 1. Tom Hanks is Nick’s father’s favourite film star. 2. Tom Hanks isn’t a handsome actor. 3. Tom Hanks has won two Oscars.

Ex 2. Listen again. Answer the questions below. * Keys : 1. He has won the Oscar for Best Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 224

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Ss can share their answers with their partners. T calls some Ss to write their answers on the board. T checks and gives comments

II. Writing.(20’/IW) Ex 3 : Make notes about one of your favourite films. T asks Ss to make notes about one of their favourite films. Ss work individually to make note but do not have to write full sentences and they can use abbreviations. Then, Ss share their notes with their partners. T asks some Ss to read aloud.

Ex 4: Write a review of your favourite film… T sets up the writing activity and guides them carefully. T reminds Ss that the first and important thing is always to think about what they are going to write. In this case, Ss do not have to find out so many ideas of what they have to write because they may have made in 3. So T only has to brainstorm Ss for the language necessary for writing. - Ask Ss to write the draft first. Then have them write their final version in class or at home.

Actor twice. 2. They say he is one of the best actors in Hollywood. 3. He plays the role of a soldier in Saving Private Ryan. 4. Because it is one of the best comedies in the 1990s. II. Writing. Ex 3 : Make notes about one of your favourite films. - Name of the film, type of film, and actors or director. - The plot: What happens in the film? How is the film? ( gripping/ moving/ hilarious) What about the ending? - Other aspects of the film, the acting, the music, the special effects, the visuals, etc… - Critics’ reviews, your overall opinion. Ex 4: Write a review of your favourite film… Introduction ( paragraph 1) Body Paragraph 2 The plot: What happens in the film? How is the film?( gripping/ moving/ hilarious) what about the ending? Paragraph 3: Other aspects of the film: the acting, the music, the special effects, the visuals, etc.. Conclusion ( Paragraph 4) Critics’ reviews, your overall opinion ( Wy you recommend the film to everyone

III. WRAPPING-UP (4’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.16 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

- Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback : Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

225

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Date of planning: Feb 7th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 14th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 14th ,2019 Period 71 UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.24-25) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review - Language: Review 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about films. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love arts and choose the suitable films for themselves. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

226

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 8 - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 8. FILMS Lesson 7: Looking back and Project Teacher asks ss about the film they saw last (P.24-25) night. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary: (10’/IW/PW) Ex1. Think of an example of every type of films in the box. T asks Ss to think of as many examples of different types of films as possible. Ss work individually to think, Then T asks some Ss to say out their examples in front of the class. Ex 2. Read the sentences. What types of films are people talking about? T asks Ss to read the sentences carefully and decide which types of films the people are talking about. Ss discuss in pairs . They should pay attention to the adjectives in the sentences cause they will provide the context for them to choose the correct types of films. T checks and comments. Ex 3. Fill in the blanks with -ed or –ing adjectives that are formed from the verbs in brackets. T asks Ss to do individually. Ss do individually. T checks the results with a partner. T gives feed back. Ex 4. Complete the second sentences… T asks Ss to do individually. Ss do individually. T checks the results with a partner. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Vocabulary: Ex1. Think of an example of every type of films in the box. Example: Mr. Bean is a comedy. “Big Ben Down” is an action film

Ex 2. Read the sentences. What types of films are people talking about? * Key: 1. It’s a comedy. 2. It’s a horror film 3.It’s a documentary. 4.It’s a romantic comedy. 5.It’s a Sci-fi film.

Ex 3. Fill in the blanks with -ed or – ing adjectives that are formed from the verbs in brackets. 1. terrified 2. disappointing 3. annoying 4. satisfied 5. shocking

Ex 4. Complete the second sentences… 1. They were excited about the film. 227

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

T gives feed back.

2. The film was boring so they left halfway through it. 3. We were moved at the ending of the film. 4. You’ll be surprised at his new film. 5. Lots of people find the way he behaves/ his behaviour confusing. II. Grammar (5’/IW/PW) II. Grammar Ex5. Match the first half in A with the suitable Ex5. Match the first half in A with half in B. the suitable half in B. T asks Ss to do individually then check their *Key: answers with a partner before discussing the 1. d 2. e 3. a 4. b 5. c answers as a class. T checks and comments. III. Communication (5/IW/PW) Ex 6. Number the lines of the dialogue in the correct order. T asks Ss to do the task individually to number the lines of the dialogue. Ss work individually then check their answers with the whole class. T checks and comments. Ss practise saying the dialogue with their partners. IV. Project (10’) 1. Look at the film below. Think about the following questions. T asks Ss to read the film posters and point out what information should be included in a film poster. Then ask Ss to work in pairs/ groups to discuss the question in 1. Each Ss may make notes about the ideas from his/her partner or other group member. 2. Choose one of your favourite films and design a poster for it. Ask each ss to choose one of their favourite films, and design a poster for it. They may use the ideas from the notes for their task. Ss do it at home and display next time. III.WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) Finished! Finally, ask Ss to complete the self-assessment. Identify any difficulties and weak areas and provide further practice.

III. Communication Ex 6. Number the lines of the dialogue in the correct order. *Key: 1. E 2. I 3. A 4. D 5. F 6. B 7. G 8. C 9. H

IV. Project 1. Look at the film below. Think about the following questions. - What is the purpose of a film poster? E.g: To give information of a film.

*Summarize the main point of the lesson. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

228

2. Choose one of your favourite films and design a poster for it.

Finished! Now I can…

* Use words and phrases for different types of films. * distinguish the uses of –ed adjectives and –ing adjectives. Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 * use connectors: although, despite, in spite of, however, and nevertheless * talk about your favourite films * write a film review III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Do Project

Date of planning: Feb 7th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 15th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 15th ,2019 Period 72 REVISION UIT 7, 8 I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: use the lexical items related to the topic "Films", and “ Traffic’ - Language: used to + V; past simple tense 2. Skills: listening, writing, speaking, reading 3. Attitude and competencies: - Attitude: Ss have a positive attitude towards what they have learnt, have a positive towards watching films, obeying the traffic rules. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

229

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 7,8 - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book, cassette. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in doing the tasks required, so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE UNIT 7: TRAFFIC I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined. 1. A. car B. date C. lazy D. hate 2. A. train B. wait C. said D. paid 3. A. sailing B. railway C. brainstorm D. captain 4. A. safety B. chat C. taste D. waste 5. A. centre B. let C. belt D. security 6. A. safety B. traffic C. station D. plane 7. A. seat B. head C. heavy D. weather 8. A. head B. break C. bread D. heavy 9. A. maid B. wait C. said D. sail 10. A. hey B. grey C. honey D. obey II. Put the words into two groups (/e / and / ei /) safety way internet red ahead melody wait break lane bed III. Choose the best answer (A, B, C or D). 1. Cyclist and motorist have to wear a ___________ when they ride a motorbike. A. cap B. mask C. helmet D. hard that 2. He forgot to give a ___________ before he turned left and got a ticket. A. hand B. signal C. sign D. light 3. All of us have to obey ____________ strictly. A. traffic B. traffic rules C. traffic jam D. regular 4. We should wait for the traffic lights _____________ before we cross the street. A. turn yellow B. turn green C. to turn yellow D. to turn green 5. Drivers have to ___________ your seatbelt whenever they drive. A. tie B. fasten C. put on D. put 6. We should __________ the street at the zebra crossing. A. walk B. walk through C. walk on D. walk across 7. ___________ is it from your house to the nearest bus stop?” – “about 50 metres”. A. How much B. How long C. How far D. How often 8. Linh used to __________ jigsaw puzzles in his spare time. A. do B. does C. doing D. did 9. Public __________ in this city is quite good, and it’s not expensive. A. vehicle B. travel C. transport D. journey 10. I ____________ marbles when i was young, but now i didn’t. A. play B. used to play C. have played D. didn’t use to play Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 230

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

11. There ___________ a bus station in the city centre, but it has been moved to the suburbs. A. were B. used to have C. use to have D. used to be 12. ___________ does it take to go from ha noi to ho chi minh city by plane. A. How much B. How many C. How long D. How far 13. Minh used to ___________ his homework late in the evening. A. do B. does C. doing D. did 14. If people ___________ the rules, there are no more accidents. A. follow B. take care of C. obey D. remember 15. You should ___________ right and left when you go across the road. A. see B. look C. be D. take IV.Complete the sentences with “used to” or “didn’t use to”. 1. I ___________________ like sports, but now I do a lot of different sports. 2. I ___________________ be afraid of heights, but then I started climbing hills. 3. I ___________________ like putting my head in the water because I couldn’t swim. 4. I ___________________ go skating until I met Anna in Switzerland, and then we have practised a lot so far. 5. I ___________________ go to school on foot, but now I ride a bicycle to school. V. Make sentences using the words and phrases given. 1. Another problem/ the increase/ the number/ cars/ the road. ........................................................................................................................ 2. There/ transport rules/ but/ many people/ not seen/ really interested/ follow/ them. ........................................................................................................................ 3. The traffic/ worst/ rush hours/ when/ everyone/ try/ get to work/ get home quickly. ........................................................................................................................ 4. Some people/ ride/ motorbikes/ the pavements/ rather than/ waiting/ a traffic jam. ........................................................................................................................ 5. The traffic/ a nightmare/ visitors/ Viet Nam/ the first time. ........................................................................................................................ 6. More people/ own/ private cars/ it/ make/ the problem/ the traffic jams/ worse. ........................................................................................................................ 7. Pedestrians/ get injured/ hit easily/ when/ they/ walk/ the pavements/ cross the roads/ such times. ........................................................................................................................ 8. Road users/ very impatient/ quite aggressive/ constantly using their horns/ even shouting/ others. ........................................................................................................................ 9. Three or four people/ one motorbike/ a common sight/ particularly/ young people. ........................................................................................................................ 10. Some people/ install/ air horn/ their motorbikes/ this/ really annoying/ other people/ sometimes/ it cause/ accidents. ........................................................................................................................ VI. Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first. 1. Did you often go to the beach when you lived in Nha Trang? Did you use................................................................................................... ? 2. Linda doesn’t live with her parents any more. Linda used ...................................................................................................... 3. I don’t have time to collect stamps as when I was in primary school. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 231

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

I used.............................................................................................................. 4. He is not a poor man any more, but he becomes a rich businessman. He used .......................................................................................................... 5. They didn’t often go to the cinema every Sunday last year. They didn’t use............................................................................................... UNIT 8: FILMS I. Find the word which has a different sound in the part underlined 1. A. animation B. female C. pavement D. safety 2. A. sign B. critic C. illegal D. direct 3. A. filled B. wanted C. played D. opened 4. A. recommend B. seatbelt C. vehicle D. investigate 5. A. cooked B. talked C. booked D. naked 6. A. delivered B. clicked C. promised D. picked 7. A. needed B. developed C. wanted D. included 8. A. liked B. washed C. loved D. jumped 9. A. acting B. actor C. address D. action 10. A. comedy B. boring C. shocked D. long II. Put the words into three groups (/ d /, / id /and / t /) shocked looked moved needed laughed decided raised played watched volunteered appeared wanted fascinated stopped starred convinced interested washed III. Choose the best answer (A, B, C or D). 1. I was __________ to learn that the director of that gripping film has won the first prize. A. interest B. interests C. interested D. interesting 2. The film was so __________. However my father saw it from beginning to end. A. interesting B. exciting C. boring D. fascinating 3. We were __________ with the latest film of that director. A. satisfied B. satisfactory C. satisfying D. satisfy 4. We like the film very much. The __________ are unforgettable and the plot gripping. A. character B. acting C. style D. action 5. I have never felt as __________ as I did when I watched that horror film. A. terrify B. terrified C. terrifying D. terrible 6. Not many people went to see the film; __________ it received good reviews from critics. A. although B. but C. despite D. however 7. Let’s go to the Victor Cinema. I’m sure you’ll find the film __________. A. excites B. excite C. excited D. exciting 8. Last night, I didn’t go to bed early ___________ being very tired. A. because of B. although C. despite of D. in spite of 9. ____________ they spent a lot of money on the film, it wasn’t a big success. A. Nevertheless B. However C. When D. Although 10. Mr. Bean’s Holiday is a _____________ film – I was laughing from beginning to the end. A. moving B. scary C. violent D. hilarious 11. __________ careful preparation, we have a lot of difficulties in making a new film. A. Such B. However C. Despite D. With 12. A___________ is a film that shows real life events or stories. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 232

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

A. documentary B. thriller C. comedy D. action 13. I went to the cinema with my friends yesterday __________ feeling very tired. A. although B. So C. In spite of D. but 14. The end of the film was so _____________ that many people cried. A. boring B. shocking C. exciting D. moving 15. We didn’t find it funny __________ it was a comedy. A. but B. although C. despite D. in spite of 16. A ___________ is a film that tries to make audiences laugh. A. sci-fi B. documentary C. comedy D. horror 17. I enjoy the film on TV yesterday evening __________ nobody in my family liked it. A. so B. yet C. although D. in spite of 18. I found the book so ____________ that I couldn’t put it down. A. gripping B. shocking C. tiring D. boring 19. __________ he spent too much money on the film, it wasn’t a big success. A. But B. Even C. Despite D. although 20. We found the plot of the film__________. A. bored B. boring C. interested D. acting IV Complete the sentences, using although, despite, in spite of, however, or nevertheless. Sometimes, two answers are possible. 1. I think I did OK in my speech last night ______________ I’d had almost no sleep for 24 hours. 2. ______________ I heard the telephone ring, I didn’t answer it. 3. We enjoyed our holiday_________________ the rain. 4. _______________ he got top marks at high school, he never went to university. 5. ______________ there was no electricity, I was able to read because I had acandle. 6. She failed the test _______________ she studied hard. 7. _______________ difficulties, the firemen managed to save many people who were caught in the fire. 8. Everyone thought she would accept the offer. __________________, she turned it down. 9. Carol arrived at the meeting ______________ I asked her not to be there. 10. It looks like they’re going to succeed ______________ their present difficulties. 11. ______________ it was raining heavily, he went out without a raincoat. 12. My father is very busy. ______________ , he is always willing to give a hand with the housework. 13. The sky was grey and cloudy. ______________, we went to the beach. 14. Some English words have the same pronunciation ______________ they are spell differently, for example, dear and deer. 15. I was cold and wet ______________ .Bob put on his swimming suit and went to the beach. V.. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the adjectives in brackets. 1. I was very _______________ in the lesson because our teacher is very _______________ in history. (interest) 2. My friend is a very _______________ sort of person but he hates doing____ activities. (relax) 3. Studying for exams is very _______________ I get _______________ when I open my school books. (tire) 4. We were all very _______________ about the school trip but it wasn’t an Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 233

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

_______________ trip at all. (excite) 5. It’s a _______________ book and I’m _______________ every time I start reading it (bore) VI. Rewrite the sentences, using the words in the brackets. Change other words in the sentence if necessary. 1. The new restaurant looks good. It seems to have few customers. (however)...................................................................................................................... ? 2. We planned to visit Petronas in the afternoon. We could not afford the fee. (however) ........................................................................................................................ 3. Mary was sick. She didn’t leave the meeting until it ended. (despite) ....................................................................................................................... 4. We live in the same street. We rarely see each other. (in spite of) ........................................................................................................................ 5. I couldn’t sleep. I was tired. (in spite of) ........................................................................................................................ 6. They have little money. They are happy (despite) ........................................................................................................................ 7. My foot was hurt. I managed to walk to the nearest village. (although) ........................................................................................................................ 8. I’ve been too busy to answer by email. I’ll do it soon. (nevertheless) ........................................................................................................................ 9. We had planned to walk right round the lake. The heavy rain made this impossible. (although) ........................................................................................................................ 10. I got very wet in the rain. I had an umbrella. (although) ........................................................................................................................ V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................ Date of planning: Feb 11th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 18th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 18th ,2019 Period 73 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started (P.26-27) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘Festival around the world’ : continent (n), country (n), land mark (n). - Language : H/Wh- questions. Adverbial phrases. 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about Festival around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 234

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Know more about different festival around the world and eager to attend them. - Understand and actively respond to H/Wh- questions. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may know more information about other festival around the world - Collect more interesting information about these festival around the world IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (6’/IW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Brainstorming Lesson 1: Getting started (P.26-27) - Play games: Solve the crossword below. A. GETTING STARTED - Review the previous unit before Ss open their books by asking them to solve a crossword puzzle.

F C O M E S A C T H I M O V A T H R I L

T explains the word FESTIVAL and asks ss to call out some festivals in Vietnam and around the world they know.

I D C R L I C L

L Y A E A N T E

M R S R G I R

II. NEW LESSON 1.Listen and read (10’/IW/PW)

1. Listen and read

* Vocabulary: T uses some techniques to present some new words. Checking the understanding by making sentences with the new words. T plays the recording twice.

* Vocabulary: fascinating (aj) hấp dẫn amazing (aj) đáng ngạc nhiên religious (aj) thuộc tôn giáo firework (n) pháo hoa make a camp (v) cắm trại

Ss listen then practice the conversation. in pairs. T checks some pairs. * Practice: 1a. Answer the following questions. Ss work independently. T allows them to share answers before discussing as a class. T checks their answers, and gives explanation if necessary.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Y S E S I O U O N

* Practice: 1a. Answer the following questions. * Key: 1. No, she didn’t because she said “ Oh really?” to show her surprise. 2. People light candles and display/ let off fireworks. 3. It’s La Tomatina 4. Because to celebrate the festival people go to the desert, make a camp, 235

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

1b. Tick (v) T (true) or F (false). Ss read the conversation again to do this exercise. T asks for Ss’ answers as well as the explanation for their choices. T calls some ss to write the correct answer on the board. 2. Write the festivals in the box under the pictures. Then listen and repeat. (7’/IW) T tells Ss that in the box are some festivals. Ss do this activity in pairs. T plays the recording for Ss to listen, check and repeat their answers. T makes sure that Ss pronounce correctly the name of the festivals. Ss work independently. T allows them to share answer as before discussing as a class. -Ask Ss to support their answers. 3. Match the festivals below with the reasons they are held.(7’/PW) T explains to Ss that festivals are held for different reasons. T asks Ss if they know the meaning of these words. Seasonal (aj) relate to or happening a during a period in the year. Religious (aj) connected with religion or with a particular religion. Superstitious (aj) based on the belief that particular events happen in a way that cannot be explained by reason or science 4. Compare your answers with a partner. (7’/PW) Ss work with classmate and compare their answers. T reminds them to follow the model conversation in the box. Ss discuss in pairs to match. T checks and gives feedback . T practices saying the words with ss. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 and have a party. 5. They should write up reports and hand them in to the teacher. 1b. Tick (v) T (true) or F (false). * Key: 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T

2. Write the festivals in the box under the pictures. Then listen and repeat. * Key: 1. Water festival 2. Cannes Film Festival 3. Ghost Day 4. Tet 5. Rock in Rio 6. Christmas 7. Halloween 8. Easter

3. Match the festivals below with the reasons they are held. Key: Religious: Halloween, Ghost Day Music /Arts: Rock in Rio, Cannes Film Festival Seasonal: Tet, Water Festival Religious: Christmas, Easter

4. Compare your answers with a partner. Example: A: I think Rock in Rio and the Cannes Film Festival are music or arts festivals. B: I agree. A: Which do you think are seasonal festival? B: I think Christmas and Easter. How about you? A: I think Halloween and Ghost day. 236

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 III. WRAPPING-UP (6’) T organizes a competition game for this activity. T divides Ss into 2 big groups (eg: left side’ right side; boys’ girls). T gives Ss more questions in additions to those in the book. T counts the correct answers to find the winner group. Ss play the game in groups of four. T reminds them to record the correct answers from each group member to find the answer. *The person who has the most correct answers is winner. -Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Can you add more festivals to the groups in 3?

III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Practice listening more at home. - Review the lesson. - Do B1,2,3 /P17,18 - WB

Date of planning: Feb 14th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 21st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 21st ,2019 Period 74 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.28) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Types of festivals. - Language : Types of word - Pronunciation : stress in two- syllable words. 2. Skills: Listening, speaking and reading about festivals around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different festivals around the world. - Understand and actively respond to find the stress in two- syllable words. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 237

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not be able to identify the exception. - Explain carefully and Provide further practice. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/IW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD * Chatting Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.28) - T asks Ss some questions about festivals in *Chatting their home village. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary (15’/IW/PW) T uses some techniques to present some new words. Checking the understanding by making sentences with the new words.

I. Vocabulary Vocabulary celebratory (aj) mang tính kỷ niệm parade (n) cuộc diễu hành carnival (n) ngày hội joyful (aj) vui mừng adopt (v) kế tục pumpkin (n) quả bí ngô

1a. Can you complete the table below with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives? Listen and check your answers. T asks ss to kook at the table in the book and makes sure that they understand what to do. Ss work individually to complete the table and compare their answers with a partner. T calls some ss to write their answers on the board. T plays the recording for Ss to check their answers. T confirms the correct answers. T plays the recording again for ss to repeat. 1b. Now complete the following sentences with the words from the table. Have them read all the sentences and guess the part of speech of the word to be filled in each blank Ss can discuss in pairs to do the exercise. T comments on and confirms the correct

1a. Can you complete the table below with appropriate verbs, nouns and adjectives? Listen and check your answers. Key: 1. celebration 2. festive 3. parade 4. culture 5. performance

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

1b. Now complete the following sentences with the words from the table. Key: 1. festival 2. celebrate 3. celebrations 4. culture 5. parade 6. performers 238

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 answers. 2. In groups, choose a festival. Take turns to say the festival, then add an action. Ss work in groups to do the activity. They choose one activity and take turn to lengthen their sentences by adding the activities.

II. Pronunciation (20’/IW/PW) Stress in two syllable words T helps ss understand what a syllable is. T gives some examples of one-, two-, and three- syllables words. Ss find out more words they’ve learnt. T explains the rules:

T can give some examples to illustrate. Ss listen and repeat the words. 3.Listen and repeat the words. Then listen again and put them in the correct column according to their stress pattern.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. In groups, choose a festival. Take turns to say the festival, then add an action. Example: A; I am going to Rio Carnival to watch performers dance. B: I am going to Rio Carnival to watch performers dance, and musicians play samba music. … II. Pronunciation Stress in two syllable words Look out! In two-syllable words the mark’ represents the stress syllable. - Most nouns and adjs have two syllables: Stress falls on the first syllable. - Most verbs have two syllables: Stress falls on the second syllable. Exceptions: the sound / ə /, / i /,…. hardly falling on.

3.Listen and repeat the words. Then listen again and put them in the correct column according to their stress pattern. T plays the recording. Key: Ss listen and fill in the suitable column. Stress on 1st syllable: gather, picture, T checks and gives feedback. artist, T plays the recording again. lovely, famous Ss listen and repeat. Stress on 2nd syllable: relax, enjoy, hotel, describe, rename. 4. Circle the word with a different stress 4. Circle the word with a different pattern from the others. Then listen and stress pattern from the others. Then check. listen and check. T asks Ss to circle the words individually, then Key: compare their answer in pairs. 1. balloon 2. complete 3. prepare Ss work then compare. 4. alone 5. tidy T calls some ss to write on the board. T plays the recording several times. Ss listen and repeat the words. T confirms the correct answers T calls some ss to read the words again. 5. Read the following sentences and mark 5. Read the following sentences and Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 239

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

‘’’ the stressed syllable in the underlined words. Ss do this exercise individually first then compare their answers with a partner. T calls some ss to write on the board. T plays the recording and stops after each underlined word for ss to check their answers Ss listen and repeat the words. T calls some ss to read the sentences out loud again.

mark ‘’’ the stressed syllable in the underlined words. * Key: 1. ‘project 2. ‘dancers 3. a‘ttend 4. ‘answer 5. ‘music

III. WRAPPING-UP (4’) T asks ss about the lexical and grammatical they’ve learnt in the lesson. -Summarize the main points of the lesson IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sound more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2/P.17- W.B

V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ........................................... Date of planning: Feb 14th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 22nd,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 22nd ,2019 Period 75 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.29-30) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Festival activities. - Language: Adverbial phrases. H/Wh – questions: Review Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

240

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about festivals in Vietnam and around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: Know how to share their experiences about festivals in Vietnam and around the world with their friends. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in the lesson . - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, recording T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - There are too many activities. - Guide ss carefully then let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Chatting: T chats with Ss about festivals in Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.29-30) the pictures. Ask Ss to look at the pictures and think of the information they want to get about the festival. II. NEW LESSON I. Grammar (10’/IW) 1. Adverbial phrases. - T explains and gives examples: +Adverbial phrases made with nouns: Eg: every year, every day, last year…. +Adverbial phrases made with prepositions: Eg: in 2013, in a small town, with beautiful plants. +Adverbial phrases made with to- infinitive: Eg: to enjoy the party, to have more friends. Ss look at the second part of the table to understand more about the different types of adverbial phrases. Ss work in pairs to write down three sentences with three different adverbial phrases then read the sentences aloud. T comments.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I.Grammar 1. Adverbial phrases. Look out! An adverbial phrase gives extra information about the time, place, manner, etc. of an action. Adverbial phrases are made with nouns, prepositions or infinitives. They can be used to answer different questions. Type/ question: When time Where place How often frequency Why reason How manner What thing

241

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 II.Practice: (23’/IW/PW) 2. Now look at the webpage. Complete the table about the festival. T tells Ss that they are going to read information about the Cannes Film Festival and complete the table.. -Ss work individually then compare their answers. - T calls 2 ss to write their answers on the table. - T and other ss comment -T confirms the correct answers. 3. Now think about the festival you know in Viet Nam. Complete the table with information about that festival, then tell your partner about it. T T asks ss to think about a festival they know in VietNam. Ss do exercise individually to ill the table with al the information about that festival, and then compare their answers with a classmate. T has some ss present their table to the whole class and give short talk about the festival. 2.H/Wh- questions : review. 4. Join the questions to the types of answers. Ss do exercise individually, and then compare their answers with a classmate. T checks Ss’ answers and confirm the correct ones. 5. Phuong is doing an interview for VTV. Can you match her questions with the interviewee’s answers? Ss do this activity in pairs. Check Ss’ answers and have them role play the conversation. T asks some pairs to act out the conversation 6. Now make questions for the underlined parts. Ss work independently, writing down the questions. T can call on some Ss to write their answers Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 II.Practice: 2. Now look at the webpage. Complete the table about the festival. Key: What? A film festival Who? By film star, Where? In a city in France When? May How often? Every year How? In a very serious way Why? To win the Palme d’Or 3. Now think about the festival you know in Viet Nam. Complete the table with information about that festival, then tell your partner about it.

2.H/Wh- questions : review. 4. Join the questions to the types of answers. Key: Who person Why reason Which whole sentence …… 5. Phuong is doing an interview for VTV. Can you match her questions with the interviewee’s answers?

6. Now make questions for the underlined parts. Key: 1.Where did you buy this T- shirt? 2. How often do you go to the music 242

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

on the boards. Other Ss give comments and T give corrections.

festival? 3. Why did your friends save money? 4. When did you go to the Flower Festival in Da Lat?

III. WRAPPING-UP (5’) Ss work in groups. One student thinks of any festival he/she likes. Other Ss ask questions about the festival to find out what festival it is. Remember to use H/Wh-questions and adverbial phrases. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. Summarize the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

7. Games. Example: A: Where is the festival held? B: In the USA and some other countries in the world. C: When do people celebrate it? ………… III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do part B4,5,6/ P.19-20- W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Feb 18th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 25th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 25th ,2019 Period 76 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 4: Communication (P.31) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words: thanksgiving (n),stuffing (n) feast: (n) gravy: (n) ,cranberry: (n) - Language: Adverbial phrases Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 243

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

H/Wh- questions 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about festival in Vietnam and around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love festivals, keep them beautiful, meaningful and introduce them to their friends. - Understand and actively respond to questions about the festival in Vietnam and around the world. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough knowledge about some festivals - T prepares some information about famous festival by using the Internet. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD * Game ; Who is faster ? Lesson 4: Communication (P.31) - T shows some pictures of some common festivals in Vietnam like Choi Trau, Hoi Lim, ect.. and ask ss to raise their hand to take turn to answer. Ss work individually to play the game.

II. NEW LESSON I.Vocab: (5’/IW) - Pre- teach vocabulary. - First, teacher uses some techniques to present new words. Then have Ss read the new vocabulary after the teacher. Check the understanding: Make sentences with the new words. II.Practice : 1. Look at the animal below. Discuss the following questions with a partner. (8’/IW) - Ss look at the picture and discuss the questions in pairs. -T checks……………..

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

* Game ; Who is faster ? Picture 1 : Choi Trau Picture 2: Hoi Mua Picture 3 : Hoi Lim Picture 4 : Lunar New Year Picture 5: Christmas Picture 6 : Thanksgiving I.Vocab: thanksgiving: (n) lễ tạ ơn chúa stuffing: (n) lông vũ, gối ôm feast: (n) bữa tiệc gravy: (n) nước sốt thịt cranberry: (n) quả man việt quất II.Practice : 1. Look at the animal below. Discuss the following questions with a partner.

244

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 2. Now listen and check your answers. (8’/IW) T plays the recording. Ss listen carefully and check their answer to 1. Then T gives the correct answers

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. Now listen and check your answers. Key: a. A turkey b. It’s one of the traditional foods of important festival. c. Thanksgiving

3. In pairs, write true (T) or false (F) for the following sentence. Then listen again and check. (10’/PW) Ss work in pairs to decide if the statements are true or false. T calls some ss to write their answers on the board. T plays the recording again for ss to check. Ss compare their answers and correct the false ones.

3. In pairs, write true (T) or false (F) for the following sentence. Then listen again and check. Key: 1. F ( It’s also held in Canada) 2. F ( It’s celebrated on the fourth Thursday of November and in Canada it’s celebrated on the second Monday of October. 3. T 4. F ( Children also take part in food preparation.) 5. T 6. F ( Some people like to go for a walk or takes naps) 7. F III. WRAPPING-UP (7’/IW) 4. Work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the 4. Work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. Ask and answer about Thanksgiving other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. Ask and answer about Thanksgiving and and Hoi Mua, a harvest festival in Phu Yen. Hoi Mua, a harvest festival in Phu Yen. Ss work in pairs. Imagine that one of them is a student from the US and the other is from Phu Yen, Viet Nam. T explains that only the Ss from Viet Nam read the information on page 35. T calls some pairs to act out the conversations in class. Other ss listen and give comments *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) III. HOMEWORK - T assigns the homework. -Learn the new words. - Do C1,2 /P.21- W.B. - Ss copy their homework. -Review the lesson. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

245

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Date of planning: Feb 21st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Feb 28th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Feb 28th ,2019 Period 77 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.32-33) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

246

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Read, write and understand the words: greasy (aj), pole (n),cannon (n),jet (n) ,chaos (n),goggle (v) - Language: Adverbial phrases H/Wh- questions 2. Skills: Reading about the La Tomatina festival in Spain and speaking about two unusual festivals around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love festivals, keep them beautiful, meaningful and introduce them to their friends. - Understand and actively respond to questions about the La Tomatina festival in Spain and speaking about two unusual festivals around the world. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to talk about festival - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (5’/IW) *Chatting Teacher asks ss to call out the name of the festivals in Vietnam and around the world they’ve learnt. Ss aswer the questions individually. II. NEW LESSON I.READING (15’/IW/PW) 1. In pairs look at the pictures below. They are all from the La Tomatina festival in Spain. Put them in the order you think they happen at the festival. T asks ss to work in pairs, look at the picture below. T: They are all from the La Tomatina festival in Spain. Put them in the order you think they happen at the festival. Ss work in pairs to discuss. T presents some new words.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Contents and Board Display UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.32-33)

I. READING 1. In pairs look at the pictures below. They are all from the La Tomatina festival in Spain. Put them in the order you think they happen at the festival.

* Vocabulary greasy (aj) vấy mỡ, dính mỡ pole (n) cái cột cannon (n) súng jet (n) vòi phun nước Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 247

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

2. Now quickly read the texts below and check your answers. Ss read the text quickly and check the answers. T confirms the correct answers. 3. Read the text again and answer the following questions. Ss read the text again and answer the questions in pairs: Ss can underline parts of the text that help them with the answers. T calls some pairs to ask and answer the questions as the whole class.

II. SPEAKING (15’/PW/ GW) 4.Work in groups. Look at the newspaper headlines about two unusual festivals around the world. Discuss what you think is unusual about them. Ss work in groups and read the newspaper headlines. They discuss what is unusual about the festivals. Have some Ss present their group’s ideas. 5. Choose one festival to teach your group about. Read the information about your festival. Plant what you will say. T tells Ss that the table includes information about the two festivals in 4. Ss work in groups and prepare a short presentation about the festival they like.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 chaos (n) sự lôn xộn goggle (v) gương mắt, trợn tròn mắt 2. Now quickly read the texts below and check your answers. *Key: C–D –A-B 3. Read the text again and answer the following questions. * Key: 1. It is celebrated on the last Wednesday every August. 2. He stayed up late 3. They placed a ham on top of greasy pole. 4. They had to wear goggles to protect their eyes. 5. It was a jet from water cannon. 6. It was red with rivers of tomato juice. II. SPEAKING 4.Work in groups. Look at the newspaper headlines about two unusual festivals around the world. Discuss what you think is unusual about them.

5. Choose one festival to teach your group about. Read the information about your festival. Plant what you will say. Suggestion questions: 1. What do they often do at Season festival? 2. Where do they organize activities? 3. When does the festival take place? ……

* Presentation: III. WRAPPING-UP (8’/IW) * Presentation: T calls one st from group A to present about the Cheese – rolling festival and one st from group B to present about the Monkey festival. T and other ss listen and make more Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

248

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 questions about the two festivals. T gives comments. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2,3/P.22,23– W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Feb 25th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 1st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 1st ,2019 Period 78 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.33) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng 249

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Vocabulary : Types of festival and festival activities. - Language: Adverbial phrases H/Wh- questions 2. Skills: Listen to get information about the Isle of Wright festival. Write a short paragraph about the festival they attended. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love festivals, keep them beautiful, meaningful and introduce them to their friends. - Understand and actively respond to questions about the Isle of Wright festival - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Ss may get confused in writing. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/GW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD *Brainstorming Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.33) *Brainstorming - Look at the pictures below. What kind of festival do you think it is? Share your ideas with a partner. II. NEW LESSON I. LISTENING(20’/IW/PW) 2. Listen to Nick talk about a music festival he attended. Tick (V) T (true) or F (false). Correct the false sentences. Ss read the statements in exercise 2 and guess if they are true or false. T calls some ss to write the guesses on the board. T plays the recording one or two times. Ss listen carefully and check their guesses. T confirms the correct answers. 3. Now listen and answer the questions. T asks Ss to work in pairs to answer the questions without listening. T calls some pairs to act out before class. T plays the recording again for ss to check their answers. T checks and gives comments.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. LISTENING 2. Listen to Nick talk about a music festival he attended. Tick (V) T (true) or F (false). Correct the false sentences. * Key. 1. F ( one of the most famous festivals) 2. T 3. F ( They stayed in a tent) 4. F ( He’s Nick’s father’s favorite singer)

3. Now listen and answer the questions. * Key. 1. It takes place every June. 2. They are music bands. 3. He interested the audience with the hit song.

250

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

II. Writing.(15’/IW) 4. Think about a festival you attended. Make notes about it below. Think of a festival they attended and make notes about it. - What was the festival? - Who celebrated it? - Where was it held? - When was it held? - How was it held? - Why was it held? 5. Write a paragraph about the festival you attended .Use the notes above. Ss write a paragraph individually based on the notes they have made. T can ask one or two Ss to write the paragraph on the board. Other Ss and teacher comment on the paragraphs. III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 4. They also went to the Bohemian Woods. 5. They enjoyed a mixed of good music from around the world. II. Writing. 4. Think about a festival you attended. Make notes about it below. * Suggestions. It was a cock fighting festival. It was held in the common house’s yard in my village. It was held on January 15th ( Lunar New Year) …….. 5. Write a paragraph about the festival you attended. Use the notes above. Ss can start like this. Last week I attended a festival. It was called “ Harvest festival” It was held by farmers in my village. …

* HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.24 – W.B. -Review the lesson.

V. Feedback :

Date of planning: Feb 28th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 4th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 4th ,2019 Period 79 UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.34-35) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review - Language: Review Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

251

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about festivals around the world. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love festival, keep them beautiful, meaningful and introduce them to their friends. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 9. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURES: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (3’/IW) UNIT 9. FESTIVALS AROUND THE WORLD Teacher asks ss about their famous Lesson 7: Looking back and Project festivals during the Lunar New Year. (P.34-35) II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary: (5’/IW/PW) 1. Rearrange the letters to make reasons for holding festival. Then match them to the pictures of the festivals. Ss work individually to do exercises. T asks Ss to compare their answer with their partner T asks Ss to go to the black board to write the answers. Gives the answers 2. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets. Ss do this activity individually then compare their answer with a partner. T confirms the correct answer.

I. Vocabulary: 1. Rearrange the letters to make reasons for holding festival. Then match them to the pictures of the festivals. *Key: 1. religious ( Christmas) 2. music ( Glastonbury) 3. superstitious ( Day of the Dead) 4. seasonal ( Thanksgiving)

2. Complete the sentences with the correct form of the words in brackets. * Key: 1. cultural 2. parade 3. celebratory 4. festive 5. performance 6. celebration II. Grammar (15’/IW/PW) II. Grammar 3. Complete each question with a 3. Complete each question with a suitable suitable H/Wh- question word. More H/Wh- question word. More than one than one question word may be accepted. question word may be accepted. Ss do this exercise individually. Key: T checks their answers an accepts all the 1. What Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

252

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 answers if they make sense.

4. Make your own sentences with the adverbial phrases from the box. Ss make up their own sentences with the adverbial phrases in the box. Have two Ss write their sentences on the board. T goes around and observes and take notes of Ss’ mistakes. Other Ss comment on the sentences on the board. III. Communication (7’/PW) 5. Role-play in pairs. Student A is a reporter. Student B is a secondary school student. Continue the conversation below. Ss work in pairs to role-play. They ask and answer about their favorite festival. T asks some pairs to act out the role-play. Other Ss comment and vote for the best conversation. Finish! Now I can…

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. Where 3. How 4. Which 5. Where/ When / How / Why 6. When 4. Make your own sentences with the adverbial phrases from the box. 1. My father went to Ho Chi Minh city last week. 2. 3. 4. 5. III. Communication 5. Role-play in pairs. Student A is a reporter. Student B is a secondary school student. Continue the conversation below. Reporter: I’m a reporter from Culture Magazine. Can I ask you some questions about your favorite festivals? Student: Yes, of course. I like……….best. Reporter: Where’s the festival held? Finish! Now I can… Talk about the festival….

IV. Project IV. Project (10’) A NEW FESTIVAL A NEW FESTIVAL Ss work in groups of three or four to think • What? of a new festival that they would like to • Who? have.Complete the following table with • Where? all information about this festival. • When? Draw pictures of this festival or cut • How often? relevant pictures from magazines. • Why? - Ss can do the project as homework. • How? - Teacher guides and sets this activity as homework. III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback : Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Do Project

253

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Date of planning: Mar 1st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 7th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 7th ,2019 Period 80 REVIEW I.OBJECTTIVE By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: -Vocabulary: revise vocabulay from Unit 7, 8, 9. - Language: all grammar parts from Unit 7, 8, 9. 2. Skills: integrated skills. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love festival, keep them beautiful, meaningful and introduce them to their friends. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

254

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 9. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV.PROCEDURES I. Phonetics: A. Pick out the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently from that of the other words (0,5p): 1. A. centre B. ahead C. break D. enter B. played C. cooked D. stopped 2. A. watched B. Choose the word that has different stress pattern (0,5p): 1. A. cannon B. culture C. picture D. perform 2. A. seasonal B. documentary C. animation D.celebration II. Grammar and vocabulary: A. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence (2ps): 1. Don’t eat too much ……............…….. It’s not good for your teeth. A. vegetables B. fruit C. rice D. candy 2. ..........noodles for dinner last night? A. Did you eat B. Were you eat C. Did you ate D. Do you eat 3. What is your …………, Lan? – I’m 45 kilos. A. weight B. weigh C. age D. height 4. Last week, Mr. Tan…................. to Ho Chi Minh City for a trip. A. go B. went C. going D. goes 5. Are you interested …................ taking care ………… yourself? A. on/of B. of/ in C. in/ of D.in/ on 6. Peter went to the doctor last Sunday …………… he had a bad cold. A. because B. so C. but D. and 7. ………………. the film was very interesting, he slept from the beginning. A. because B. although C. however D. despite 8. When Trung was a child, he used to ……………… swimming. A. go B. went C. going D. goes B. Choose the words or phrase that are not correct and then correct in good English (1p): 1. He used toeating too much candy so he had a toothache. …..………………… A B C D. 2. He didn’twent to school yesterday because he had a stomachache. ………… A B C D 3. Despite he tried his best, he didn’t winthe first prize. ………… A B C D 4. He willvisit Cat Ba Island next vacation; however I will travelled to Da Lat. ……… A B C D Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

255

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

C. Supply the correct tense or form of the verb in the brackets (1,5ps): 1. Nam ( watch ) ….................………….. TV last night. 2. My sister (buy)………....................………….a new shirt two days ago. 3. Mai’s mother is clever . She usually (make)…………..................……..lovely things. 4. (you / buy) ……...........................…............…..a new bike yesterday?. 5. We used to (play) …………......................……soccer with him. 6. We ( not come)..........................................to the meeting tomorrow. D. Give the correct form of the words in brackets (0,5p): 1. We need to know your ........................................., Minh. ( HIGH ) 2. People …………………… the La Tomatina every year. ( CELEBRATION) III. Reading: Read the following passage, then answer the questions (2p): Yesterday was Sunday, Nam got up at six. He did morning exercises. He took a shower, combed his hair, and then he had breakfast with his parents. Nam ate a bowl of noodles and drank a glass of milk for his breakfast. After breakfast, he helped Mom clean the table. After that, he brushed his teeth, put on clean clothes, and went to his grandparents' house. He had lunch with his grandparents. He returned to his house at three o’clock. He did his homework. He ate dinner at 6.30. After dinner, his parents took him to the movie theater. It was a very interesting film. They came back home at 9.30. Nam went to bed at ten o'clock. 1. What day was yesterday? ……………………………………………………………… 2. What time did Nam get up? …………………………………………………………… 3. Who did Nam have breakfast with? …………………………………………………… 4. What did he do after breakfast? ……………………………………………………….. 5. Who did he have lunch with? ………………………………………………………….. 6. What time did he have dinner? ………………………………………………………… 7. What did he do after dinner? …………………………………………………………… 8. What time did Nam go to bed ? ………………………………………………………… IV. Write: (2ps): A. Write the complete sentences, using the words given: (0,5p) 1. How tall are you? What ……………………………….…..................................…..…………….? 4. Don’t forget to brush your teeth after meals. Remember............................................................................................................. B. Write a short paragraph by using the word cues. (1,5 pts) Yesterday, Hoa / have / a medical check -up. First / she / fill in / the medical record . The nurse / take / her / the doctor’s office. The doctor / ask / her / a few / questions. Then / she weigh/ Hoa and measure/ her height. After that/ she take / Hoa’s temperature. Everything / be /normal. Yesterday, Hoa had a medical check –up.………………………………………………… ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

256

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ........................................ Answer key I. Phonetics: A. Pick out the word whose underlined and bold part is pronounced differently from that of the other words (0,5p): 1 2 C B B. Choose the word that has different stress pattern (0,5p): 1 2 D A II. Grammar and vocabulary: A. Choose the word or phrase that best completes the sentence (2ps): 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 D A A B C A B A B. Choose the words or phrase that are not correct and then correct in good English (1p): 1. B -> eat 2. B -> go 3. A -> Although 4. D -> travel C. Supply the correct tense or form of the verb in the brackets (1,5p): 1. watched 2. bought 3. makes 4. Did you buy 5. Play 6. won’t come D. Give the correct form of the words in brackets (0,5p): 1. height 2. celebrate III. Reading:(2ps) 1. Yesterday was Sunday. 2. Nam got up at six. 3. He had breakfast with his parents. 4. After breakfast, he helped Mom clean the table. 5. He had lunch with his grandparents. 6. He ate dinner at 6.30. 7. After dinner, his parents took him to the movie theater. 8. Nam went to bed at ten o'clock. IV. Write(2ps): A. Write the complete sentences, using the words given: (0,5p) 1. What is your height? 2. Remember to brush your teeth after meals. B. Write a short paragraph by using the word cues. (1,5 pts) Yesterday, Hoa had a medical check -up. First she filled in the medical record . The nurse took her to the doctor’s office. The doctor asked her a few questions. Then she weighed Hoa and measured her height. After that she took Hoa’s temperature. Everything was normal.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

257

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Date of planning: Mar 1st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 8th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 8th ,2019 Period 81

Written TEST 45’( No 3) I. Objectives: Students will be able to: 1. Phonetics: Ex1: Recognize and distinguish the different sound of the consonants or vowels of the words in the groups ( 5 items) + the consonants: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

258

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

+ the vowels 2. Listening: Ex2: Listen and fill in the gaps ( 6 items) + Adj : 1 items + Noun: 5 items Ex3:T/ F statements. ( 4 items) + T : 2 item + F : 2 items 3. Language focus: Ex4: Choose the best word or phrases of words to complete the sentences. (8 items) + Verb form: 2 items + Prepositions : 1 item + Conjunction : 1item +The present perfect tense: 2 items + Comparative : 1 item + Vocabulary :1 item 4. Reading: Ex5:Read the story (The lost shoe) and answer the questions( 5 items) + Wh – questions :4 items + Yes/no questions: 1 item Ex6 : Read then tick (T) for true sentences and (F) for false sentences (4 items) + T: 3 items + F : 1 item 5. Writing: ( 10 items) Ex7: Use the cue words to write the sentences.(4items) + The simple past: 1 item + The simple future : 1 item + The present perfect: 1item + superlative : 1 item Ex8:Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first(6 items).

II. Matrix:

Listening

Phonetics

Recognition

Comprehension

Application

5 items

1pts

1pt 4 items

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Total

TN 10 items 2 pts 4 items

259

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1 pt Language

1 pt

8items

8 items

2 pts

focus the correct

4 items

form

1 pt

1 pt 4 items

Reading

4 items

1pts

1pt

Writing

Total

8 items 2pts 4 items

4 items

2 pts

2 pts 38 items

9 items

12items

4 items

9 items

4 items

2 pts

3 pts

1 pts

2,pts

2 pts

III. Content:

WRITTEN TEST

Kien thuy people comitee DuLe Junior Secondary School

Name…………………..class 7…... The 81st period Date of test 8./3/19 Mark

English 7 –The Test No3

The remark of teacher

PART 1: LISTENING

I. Listen to the passage and tick (V) true ( T ) or false (F) ( 1point) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

260

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

10pts

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 T

Non-renewable sources are being used up. 1 Many poor people in developing countries have little electricity. 2 Biogas is a new source of energy available for poor people 3 Biogas creates a lot of smoke. 4 The new energy source is not costly. 5 II. Listen to the passage again and complete the sentences. (1 point) 1. People in ____________________ areas have to gather wood to use as fuel. 2. Biogas is mainly used for ____________________. 3. Biogas helps solve the problem of indoor ____________________. 4. The use of renewable energy sources in developing countries is ________________. 5. In the future, the ________ will be used as the main environmentally friendly energy sources.

PART 2: PHONETICS Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from the others. ( Chọn 1 từ có phần gạch chân được phát âm khác so với các từ còn lại ) (1 points) 1. A. energy B. flying C. chemistry D. technology. 2. A. naked B. cooked C. booked D. walked 3. A. ways B. days C. says D. stays B. key C. grey D. survey 4. A. obey

PART 3 : VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

I.Choose the correct answer to complete each following sentences. (2 points) 1.Nam used to ________ morning exercise when he got up early. A. did B. does C. doing D. do 2. My father __________the bus to work every day, but I cycle. A. catches B. drives C. goes D. runs 3. I go to school __________ bike. A. by B. on C. in D. from 4. She’s sure that they will find the film_________. A. entertaining B. entertain C. entertainment D. entertained 5. __________ the story of the film was good, I didn’t like the acting. A. Because B. Since C. As D. Although 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7.The boys _______ home for lunch because they are planning to visit the hydro power station. A. have not come B. do not come C. will not be coming D. is not coming 8.They ___________ that we have gone without telling them. A. thought B. are thinking C. will be thinking D. think II. Put the correct form of the verb in brackets. (1 points) 1.Nam often ( play) ________________________ soccer in the afternoon. 2.My father used to (go) _____________________swimming when he was a child. 3. By 2020, people in Viet Nam (spend) _____________________ a lot of money on heating. 4. At 5 o’clock tomorrow Nam ( play) ____________________football with his friends. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

261

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

PART 4: READING I. Read the text and choose the best answers. (1 points) SAFETY TIPS FOR BUS PASSENGERS Always maintain a queue while waiting (1)______ a bus. Never stand on queue on the middle of the road. At the time of boarding a bus do not try to run or chase the bus. Once you are inside the bus, (2)______ a seat and hold firmly on the handrail if you are standing. Never try to (3)______ an overcrowded bus. Avoid (4)______ inside of a bus because your high-pitch noise may distract the attention of the driver and it could lead to a major road accident. 1.A.for B.to C.on D.in 2.A.hold B.sit C.take D.find 3.A.choose B.go C.wait D.board 4.A.shout B.shouting C.to shout D.shouts Answers: 2. ……………………… 1. ……………………… 3. ……………………… 4. ……………………… II: Read the passage and answer the questions. (1 points) Titanic is a romantic film, which was directed by James Cameron. However, it’s also about a disaster. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Bukater. Jack saves Rose from killing herself during the journey on board the ship. Although they are from different social classes, and Rose is already engaged, they fall in love. The film has a sad ending: the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack. Critics say it is a must-see. I agree because the story is moving and the acting is excellent. The special effects, visuals and music are also incredible. 1. What kind of film is Titanic? ………………………………………………………………….……………… 2. Who does Titanic star? …………………………………………………………………………….…… 3. What is Titanic about? …………………………………………………………………………….…… 4. How is the ending of Titanic? ………………………………………………………………………….………

PART 5: WRITING

Question : Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. ( 2 points) 1. The distance from Ha Noi to Thanh Hoa City is about 100 kilometres. It is about…………………................................................................................. 2. Although Quang Hai -footballer is so young , he plays football beautifully. Despite ...................................................................................................................... 3.My father lived in small village when he was a child. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 262

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

My father used to …………………………………………..………………..…….. 4. What is the distance between Thanh Hoa and Ha Noi city? How far……………………………………………………………………….….? The end

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

263

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 4th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 11th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 11th ,2019

Period 82 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 1: Getting Started (P. 38) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: lexical items related to the topic “sources of energy” - Language: extend and practice vocabulary related to the topic" sources of energy”, listen and read a conversation between Mai and Nam about sources of energy and ask and answer questions about renewable and non-renewable resources. 2. Skills: listening, reading. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy, - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book, cassette. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in reading the conversation about the topic energy to do the tasks required, so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES I. WARM UP. Chatting Date of the unit on the board and asks ss if they know about the footprint ( What is it about , UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY why it is well known , how it can be Lesson 1: Getting Started (P. 38) reduced) - Introduces the relationship between the footprint and sources of energy Sources of energy - Uses the pictures in textbook to introduce the new lesson. II. NEW LESSON. 1. Vocabulary. 1. 1. Vocabulary. - T uses some techniques to introduce new words. - T guides Ss to read and calls on some to repeat in chorus and individually - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Vocabulary. footprint (n) dấu chân carbon (n) giấy than energy (n) năng lượng source (n) nguồn renewable # non-renewable(adj) phục hồi, làm làm mới solar (adj) thuộc mặt trời panel (n) tấm, bảng hydro (adj) thuộc về nước 264

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 nuclear coal (n) biogas (n)

1. 2. Set the scene. ( 2’ – Whole class) - T asks Ss to look at the picture on page 6 and asks: + How many people are there? Who are they? + What are they doing? - Ss give their answers. 2. Listen and read. 2. 1. Listen and read. - T asks Ss to look at the dialogue. - T plays the tape twice for Ss to listen. - Ss work in pairs to read the dialogue. - T calls some pairs to read. - Other Ss listen and give comments. - T checks and gives comments. a. Answer the questions. - T asks Ss to read the questions. - Ss work in pairs to find the answers. - T calls some pairs to ask and answers. - Other Ss listen and give comments. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy.

b. Complete the network. - Asks ss to look at the network that includes two types of energy: renewable sources and non-renewable ones. -Has ss read the conversation individually again and find the words/ phrases that can be put in the network - Corrects the answers as a class - Has some ss practise reading aloud the words table 2. 2. Listen and repeat the words and phrases. (3’ - IW) - Has ss look at the table, listen and repeat the words then ask some ss to read aloud Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

(adj) thuộc hạt nhân than đá khí sinh học

II. Listen and read. 1. Listen and read.

a. Answer the questions. 1.It is about the negative effects we have on the environment 2. It means that it will run out if we use it 3. Sunlight is a renewable energy because we can't use it all up or it will last forever 4.Mai thinks she has a small carbon footprint because she recycles the products she uses and she goes everywhere by bike. 5.The products we use that are bad for the environment or the energy we use that produces carbon dioxide might create a big footprint. c. Complete the network. Renewable sources: wind, coal, hydro, nuclear Non- renewable: natural gas, biogas, oil, solar

2. Listen and repeat the words and phrases.

265

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 the words/ phrases - Corrects the pronunciation if necessary - Lets ss add more words/phrases to the table if necessary. 2. 3. Put the words into the correct groups. - Has ss work in pairs to look at the table and discuss the meaning of the words / phrases. Then has ss write the words / phrases in two columns - Ss may add more words/phrases to the table. -Gives feedback and confirm the correct answers III. WRAPPING UP. -Asks ss to work in groups to ask and answer the questions about renewable and non-renewable sources - Lets ss use the suggested questions and an-swers in the example and the words/phrases in 2,3 - Asks ss to write the information in their notebooks - T checks and gives comments. - T sums up the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK. (2’ – Whole class)

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

3. Put the words into the correct groups.

4. Asks Ss to ask and answer the questions about renewable and nonrenewable re-sources(10')

IV. Homework - Do exercise A2 (p.3), B3, 5 (P.4, 5) (Workbook). - Learn by heart all new words.

V. FEEDBACK: .......................................................................................................................................... .......................................................................................................................................... …………………………………………………………………………………………… …

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

266

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 7th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 14th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 14th ,2019

Period 83 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P. 40) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources. - Language: stress in three-syllable words. 2. Skills: listening, speaking. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book, cassette. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in pronouncing the words, so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES Date I. WARM UP. - Asks ss to take part in the game into two teams UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY - Ss in each team take turn to go to the board Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P. 40) and write the words to complete the network. - The team which writes more and correct words in 2 minutes is the winner. ? What are the advantages and disadvantages of energy sources? - T checks and gives comments - T leads to the new lesson. II. NEW LESSON. I. Vocabulary. 1. Vocabulary. 1. Vocabulary. - limited# unlimited(adj): hạn chế/ 1. 1. Vocabulary. không hạn chế - T uses some techniques to introduce new -exhaustible (adj): có thể cạn kiệt -abundant (adj): phong phú words. - T guides Ss to read and calls on some to -available (adj): repeat in chorus and individually - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 2. Put the words below into the table 1. 2. Put the words below into the table to to describe the types of energy -Key: describe the types of energy Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

267

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - Runs through the words. - Asks ss to work individually to divide the words into two groups : words to describe the advantages and those describing the advantages of energy sources - Checks and confirms the correct answers as a class

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Sources of energy wind powe water power solar energy biogas

nuclear energy coal, oil, natural gas 1. 3. Compare your answers with a partner. 2. - Asks ss to read the example in which ss share their ideas about types of energy sources and their advantages / disadvantages - Has ss look at the table in 1 and share their ideas in pairs - Has some pairs share their ideas as a class - Checks and confirms the correct answers 1. 4. Complete these sentences. - T asks Ss to look at the pictures and complete the sentences. - T calls some Ss to read. - T checks and gives comments. 2. Pronunciation. /e/ and /ei/ 2. 1. Listen and repeat. - T asks Ss to look at the words. - T plays the tape twice for Ss to listen and repeat. - T calls some Ss to read aloud. - T checks and gives comments.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Advan age(s)

Disadvantage (s)

abundant, unlimited clean and safe

not available

renewable, plentiful, clean and safe renewable, plentiful, available, clean and safe renewable abundant

expensive, not available expensive

abundant, cheap

expensive, dangerous harmful, exhaustible, polluting

3. Compare your answers with a partner

4. Complete these sentences. 1. Solar- clean/ safe 2. non-renewable 3. Wind- clean 4. expensive- dangerous II. Pronunciation. 1. Listen and repeat. Which words are stressed on the first syllable and which ones are stressed on the second syllable? Put them in the appropriate columns 268

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

2. 2. Read the following sentences and mark the stressed syllable in the Underlined words. Then listen, check and repeat. Has ss read the sentences and mark the stressed syllable in the underlined words. - Lets ss refer to the words in 4 if necessary. - Asks ss to listen to the sentences again, check their answers and say aloud the sentences as a class - Calls on some ss to write the words on the board - Checks and confirms the correct answers III. WRAPPING UP. Find the words. - T sums up the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK(2’ – Whole class)

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Ooo oOo dangerous expensive plentiful abundant limited convenient easily enormous energy advantage 2. Read the following sentences and mark the stressed syllable in the underlined words. Then listen , check and repeat. 1. a'nother re'newable 2.con'venient, a'budant 3. 'limited, en'vironment 4.'plentiful, 'easily 5. ex'pensive, 'dangerous

IV. Homework - Learn by heart all new words.

V. FEEDBACK:

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

269

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 7th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 15th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 15th ,2019

Period 84 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P. 41) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources. - Language: future continuous. 2. Skills: listening, speaking. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy, - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in using the structures to do the tasks required, so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES Date I. WARM UP. Brainstorming.(5’ - GW) - T divides the class into 2 groups. UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY - T asks Ss to call aloud the adjectives to Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P. 41) describe films. - T checks and gives comments . - T leads to the new lesson. II. NEW LESSON. I. The future continuous. 1. The future continuous- T explains how Model sentence to use the future continuous and its form. This time next week we will be studying - T makes an example. unit 11 - T asks Ss to make examples. -Usage: We use the future continuous for - T checks and gives comments. an action in progress at a definite point of - Ss copy. time in the future. (A definite point of time in the future can be expressed by the words/ phrases like: tomorrow, this time next week/ month/ year...) - Form : (+) S+ will be + V-ing 1. 1. Complete the sentences. (-) S + will not be + V-ing - T asks Ss to look at the sentences and (?) Will + S + be + V-ing? Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

270

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 explains how to do the task. - T gives Ss 3’ to work in pairs to use to complete the sentences. - T goes around the class to control Ss’ activities and help them if necessary. - Ss share their answers with a partner. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - Other Ss give comments. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 1. 2. Write. - T asks Ss to look at the words given - T gives Ss 2’ to work individually to write what these students will be doing tomorrow afternoon - T goes around the class to control Ss’ activities and help them if necessary. - Ss share their answers with a partner. 1. 3. Complete the conversation- T asks Ss to look at the conversation. - T gives Ss 3’ to complete the conversation. - T calls some pairs to read. - Other Ss give comments. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 4. Work in pairs. - T asks Ss to work in pairs to tell his/ her partner what he/ she will be doing. - Ss work in pairs. 2. The future simple - T explains how to use future simple passive and the structures. - T gives an example. - T asks Ss to make examples. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy.

2. 1. Complete the magazine article. - T asks Ss to look at the article - T gives Ss 2’ to work individually to complete the article Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 1. Complete the passage using the future continuous form of the verbs in brackets 1. will be putting 2. will be taking 3. will be installing 4. will be spending 5. will be using

2. Write what these students will be doing tomorrow afternoon 1. Jenny will be giving a talk about saving energy 2. Helen will be putting solar panels in the playground. 3. Susan will be checking cracks in the water pipes 4. Jack will be putting low energy light bulbs in the class rooms. 5. Kate will be showing a film on types of renewable energy sources 3. Complete the conversation. 1. will watch 2. Will we put 3. will be having 4. will …. Travel 5. will walk or cycle 6. will be cycling 7. will be going 4. Work in pairs.

II. The future simple passive -Model sentence Solar panels will be put on the roof -Usage: We use the future simple passive when the object of the sentence is not important - When the doer of the action is not known (If the doer is still important, we can add a "by" phrase ) 271

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - T goes around the class to control Ss’ activities and help them if necessary. - Ss share their answers with a partner. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - Other Ss give comments. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 2. 2. Change the sentences into the passive voice. - T asks Ss to look at the sentences. - T gives Ss 3’ to change the sentences into the passive voice. - Ss share their answers with a partner. -

III. WRAPPING UP. - T sums up the main points of the lesson.

IV. HOMEWORK.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 -Form: (+) S + will be + PP (-) S + will not be + PP (?) Will + S + be + PP? 1. Complete the magazine article with the passive form of the passive form of the verbs in the table 1. be provided 2. be used 3. be placed 4. be stored 5. be solved

2. Change the sentences into the passive voice. 1. Wave will be used as an environmentally friends energy source. 2. A network of wind turbines will be installed to make electricity 3. In the countryside, plants will be burnt to produce heat 4. Energy consumption will be reduced as much as possible. 5. Alternative sources of energy will be developed 6. Solar energy will be used to solved the problem of the shortage of energy 3. Look and write. - A hydro power station will be built in the region to increase the electricity - Solar panels will be put on the roof of the building - A network of wind turbines will be installed generate electricity - Bicycles will be used to travel in the city IV. Homework - Do exercise B 5(Workbook).

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

272

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 11th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 18th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 18th ,2019

Period 85 EXAM No 3 CORRECTION I.OBJECTTIVE By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: -Vocabulary: revise vocabulay from Unit 7, 8, 9 - Language: all grammar parts from Unit 7, 8, 9. 2. Skills: integrated skills. 3. Attitude and competencies:Ss will have a. positive attitude towards the lesson. - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Handouts. Students: III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLLUTIONS. Some Ss may have difficulty in realizing their mistakes and correcting themselves, so T should explain the Ss’ mistakes carefully and encourage Ss in doing other exercises. IV.PROCEDURE.

ANSWER KEY PART 1: LISTENING

I. Listen to the passage and tick (V) true ( T ) or false (F) ( 1point) 1 2

Non-renewable sources are being used up. Many poor people in developing countries have little electricity. Biogas is a new source of energy available for poor people Biogas creates a lot of smoke. The new energy source is not costly. 5 II. Listen to the passage again and complete the sentences. (1 point)

T X X X

X X

1. People in ____MOUNTAINOUS ____areas have to gather wood to use as fuel. 2. Biogas is mainly used for ___COOKING AND HEATING 3. Biogas helps solve the problem of indoor ___AIR POLLUTION 4. The use of renewable energy sources in developing countries is __INCREASED__. 5. In the future, the __SOLAR ENERGY will be used as the main environmentally friendly energy sources.

273

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

PART 3 : VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

I.Choose the correct answer to complete each following sentences. (2 points) 1.Nam used to ________ morning exercise when he got up early. A. did B. does C. doing D. do 2. My father __________the bus to work every day, but I cycle. A. catches B. drives C. goes D. runs 3. I go to school __________ bike. A. by B. on C. in D. from 4. She’s sure that they will find the film_________. A. entertaining B. entertain C. entertainment D. entertained 5. __________ the story of the film was good, I didn’t like the acting. A. Because B. Since C. As D. Although 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7.The boys _______ home for lunch because they are planning to visit the hydro power station. A. have not come B. do not come C. will not be coming D. is not coming 8.They ___________ that we have gone without telling them. A. thought B. are thinking C. will be thinking D. think II. Put the correct form of the verb in brackets. (1 points) 1.Nam often PLAYS soccer in the afternoon. 2.My father used to GO swimming when he was a child. 3. By 2020, people in Viet Nam WILL HAVE SPENT a lot of money on heating. 4. At 5 o’clock tomorrow Nam WILL BE PLAYING football with his friends.

274

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Bukater. Jack saves Rose from killing herself during the journey on board the ship. Although they are from different social classes, and Rose is already engaged, they fall in love. The film has a sad ending: the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack. Critics say it is a must-see. I agree because the story is moving and the acting is excellent. The special effects, visuals and music are also incredible. 1. What kind of film is Titanic? Titanic is a romantic film 2. Who does Titanic star? It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. 3. What is Titanic about? The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage 4. How is the ending of Titanic? the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack.

PART 5: WRITING Question : Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. ( 2 points) 1. The distance from Ha Noi to Thanh Hoa City is about 100 kilometres. It is about100 kilometres between Ha Noi and Thanh Hoa City 2. Although Quang Hai -footballer is so young , he. Despite young footballer, Q Hai plays football beautifully 3.My father lived in small village when he was a child. My father used to live in small village when he was a child. 4. What is the distance between Thanh Hoa and Ha Noi city? How far is it from Thanh Hoa to Ha Noi city?

V. FEEDBACK: .......................................................................................................................................... …………………

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

275

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 14th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 21st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 21st ,2019

Period 86 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 4: Communication (P. 43) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources. - Language: talk about types and sources of energy and talk about the disadvantages and advantages of different sources of energy 2. Skills: listening, speaking. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in practicing to talk about his/ her partner’s carbon footprint so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES Date I. WARM UP.Chatting. - Teacher elicits the phrases from students. UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY ? Play the game in pairs or groups. Lesson 4: Communication (P. 43) - First, they place six pieces of paper face go to school by bike, turn off the lights/ down. faucet, use biogas … throw trash away, use ? Take turns turning over each piece of plastic bags…… paper and read the phrase on it. ? After that, find the appropriate phrase go with should or shouldn’t. - Those who make a correct sentence will have one point subtracted. - Ss give their answers. - T checks and gives comments. - T leads to the new lesson. II. NEW LESSON. I. Vocabulary. - public transport (n): phương tiện giao 1. Vocabulary - T uses some techniques to introduce new thông công cộng words. - hand fan (n): quạt giấy - T guides Ss to read and calls on some to - low energy light bulb (n): bóng đèn tiết kiệm điện năng repeat in chorus and individually - T checks and gives comments. - biogas (n): khí sinh học Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

276

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - Ss copy. 2. Practice. 2. 1. Answer the questions. - T guides Ss to how to do the task. - Ss read the question aloud and then choose the own answers.

2. 2. Work in pairs. - T asks Ss to add up each other’s answers and look up the score. Then explain how well your partner saves energy. - Ss work in pairs. - T calls some Ss to share their scores. 2. 3. Talk abour you partner’s carbon footprint. - Ss work in groups of 6 to talk about their partners’ carbon footprint. - T goes around to control Ss’ activities.

III. WRAPPING UP. - T calls some Ss to present before the class. - T checks and gives comments. - T sums up the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 II. Practice. 1. Answer the questions. 1. Do you take showers instead of baths? 2. Do you walk or ride a bike when traveling short distances?. 3. Do you use public transport when traveling long distances? 4. Do you use a hand fan to keep cool in the summer?. 5. Do you use low energy light bulb ? 6. Do you turn off the lights when leaving a room? 7. Do you only use as much water as you need 8. Do you only use a little electricity at home? 9. Do you use biogas for cooking at home? 10. Do you go to school by bike? 2. Work in pairs.

3. Talk abour you partner’s carbon footprint. My partner’s carbon footprint is big. He is considerate because he uses a lot of baths. He could try harder to use showers instead of baths. By reducing the use of baths, he can help to save energy.

III. Homework - Learn by heart new words.

V. FEEDBACK: ..........................................................................................................................................

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

277

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 14th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 22nd,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 22nd ,2019

Period 87 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P. 44) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources. - Language: + Read the passage about renewable and non-renewable energy. + Talk about the advantages and disavantages of each type of energy sources. 2. Skills: reading, speaking. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties intalking about the advantages and disavantages of each type of energy sources so T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES Date I. WARM UP.Discuss. UNIT 6: THE FIRST UNIVERSITY IN - T asks Ss to look at the questions, read VIET NAM aloud. Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P. 64) - Ss give their answers. 1. fossil fuel - T checks and gives comments. 2. hydro and nuclear power, the sun and the - T leads to the new lesson. wind… II. NEW LESSON. I. Reading. 1. Reading. 1. Vocabulary. - rely (v): dựa vào 1. 1. Vocabulary - alternative(adj): khác, nhiều khả năng - T uses some techniques to introduce new - abundant (adj): thừa - fossil fuel (n): nhiên liệu hình thành từ words. - T guides Ss to read and calls on some to xác động thực vật - dam (n): đập nước repeat in chorus and individually - T checks and gives comments. - generate (n): phát ra - Ss copy. 2. Read and check. 1. 2. Read and check. - T asks Ss to look at the passage. - T reads first. - Ss listen. - T gives Ss 2’ to read. - T calls some Ss to read aloud. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

278

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - T checks and gives comments. 1. 3. Read, match and answer the questions. a. Match. - T asks Ss to look at the two columns. - T gives Ss 2’ to match. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. b. Answer the questions. - T asks Ss to look and read the questions. - Ss work in pairs in 2’ to find the answers. - T calls some pairs to ask and answer. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy.

2. Speaking. 2. 1. Ask and answer. - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer like the example on their books. - Ss practice asking answering about advantages and disadvantages of each type of energy sources. II. WRAPPING UP. Talk about the advantages and disadvantagesof each type of energy sources. III. - T calls some Ss to present before class. - T checks and gives comments. - T sums up the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK. (2’ – Whole class)

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 3. Read, match and answer the questions. a. Match. 1. create energy 2. drive machinery 3. generate electricity 4. turn turbines 5. heat houses b. Answer the questions. 1. Two. They are renewable and nonrenewable. 2. Hydro power is limited because dams cannot be built in certain areas. Nuclear energy is dan-gerous. 3. Because the win can turn turbines to make electricity. Solar energy can be changed into electricity or can be used to heat or cool our houses. 4. We use hydro power most. 5. He thinks Viet Nam will use the wind and the sun as alternative sources of energy in the future. II. Speaking. 1. Ask and answer.

2. Talk about the advantages and disadvantagesof each type of energy sources .

III. Homework - Learn by heart new words. - Do Ex D1, 2 (WB)

V. FEEDBACK:

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

279

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 18th, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 25th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 25th ,2019

Period 88 UNIT 10: SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 6: Skills 2(P. 45) I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary: Types of energy sources, words to describe energy sources. - Language: + Listen to a tape about biogas. + Talk about the advantages and disavantages of each type of energy sources. 2. Skills: listening and writing. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in writing about what we should do to save energyso T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES Date I. WARM UP. Brainstorming. - T asks Ss to think about festivals around the world. - T divides the class into 2 groups. - Ss from each group come to the board and write as many as possible. - T checks and declares the winner. - T leads to the new lesson.

II. NEW LESSON. 1. Listening. 1. 1. Look at the pictures. - Ss work in pairs, look at the pictures and say what kind of festival it is. - They then share their answer with the whole class. 1. 2.Listen and check T/ F - T asks Ss to read the statements carefully. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Listening. 1. Look at the pictures.

2.Listen and check T/ F. 1. F (one of the most famous festivals) 280

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 - T plays the tape twice or three times for Ss to listen and check the statements. - Ss share their answers with a partner. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 1. 3. Listen and answer the questions. - T asks Ss to look at the questions and read aloud. - T plays the tape twice for Ss to listen and correct the statements. - Ss discuss in pairs. - T calls some Ss to give their answers. - T checks and gives comments. - Ss copy. 2. Writing. 2. 1.Make notes about a festival you attended. - Ss work individually to make notes about a festival they attended by answering the questions. - T asks some Ss to share their notes to the whole class. - T checks and gives comments. 2. 2. Write a short paragraph about the festival. - T asks Ss to write a short paragraph about the festival. - T goes around to control Ss’ activities and help if necessary. III. WRAPPING UP. - T calls some Ss to read their reviews. - Ss listen and give comments. - T checks and gives marks. - T sums up the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 2. T 3. F (They stayed in a tent). 4. F (He's Nick's father's favourite singer) 5. T

3. Listen and answer the questions. 1. It takes place every June. 2. They are music bands. 3. He interested the audience with the hit songs. 4. They also went to the Bohemian Woods. 5. They enjoyed a mix of good music from around the world. II. Writing. 1. Make notes about a festival you attended.

2. Write a short paragraph about the festival.

III. Homework - Learn by heart new words.

V. FEEDBACK:

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

281

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 21st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 28th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 28th ,2019

Period 89

UNIT 10 : SOURCES OF ENERGY Lesson 7 : Looking back & Project I. OBJECTIVES. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge:

- revise what they have learnt about ENERGY SOURCES in the previous lessons as well as make their own products slogans about how to save energy. - Vocabulary: Sources of energy & ways to save energy in life . - Grammar: The future continuous tense and the future simple passive form . 2. Skills: listening speaking reading and writing skills. 3. Attitude and competencies: have a possitive attitude towards saving energy - Understand and actively respond to saving energy, - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS. Teacher: Book. Students: Books, notebooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS. Ss may have difficulties in writing about what we should do to save energyso T should be willing to help them. IV. PROCEDURE TEACHER’S AND STUDENTS’ BOARD DISPLAY ACTIVITIES

I. Warm up - Have Ss put the words into the correct groups to recall some new words - Read 3 times in chorus - Checking remembering by games - Guide how to play - observe & feedback

II. Activity 1-Review briefly the usages and Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I. Vocabulary. ( Review) 1 . Put the words into the correct groups . Sources Advantages Disadvantages of energy Biogas Clean Polluted Solar Cheap Expensive energy Plentiful Limited Gas Available Exhausted/ Nuclear dangerous energy harmful unlimited Water power II. Grammar: ( Review) A, The future continuous tense . => expressing an action in progress at a 282

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

forms of the future continuous tense and the simple future passive voice .

- Give examples

- re-explain the uses and the form

2 - Have Ss do Ex ( pair work & group-work) - cross- check

- call someone to represent their answers. - Provide the keys

- Ask Ss to write down their answers on their notebooks

- Have Ss look at the pictures and say out

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

definite point of time in the future . (+) S + will be + V-ing (-) S + will not be + V-ing (?) Will + S + be + V-ing ? B, The future simple passive form. Passive form is used when…. - the doer is not known /not important - the object is not important * Form (+) S + will be + Vpp ( by O ). (-) S + will be + Vpp ( by O ). (?) will + S + be + Vpp ( by O )? NOTE : If the doer is definite and still important , we can add “ by O ” at the end of the sentence . * Practice : 2. Complete the sentences using the verbs in brackets in the future continuous. 1, will be wearing 2, will be lying 3, will be working 4, will be studying 5, will be building 3. Change the following sentences into the passive voice. 1. A lot of money will be spent on heating next year . 2. Biogas will be used for fuel in homes and for transport. 3. Renewable energy like wind and solar energy will be used to solve the problems of pollution. 4. The use of electricity will be reduced to save energy. 5. A hydro power station will be built in this area next year. 4. Complete the dialogue, using the future continuous form of the verbs . 1, will be earning 2, will be doing 283

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

- Call some ones to present

- Feedback and correct mistakes if necessary

3- Have Ss discuss the slogans - Observe and feedback. - Divide the class into 6 groups - Have Ss work in groups to draw slogans about how to save energy. - Call some groups to present their products ( exhibition) - T observe - Feedback

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

3, will be doing 4, will be hosting 5, will be doing III. Communication: How to save energy 5. Look at the pictures and answer the question below . What should you do to save energy ? - We should turn off the fire when the kettle is boiling . - We should turn off the faucet when the tub is full of water . - We should close the refrigerator’s door when we do not use it . - We should turn off the fan when we do not use it. - We should turn off the lights when there is no one in the room . - We should turn off the gas-stoves when we do not cook . IV: Project.( Poster / sub-boards) 1. Look at the slogans and answer the questions below. - How are they used ? - Why are they important ? 2. Write a simple slogans in your groups about how to save energy . ( exhibition their slogans ) ( maybe do at home )

III. Homework - Learn by heart all the new words. - Prepare for next lesson ( find the meaning of the new words in the next lesson ) - Redo 3,5 and project (students’ book)

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Do at home

284

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of planning: Mar 21st, 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Mar 29th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Mar 29th ,2019

Period 90 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 1: Getting started (P.48-49) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to means of transport in the future. - Language : Review : Will for future prediction. 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about means of transport in the future. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to questions about means of transport in the future. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not want to share their ideas about favorite means of transport. - Provide them some useful information. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (9’/IW)

Contents and Board Display UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 1: Getting started (P.48-49)

Brainstorming To start the lesson, ask Ss as a class to brainstorm on the board means of transport that are now commonly used in Viet Nam. Connect A. GETTING STARTED this with what they have learnt in Unit 7 We'll have flying cars Example: “motorbikes” (Traffic) and Unit 10 (Energy) by asking Ss to describe how these means of transport work in - have motors powered by engines. which situations they are used, and the - use petrol advantages and disadvantages of using them. - used for road traffic Ask Ss how people in Viet Nam will travel around in year 2100. Ask them to predict it their - advantages, practical, personal means of transport mentioned on the board will transport still be used. Ask them to explain their - disadvantages: not safe cause predictions. T introduces the lesson by showing the picture Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 285

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

on page 48 on the screen - has Ss cover the text and ask them to look at the piture only. Introduces the names of the students (Veronica, Mai, and Phuc). and asks ss some questions about them. What can you see in the picture? What are Veronica, Mai, and Phuc doing? What makes you think so? What do you think is on the screen? Is there a connection between what is on the screen with what Mai is thinking about? What topic are they talking about? II. NEW LESSON 1.Listen and read (15’/IW/PW)

pollution

1. Listen and read *Vocabulary: *Vocabulary: - Elicit the new words - Flying car (n): ô tô bay Write ‘flying car’ on the board. Ask Ss - Jet pack (n) : động cơ phản lực mini what they think how a ‘flying car’ might be - Teleporter (n): dịch chuyển tức thời different from an ordinary car (e.g.appearance, - Driverless car (n): ô tô không người lái energy, advantages, disadvantages, etc.) - Crash (v) (n): đâm, va chạm Write ‘jet pack’ and ‘teleporter’ on the - Avoid (v): tránh board. Ask Ss to guess what they are, them give - Helicopter (n) : máy bay trực thăng - Imaginative(n) : giàu trí tưởng explanations. ‘Jet pack’: a jet-powered device you wear tượng on the back that will help you to fly (“động cơ phản lực mini”) ‘teleporter’: an imaginary method of transportation in which one disappears at one point, usually in an instant, and reappear at another - Check the new words: What and where - Let ss predict how people travel in the future, then write some of the students’ answers on the board. - Let ss draw the usage of “will” in this situation T plays the recording twice. Ss listen then practice the conversation. in pairs. T checks some pairs. *Practice: 1 a. Read the conversation again Then choose the correct answers. - Ss work individually to answer the questions. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

286

*Structures: Will + V: for future prediction. *Examples: - People will own driverless cars in the future. Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Ss compare answers in pairs and then discuss as *Practice: 1 a. Read the conversation again a class. Then choose the correct answers. - T goes through each question and asks Ss how *Key the text in the conversation supports their 1. a 2. b 3. c answers. (For question 2, however, T may draw 4. a Ss’ attention to the suffix-less. For question 4, T may remind Ss of the meaning of green in previous units). After the discussion, T writes correct answers on Look out the board. -less is added to a noun to make an Look out adjective. T emphasises-less is added to a noun to make an adjective. T asks Ss to give more examples and make sentences with the new adjectives created. 1.b: Answer the questions 1.b: Answer the questions *Key: - Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the 1. If there are too many flying cars, question. there will be traffic jams in the sky. - T calls some pairs to ask and answer for the Some means of transport will not be class to listen. convenient in bad weather (e.g.jet - Confirm the correct answers.

pack). Future means of transport may use a lot of fuel which will make pollution worse.

2&3: Open answers from Ss. 2.Fact or opinions? Tick (√) in the F (Fact) or 2.Fact or opinions? Tick (√) in the F O (Opinion) box:(6’/IW/PW) (Fact) or O (Opinion) box: T writes a fact and an opinion (which could be *Key: 2. O 3. F your personal opinion) about flying cars on 1. F 4. O 5. O board. T asks Ss to decide which statement could be proved and which is what you feel. Draw Ss attention to the Remember box. Give more examples if necessary and ask Ss to identify which are facts and which are opinions. Ss work in pairs to tick the Facts vs. Opinions box. Then ask for their answers as a class. Ask Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

287

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Ss to explain their decisions before giving the keys. For question 5, tell Ss that a prediction is always an opinion. 3a. Can you find any future means of transport from the conversation in 1 here? (2’/IW) Ss work individually to come up with the means of transport mentioned in the conversation. T checks and comments 3b. Combine more adjectives and nouns. How many words can you make? Be creative! (5’/IW) T makes an example by giving a combination, e.g. an electric car. Ask Ss to say how they think an electric car works. Ss work individually to make a list of the combined words. T calls some ss to write their combinations on the board. T and other ss give comments. III. WRAPPING-UP (6’/PW) 3c. Choose your three most interesting means of transport. Then share them with you partner. Tell Ss how to do this task by looking at the example given. Ss work in pairs. After the discussion, ask the class how many combined words they have. Elicit the words on the board. Then ask Ss to pick up one favourite combination from their list. Call on several pairs and have them to explain why they choose that means of transport as their favourite one.. -Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

3a. Can you find any future means of transport from the conversation in 1 here? *Key: Flying car driverless car

3b. Combine more adjectives and nouns. How many words can you make? Be creative! *Examples: An electric car An underwater bus

3c. Choose your three most interesting means of transport. Then share them with you partner. *Example: A: I think a space train sounds great. B: Oh. I don't. I think an underwater bus is better.

III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Practice listening more at home. - Review the lesson. - Do B1 /P37 - WB

Date of planning: Mar 24th , 2019 Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

288

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 1st,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 1tst ,2019

Period 91 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.50-51) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Movement words, prepositions go with different means of transport. - Language : Simple present tense to talk about different means of transport . - Pronunciation : Rising and falling intonation for Yes-No and Wh-questions. 2. Skills: Listening, speaking and reading about different means of transport in the future. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to rising and falling intonation. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS -Students may get confused when practising movement words. - Explain carefully and ask them to learn by heart. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities

I. WARM UP (7’/IW)

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.50-51)

* Guessing Game T writes the verbs: drive, ride, fly, sail, pedal on pieces of paper. Ask one S at a time to * Guessing Game volunteer to perform the action looking at the verb and the class guess what action the S is doing. After each correct guess, T writes the verb on the board. Ss add means of transport they know that go with that verb. T explains that there may be a means of transport that is not suitable for particular verbs. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary (17’/IW/PW)

I. Vocabulary Teacher uses different techniques to teach Pedal (v), (n): đạp (xe), bàn đạp Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 289

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

vocab (situation, realia) SS repeat in chorus and individually Ss copy all the words

Float (v): nổi Heated (adj): nóng Hot air balloon (n): kinh khí cầu Tram (n): Bullet train (n): tàu hỏa siêu tốc (tàu viên đạn) 1. Cross out the means of transport that 1. Cross out the means of transport that DOESN'T go with the verbs. DOESN'T go with the verbs. *Key: a. train ( for motorbike ride is used for Ss work in pairs to do activity . the passenger and drive is used for the Tchecks ss’ answer Ss work in pairs again to say the correct driver) phrases. b. a car c. a train e.g.drive a train, drive a car, drive a bus. d. a bus e. a plane 2. The students are thinking of means of transport. Can you match the students with the transport? Ask Ss to underline the most important key words in the thinking bubbles. Do the first item with Ss as an example. Ss work individually and compare their answers in pairs. T checks and gives comments. 3. In or on? Complete the sentences. Ss work individually then pairs. T explains the use of in and on in Remember box.

2. The students are thinking of means of transport. Can you match the students with the transport? * Key: a. a ship b. a bus c. a hot air balloon d. a bicycle e. a plane f. motorbikes 3. In or on? Complete the sentences. * Key: 1. on 2. on 3.on 4. in 5. in; on

T asks Ss to ask and answer how they often go/travel to some places (school, supermarket, the sea, etc.) Ss work in pairs. T checks some pairs. II. Pronunciation (15’/IW/PW) Rising and falling intonation for questions Write two questions on the board: one Y/N question and one Wh-question. Tell Ss to say

II. Pronunciation Rising and falling intonation for questions *Example: Are you Ly? the questions aloud and ask them to notice What's your name? how the two questions are said in different Look out ! ways. Tell Ss to find out the rules in Look Y/N question: Rising Wh question: Falling out! Box. Ask Ss to give some questions and have more practice. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

290

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

4. Listen and tick the correct box. 4. Listen and tick the correct box. Play the recording. Ss work *Key: 2. rising individually and tick in the appropriate box. 1. falling 3.falling 4. rising 5. Repeat the questions 5. Repeat the questions T plays the recording again. Audio script: Ss listen and repeat. 1. What will be next? T calls some ss to read the questions again. 2. Do you think you can use it in bad weather? 3. How much fuel will these means of transport use? 4. Will pollution be much worse? 6. Practise these questions. Work out 6. Practise these questions. Work out whether they have rising or falling whether they have rising or falling intonation? Then listen and repeat. intonation? Then listen and repeat. Ss practise saying the questions individually and decide if they are spoken with rising or falling voices. T plays the recording for Ss to check their answers, then confirms their correct answers. 7. In pairs, ask and answer the questions 6. 7. In pairs, ask and answer the Ss work in pairs and ask and answer the questions 6. question in 6. T calls some pairs to practice. III. WRAPPING-UP (4’) T asks ss some questions about the lesson they’ve learnt. -Summarize the main points of the lesson IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

* Survey: Have you ever (travelled in/on..)..? What is your favorite means of transport? III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sound more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2,3,B3 /P.36,37-W.B

Date of planning: Mar 28th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 4th,2019 Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

291

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 4th ,2019

Period 92 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.51-52) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Revise lexical items related to means of transport in the future. - Language: Will for future prediction. Possessive pronouns 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, listening and writing about means of transport in the future. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to simple future tense for future prediction and possessive pronoun. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, recording T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Ss might find it difficult to do activity 5. - Help them with some information. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (7’/IW) UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE * Chatting Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.51-52) T: How do you go to school everyday? * Chatting Ss: I go to school by….. (by bike). T: What color is your bike? Ss: My bike/ It is red/….. T: Mine is white. And how will you travel when you are 25? Ss: I will …….. II. NEW LESSON I.Grammar I.Grammar: Will for future prediction.(16’/IW/PW) Will for future prediction. 1.Listen again to part of the conversation. 1.Listen again to part of the What words do Phuc, Veronica and Mai use conversation. What words do Phuc, Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

292

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

when talking about the future? Complete the rules in the box. Remind Ss of Phuc, Veronica, and Mai and the group’s project in Getting Stated. T: Are they talking about the past, the prensent, or the future ? T elicits from Ss more information about what the group discuss. T plays the recording. Ss listen carefully to pick up any phrases/sentences that contain will. Ss complete the rules in the box. T asks ss to repeat the form, the use of simple future again. 2. Rearrange the words to make sentences: Ss do the task individually then compare their answers with each other. - Teacher calls ss read the correct sentences one by one.

Veronica and Mai use when talking about the future? Complete the rules in the box.

Explain that we use possessive pronouns to avoid repeating information.

Poss. Adj + N = Poss. Pron

*Key: We often use will to make a prediction about the future. Prediction Affirmative

S + will + V

Negative

S + will (won’t) + V

Interrogative

Will + S + V?

not

2.Rearrange the words to make sentences: *Key: 1. Pepple won’t use flying cars until the year 2050. 2. Do you think the fuel price will increase next month? 3. The mail won’t arrive until next week. 4. I don’t think he will take the new position. 5. We will use more solar energy in the future. 3. Minh Duc is asking a fortune-teller 3. Minh Duc is asking a fortune-teller about his future. Complete the sentences about his future. Complete the with the correct form of will: sentences with the correct form of will: - Students work in pairs to do the task *Key: individually. 1. Will .... be T gives feedback to ss as a class. 2. will be 3. Will ... be 4. will be 5. Will .... be 6. won’t be 7. will travel possessive pronouns: (16’/IW/PW/GW) possessive pronouns: T goes through the example with Ss. Say the EX: This pen is your pen . This pen is yours. two sentences have the same meaning. This is your pen. ‘your’is a possessive Highlight the changes in the possessive in adjective and it is put before the noun. the two sentences. This pen is yours. ‘yours’ is a possessive pronouns and stands alone.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

293

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Draw Ss’ attention to the table: The personal pronouns I, you, she, he, it, we, Instead of saying: This pen is your pen they, correspond the respective possessive adjectives my, your, his, her, its, our, their, and the respective possessive pronouns mine, yours, his, hers, its, ours, theirs. 4. Complete the sentences with possessive pronouns: - T asks Ss to work individually to complete task 4. Ss work individually. Then calls on some Ss to write the answers on the board and gives feedback.

(which sounds repetitive), we say This pen is yours. Instead of saying: This bike is my bike, not his bike, we say This bike is mine, not his 4. Complete the sentences with possessive pronouns: *Key: 1. This computer is theirs. 2. The black bike is mine 3. These shoes are his. 4. The cat is Veronica’s 5. The picture is ours. 5. Game.Now choose any five things you can see in the classroom. Make sentences about them. * Example: This classroom is ours.

5. Game.Now choose any five things you can see in the classroom. Make sentences about them. - Has Ss work in groups of 4 or 5. Each group member writes 5 sentences individually, then the group get together to see how many sentences they have. The group that has the most correct sentences wins. - Other groups remark - Teacher gives feedback. III. WRAPPING-UP (4’) Summarize the main points of the lesson. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) III. HOMEWORK - T assigns the homework. -Learn the new words. - Do part B4,5,6/ P.38- W.B. - Ss copy their homework. -Review the lesson. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

Date of planning: Mar 28th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 5th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 5th ,2019 Period 93 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 4: Communication (P.53) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 294

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : The lexical items related to means of transport in the future. - Language: Will for future prediction. Possessive pronouns 2.Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about means of transport in the future. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to questions about transport problems. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak Ss may find it difficult to express their idea. - T encourages them to practise with a better student. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE *Chatting. Lesson 4: Communication (P.53) T asks ss some questions about means of transport they use everyday. * Chatting II.NEW LESSON 1. What problems with transport do you 1. What problems with transport do you have? With partner, discuss and have? With partner, discuss and make a make a list. list. (10’/PW) T starts the lesson by telling the class one bad experience of yours about using a particular means of transport. Write the key words of the story on the board. Ask Ss if they have similar experience Ss work in pairs to do this task. T then calls on some pairs to share their list with the class.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

295

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2.Now read this case study and article 2.Now read this case study and article about transport problems in about transport problems in Wonderland. Underline all the problems Wonderland. Underline all the you can find.(10’/IW) *Vocabulary: - T elicits the new words. - Checking technique: What and where

problems you can find. *Vocabulary: jammed metro (n): tàu ngầm(đi trong thành phố) skytrain (n): tàu trên không gridlocked (adj): kẹt cứng, tắc nghẽn giao Ss read the two texts individually and thông face (v): đối mặt với underline the problems mentioned. *Suggested answers: As a class, elicit their answers on the board. - Biggest city without a metro of skytrain. Ask if they have similar problems where - The city is getting gridlocked. they live. - There are too many cars (10 million in traffic every day) and more cars are coming. - Serious pollution. - Fewer buses. It takes too long to drive in the city. 3. In groups, think of the future mean of transport that will help people in Wonderland. Brainstorm your idea below.(10’/GW) Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 to design a future means of transport that will help

3. In groups, think of the future mean of transport that will help people in Wonderland. Brainstorm your idea below. - What kind of energy will it use? - What will it look like?

people in Wonderland, using the prompt - How many people can it transport? web provided. - What technology will it use? T provides Ss with posters (A0 sized - Where can people use it? paper) and marker pens to design. T collects ss’designs and posts on the board. T checks and gives feedback as a class. III. WRAPPING-UP (8’/GW) 4.Present your solutions to the class. As . Prepare the evaluation form on A4 you listen to other groups, write your paper for each group to allow for more comments in the table below. writing space if possible. Otherwise, ask the group to copy the table in their Group IntersDoes it Favorite notebook. Explain they should listen name ting Answer Part? idea? the (make a carefully to other groups in order to give (1-5) problem Note) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 296

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

evaluation (as a group). (5 is the highest score and 1 is the lowest score).

? (1-5)

After all groups have presented, T collects the evaluation and adds up the scores to find out the best presentation. *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,2, /P.39- W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Mar 28th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 8th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 8th ,2019 Period 94 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.54) Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 297

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : The lexical items related to means of transport in the future. - Language: Will for future prediction. Possessive pronouns 2.Skills: Reading about means of transport in the future. Talking about travelling in the future.Giving facts and opinions. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know how to keep our world greener. - Understand and actively respond to questions about different means of transport. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to do activity 6. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (7’/IW) *Brainstorming. Teacher asks ss to work in 2 groups to write as many means of transport as possible. T checks and gives feedback. II. NEW LESSON I.READING (18’/IW/PW) 1. Look at the pictures below. What do you think is the connection between them. Ask Ss to look at the pictures and describe what they see. Help Ss to find out the connection between the pictures by asking questions such as: How many people can travel on them? Where are these vehicles used? How can these people control the vehicles? T do not give the names of the vehicles at this point 2. Read the text below and find the names of the transport inventions.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Contents and Board Display UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.54) *Brainstorming. Bike, car, bus, train, metro, skytrain, flying cars………………. I.READING 1. Look at the pictures below. What do you think is the connection between them. Suggested answers: These are all personal of transport. One person can travel on them. They are all used for ground transport. People control them by using handle bars. 2. Read the text below and find the names of the transport inventions. * Vocabulary: flop (v): thất bại hover scooter (n): xe trượt trên mặt đất 298

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

monowheel (n): xe đạp một bánh pedal (n), (v): bàn đạp segway (n): tên một loại phương tiện giao thông di chuyển bằng sự di chuyển tay lái pull (v): kéo> < push handle (n): tay cầm create (v)/ creation (n) * Key: Hover scooter Monowheel Segway 3. Can you find words in the text to match the definitions below. 3. Can you find words in the text to Key: 1. invention 2. flop 3. weird match the definitions below. Ss work individually then compare the 4. Answer the following questions. answers with their partners. *Key: 1. The Segway. T gives correct answers and comments. 4. Answer the following questions. 2. Maybe because a personal hover scooter * Vocabulary. T uses picture and situation to teach vocab Check “ Matching” Ss read the tips quickly and locate the words/ phrases in the text T asks Ss to read the text and try to identify which picture is a hover scooter, a monowheel, and a segway. Ss explain their decisions.

Ss work in pairs to complete the task.

is expensive, and it may be difficult to park.

Ss to underline the words in the text that 3. The monowheel. help them to find the answers. 4. The Segway. T asks Ss if they agree or disagree with what the author says and why. II. SPEAKING 5. Read the text again. Which statements are facts? Which are writer's opinion? Put them into the Fact or Opinion boxes. T explains the Study Skill box for opinion *Key: 1. fact signal words. T may bring in some photos or write on the board some 2. opinion interesting topics and ask Ss for their 3. opinion opinions. Ask Ss to use opinion signal 4. fact 5. opinion words where possible. 6. fact Remind Ss of the difference between a fact and an opinion that they have learnt 6. Work in pairs, talk about the transport below. Use a mix of facts and opinions. in Getting Started. Ss work in pairs to II. SPEAKING (15’/PW) 5. Read the text again. Which statements are facts? Which are writer's opinion?

complete the task 6. Work in pairs, talk about the transport below. Use a mix of facts and opinions. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

299

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 Ss work in pair to prepare their presentation about the vehicle. T reminds them to use statements about both facts and opinions. Ss can add their own ideas where possible. T calls on some pairs to present it to the class. T checks and gives comments. III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2/P.40-41– W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Apr 04th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 11th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 11th ,2019 Period 95 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.55) I. OBJECTIVES: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

300

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : The lexical items related to means of transport in the future. - Language: Will for future prediction. Possessive pronouns 2. Skills: - Listen to get specific information about a future means of transport. - Write a paragraph about ways to make the school a “green” place. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to future means of transport. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V, the recording. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Ss may get confused in writing. - T guides them to refer the text in Reading. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities

I. WARM UP (5’/IW) * Chatting Teacher asks ss about means of transport they want in the future. II. NEW LESSON I. LISTENING(15’/IW/PW) 1.Look at the picture. Which do you think are the correct options below. T asks ss to guess the answers first. Tell Ss that the questions ask about what they think, and not what is true about the vehicle. Remind them to use opinion signal words where possible. T do not give corrective feedback. - Accept all answers from Ss and ask them to explain why they think so. 2. Now listen and check your answers. *Vocabulary: T uses picture and situation to teach vocab T plays the recording and ask Ss to check their answers in 1. Ss listen and check. T asks ss to give correct answers. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.55) * Chatting

I. LISTENING 1.Look at the picture. Which do you think are the correct options below. (Ss’ opinion)

2. Now listen and check your answers. *Vocabulary: - automated (adj): - benefit (n): *Key: 1. can 2. doesn’t 301

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

3. Listen again and answer the following questions. Ss work individually to answer the questions and compare the answers with their partners. 4. Tick the benefits of this vehicle that are mentioned in the recording. Ss work in pairs to do the task. T gives correct feedback and plays the recording again if necessary.

II. Writing.(15’/IW/PW) 5. Write a short paragraph about a future means of transport in this unit. Include both facts and your opinions about the vehicle. - Ss refer to the text in Reading to support their writing. Ss work individually to do. -T goes around and helps them. 6.Swap your writing with your partner. Find which sentences are facts, and which ones are opinions. Do you agree or disagree with your friend’s opinions? Have Ss swap their writing with each other. Ask them to identify facts and opinions. T asks Ss to give their own feedback about their friend’s writing. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 3. not easy 4. can’t 5. is 3. Listen again and answer the following questions. *Key: 1. The vehicle is called TF-X 2. It can travel at 300 kph. 3. It was designed in 2013. 4. Tick the benefits of this vehicle that are mentioned in the recording. *Key: 1. It can avoid traffic. 2. It can avoid bad weather.( not mention) 3. It travels fast. 4. You can invite three of your relatives and three of your friends to travel with you on this vehicle at the same time.( the car has two seats) 5. Learning to drive the car is simple. II. Writing. 5. Write a short paragraph about a future means of transport in this unit. Include both facts and your opinions about the vehicle. - name of mean of transport. - how it looks - how its functions. - what you think about it 6. Swap your writing with your partner. Find which sentences are facts, and which ones are opinions. Do you agree or disagree with your friend’s opinions?

* HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.42– W.B. -Review the lesson.

V. Feedback : Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

302

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ....

Date of planning: Apr 04th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 12th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 12th ,2019 Period 96 UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.56-57) I. OBJECTIVES: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

303

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review - Language: Review 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about means of transport in the future. 3. Attitude and competencies: Know more about different means of transport and choose a suitable one for them to keep the environment clean. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt in unit 11 - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities

I. WARM UP (5’/IW) Teacher asks ss about their future means of transport. II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary: (10’/IW/PW) 1. Use the clues in the two pictures to form a phrase. Ss work individually to combine the pictures together to form a phrase. T asks Ss to compare their answer with their partner. Gives the answers. 2.Complete this table. Ss first work individually, then work in groups to fill the table. T encourages ss to have as many ideas as possible.

Contents and Board Display

UNIT 11. TRAVELLING IN THE FUTURE Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.56-57)

I. Vocabulary: 1. Use the clues in the two pictures to form a phrase. *Key: b. solar-powered taxi c. driverless plane d. space car e. underwater bus. 2.Complete this table. Transport possibilities in the future. Suggested answers: Verb Bicycle

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

304

Ride, pedal

Energy used Windpowere d

Characteristics Automated, high-speed

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 car

drive

train

drive

Air-plane Fly, drive II. Grammar (10’/IW/PW) 3. Change the personal pronouns in brackets into suitable possessive pronouns. Ss do the exercise individually. Check the answers with each other. - T calls on some ss to give the answers. T confirms the correct answers and writes them on the board 4. Look at the information about skycycling tubes. Then write a description of this means of transport using will and won’t. Ss write the text and swap with each other for peer comments. - T checks with the whole class. T asks ss to write the text in their notebooks. III. Communication (5’/PW) 5. Match the sentences in A with those in B. Ss do the exercise individually. Check the answers with each other. IV. Project (10’) T encourages Ss to draw pictures or use videos to illustrate their ideas. They may use posters or prepare a presentation using computer if possible. - Teacher guides and sets this activity as h.w

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Waterpowere d Solarpowere d Solarpowere d

Flying, driverless Underwater, supersonic driverless

II. Grammar 3.Change the personal pronouns in brackets into suitable possessive pronouns. * Key: 1. mine 2. yours 3.theirs 4. hers 4. Look at the information about skycycling tubes. Then write a description of this means of transport using will and won’t. Suggested answers: Skycycling tubes will be easy to drive….

III. Communication 5. Match the sentences in A with those in B. *Key: 1.c 2. e 3. b 4. a 5. d *Finished!.................................. IV. Project PROJECT Our own future transport. In groups, brainstorm ideas for your future means of transport. Think about the following: + Where does it travel? Does it fly, float, drive or something else? + How does it travel? Do you pedal it?..... …...........................................................

305

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Do Project

............................................................................................................................................... ..

Date of planning: Apr 08th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 15th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 15th ,2019 Period 97

REVISION UNIT 10 & UNIT 11 I. OBJECTIVES: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

306

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

-By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review. - Grammar: Review. 2. Skills: Review skills they’ve learnt in Unit 10,11: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Get ready for the 45’ test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: Text books, laptop, recording, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercises. - Let them do at home, IV. PROCEDURE:

I: Choose the word whose underlined part is pronounced differently from that of the other words in each group. 1. A. teenager B. together C. guess D. regular 2. A. meat B. reader C. sea D. realize 3. A. horrible B. hour C. hundred D. hold 4. A. much B. drug C. future D. buffalo 5. A. serious B. symptom C. sugar D. sauce II: Choose the best option to complete the following sentences. 6. I have known her………………..two years. A. with B. for C. since D. in 7. He ......... many old books for 5 years. A. recycled B. is recycling C. has recycled D. will recycle 8. To prepare for the new year, I .................. my house again since last month . A. paint B. painted C. have painted D. has painted 9. They ………..the used plastic bottles with water several times yesterday. A. washed B. is washed C. are washed D. were washed 10. It is dangerous ............. quickly. A. driving B. drove C. to drive D. driven III: Match the verbs in A with the phrases in B A B 11. donate a. flu 12. have b. eggshells 13. have a c. a mural Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

307

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

14. carve d. blood 15 . paint e. temprature IV: Read the text and answer the questions. The first reason why many families do volunteer work is that they feel satisfied and proud. The feeling of fulfillment comes from helping the community and other people. In addition, volunteering is a great way for families to have fun and closer. But many people say they don’t have time to volunteer because they have to work and take of their families. If that’s the case, try rethingking some of your free time as a family. You could select just one or two projects a year and make them a family tradition. For instance, your family can make and donate gift blankets for the old homeless people on holidays. Your family can also spend only one Saturday morning a month collecting rubbish in your neighborhood. 16. How do people often feel when they volunteer? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 17. How can your family benefit from doing volunteer? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 18. Why don’t some people have time to volunteer? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 19. How can your family help the old homeless people? ……………………………………………………………………………………… 20. Is collecting rubbish in the neighborhood an example of volunteer work? ……………………………………………………………………………………… V: Listen: You will some information about a place called Sea world. Listen and complete questions 21-25. You will hear the information twice. Open: Tuesday – Sunday Closed during month of: 21…………………………………… Watch a film about the sea in: 22…………………………………… Dolphin show starts at: 23……………………………………. Shop sells: 24……………………………………. Child’s ticket costs: 25……………………………………. VI: Writing: Write about a festival you know. - T comments.

Date of planning: Apr 11th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 18th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 18th ,2019 Period 98

Written TEST Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

308

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

I. Objectives: Students will be able to: 1. Phonetics: Ex1: Recognize and distinguish the different sound of the consonants or vowels of the words in the groups ( 5 items) + the consonants: + the vowels 2. Listening: Ex2: Listen and fill in the gaps ( 6 items) + Adj : 1 items + Noun: 5 items Ex3:T/ F statements. ( 4 items) + T : 2 item + F : 2 items 3. Language focus: Ex4: Choose the best word or phrases of words to complete the sentences. (8 items) + Verb form: 2 items + Prepositions : 1 item + Conjunction : 1item +The present perfect tense: 2 items + Comparative : 1 item + Vocabulary :1 item 4. Reading: Ex5:Read the story (The lost shoe) and answer the questions( 5 items) + Wh – questions :4 items + Yes/no questions: 1 item Ex6 : Read then tick (T) for true sentences and (F) for false sentences (4 items) + T: 3 items + F : 1 item 5. Writing: ( 10 items) Ex7: Use the cue words to write the sentences.(4items) + The simple past: 1 item + The simple future : 1 item + The present perfect: 1item + superlative : 1 item Ex8:Complete the second sentence so that it has a similar meaning to the first(6 items).

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

309

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

II. Matrix:

Listening

Recognition

Comprehension

Application

5 items

1pts

1pt

TN 10 items 2 pts

4 items

Phonetics

Total

4 items

1 pt Language

1 pt

8items

8 items

2 pts

focus the correct

4 items

form

1 pt

1 pt 4 items

Reading

1pts

4 items 1pt

Writing

Total

8 items 2pts 4 items

4 items

2 pts

2 pts 38 items

9 items

12items

4 items

9 items

4 items

2 pts

3 pts

1 pts

2,pts

2 pts

III. Content:

Kien thuy people comitee DuLe Junior Secondary School

Name…………………..class 7…... The …th period Date of test 18./4/19 Mark Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

WRITTEN TEST English 7

The remark of teacher Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 310

10pts

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

PART 1: LISTENING

I. Listen to the passage and tick (V) true ( T ) or false (F) ( 1point)

PART 3 : VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

311

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

A. thought B. are thinking C. will be thinking D. think II. Put the correct form of the verb in brackets. (1 points) 1.Nam often ( play) ________________________ soccer in the afternoon. 2.My father used to (go) _____________________swimming when he was a child. 3. By 2020, people in Viet Nam (spend) _____________________ a lot of money on heating. 4. At 5 o’clock tomorrow Nam ( play) ____________________football with his friends.

PART 4: READING I. Read the text and choose the best answers. (1 points) SAFETY TIPS FOR BUS PASSENGERS Always maintain a queue while waiting (1)______ a bus. Never stand on queue on the middle of the road. At the time of boarding a bus do not try to run or chase the bus. Once you are inside the bus, (2)______ a seat and hold firmly on the handrail if you are standing. Never try to (3)______ an overcrowded bus. Avoid (4)______ inside of a bus because your high-pitch noise may distract the attention of the driver and it could lead to a major road accident. 1.A.for B.to C.on D.in 2.A.hold B.sit C.take D.find 3.A.choose B.go C.wait D.board 4.A.shout B.shouting C.to shout D.shouts Answers: 1. ……………………… 2. ……………………… 3. ……………………… 4. ……………………… II: Read the passage and answer the questions. (1 points) Titanic is a romantic film, which was directed by James Cameron. However, it’s also about a disaster. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Bukater. Jack saves Rose from killing herself during the journey on board the ship. Although they are from different social classes, and Rose is already engaged, they fall in love. The film has a sad ending: the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack. Critics say it is a must-see. I agree because the story is moving and the acting is excellent. The special effects, visuals and music are also incredible. 1. What kind of film is Titanic? ………………………………………………………………….……………… 2. Who does Titanic star? …………………………………………………………………………….…… 3. What is Titanic about? …………………………………………………………………………….…… 4. How is the ending of Titanic? ………………………………………………………………………….………

PART 5: WRITING

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

312

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Question : Complete each sentence so it means the same as the sentence above. ( 2 points) 1. The distance from Ha Noi to Thanh Hoa City is about 100 kilometres. It is about…………………................................................................................. 2. Although Quang Hai -footballer is so young , he plays football beautifully. Despite ...................................................................................................................... 3.My father lived in small village when he was a child. My father used to …………………………………………..………………..…….. 4. What is the distance between Thanh Hoa and Ha Noi city? How far……………………………………………………………………….….? The end

Date of planning: Apr 12th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 19th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 19th ,2019 Period 99 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 313

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 Lesson 1: Getting started (P.58-59)

I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘An overcrowded world’. - Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about a holiday story 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about causes and effects of overpopulation. - Understand and actively respond to questions about Brazil. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not know much information about problems connected to overcrowded area. - Provide them some useful information. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (5’/IW) Brainstorming

Contents and Board Display UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 1: Getting started (P.58-59)

T writes the word ‘population’ on the board. T makes sure Ss know the meaning of A. GETTING STARTED this word by either giving the equivalent A holiday story Vietnamese word or writing: Ex: There are 5 million people in Ha Noi. → Ha Noi has a population of 5 million. T asks Ss if they know the population of any area in the country or in the world. Once the Ss have done it, add the prefix “over” and elicit the meaning of this newly-formed word from Ss. II. NEW LESSON 1.Listen and read (12’/IW/PW) 1. Listen and read Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

314

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

*Vocabulary: Overcrowded (adj): đông nghịt Overpopulation (n): dân số quá đông Slum (n): Khu nhà ổ chuột Peaceful (adj): thanh bình Crime (n): tội phạm • What is the conversation about? Commit crime: phạm tội • What do you think Brazil is like? Healthcare (n): chăm sóc sức khỏe Wealthy (adj): giàu có • Do you think Phuong likes Brazil? Diverse (adj): đa dạng, khác • What can you find about Rio/Brazil Lawful (adj): hợp pháp, đúng pháp luật > < Unlawful in this conversation? Spacious (adj): rộng rãi Ss guess the answers. T plays the recording twice.

T asks Ss to look at the title of the text and the pictures and ask them prediction question about what they are going to read. The questions may be:

Ss listen then practice the conversation. in pairs. T checks some pairs. T gives some vocab. Ss listen and repeat, Check.(what and where) *Practice: 1.a Read the conversation again, and tick true (T) or false (F). Ss work independently. T asks them to read the sentences and decide if they are true or false. Ss compare answers with a partner. Have Ss correct the false sentences. T writes the correct answers on the board. 1b. Read the conversation again. Find a word or phrase to match the following. Ask Ss to read the definitions in the exercise and try to find the words without checking the text. Ss refer to the dialogue again for the correct words. T corrects the answers as a class.

*Practice: 1.a Read the conversation again, and tick true (T) or false (F). *Key: 1. T 2. T 3. F 4. T 5. F

1b. Read the conversation again. Find a word or phrase to match the following. *Key: 1. diverse 2. wealthy 3. major 4. slums 5. crime

2.Match the words in the box with the pictures. Then listen and repeat the words. (6’/IW/PW)

2.Match the words in the box with the pictures. Then listen and repeat the words. Ss work independently to label the pictures. *Key: 1. a 2. c 3. b Have them compare their answers with a 4. e 5. d partner. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

315

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 T plays the recording and have Ss repeat the words.T gives the correction if necessary. 3. Use some of the words in 2 to describe a person or a place you know.(6’/IW) Ss complete the exercise independently. T calls some Ss to share their sentences with the class. T can choose some good sentences and write them on the board for other Ss to learn from. Encourage Ss to make as many sentences as possible. 4. Work in groups. Make a list of the problems which you think are connected to an overcrowded area. (8’/GW) In groups, Ss think of the problems and make a list of them.If Ss have difficulty, suggest that they look for problems in their daily life at their own classes, schools, homes, areas or any other places they know for the answers. - T goes around to help weaker ss. -T corrects. III. WRAPPING-UP (6’) T calls each group to report their list to the class. T may help write the problems on the board. Ask the class if they agree or not. Encourage them to give an explanation to their answers. Then move on to the next group and do the same..Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

3. Use some of the words in 2 to describe a person or a place you know. Example: I visit my native village every year. I love the peaceful atmosphere there.

4. Work in groups. Make a list of the problems which you think are connected to an overcrowded area. Example: There is not enough space to play in.

5. Share your list with the class and see if they agree with you.

III. HOMEWORK - Learn the new words. - Practice listening more at home. - Review the lesson. - Do B1,4 /P44,45 - WB

V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... .... Date of planning: Apr 16th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 22nd,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 22nd ,2019 Period 100 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.60-61) I. OBJECTIVES: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

316

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘An overcrowded world’. - Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer - Pronunciation : mark the stress on two-and three- syllable words and pronoun them correctly. 2. Skills: Listening, reading and speaking about causes and effects of overpopulation. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more about causes and effects of overpopulation. - Understand and actively respond to problems of overpopulation. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, recording, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS -Students may get confused when marking stress. - Explain carefully and Provide further information. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD * Chatting Lesson 2: A closer look 1 (P.60-61) T asks ss some questions about the *Chatting population of Hai phong and Ha noi. Ss can tell some differences in life of Haiphong and Hanoi (advantages and disadvantages) II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary (17’/IW/PW)

I.Vocabulary Teacher uses different techniques to teach Dense (adj): dày đặc, đông đúc vocab (situation, realia) shortage (n): sự thiếu hụt nutrition (n): dinh dưỡng Repeat in chorus and individually malnutrition (n): suy dinh dưỡng Copy all the words spread (v): lan tràn, phát tán 1.Listen and number the words in the order 1.Listen and number the words in the order you hear them. you hear them. *Key: 1. crime 2. malnutrition T plays the recording. 3. poverty 4. shortage Ss listen to the recording and number the 6. space words. Ss listen again and repeat the words. 5. disease 7. dense 8. Healthcare - T corrects their pronunciation Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

317

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

T calls some ss to translate the phrases to make sure they all know the meaning. T gives the correction if necessary. 2.Complete the sentences with the words from 1. Ss work individually then compare in pairs. Teacher gives feedback.

2.Complete the sentences with the words from 1. *Key: 1. healthcare 2. crime 4. Malnutrition Encourage Ss to explain why they choose 3. Diseae 5. poverty that word for the sentence. T corrects. 3. Match a cause with its effect. 3. Match a cause with its effect. T can give an example of causes and effects. Example: a. He had an accident. √ Write the example on the board and ask Ss He drove which one is the effect. b. He felt hungry. fast Ss work independently or in pairs. When *Key: they have finished, let them exchange their 1.b 2. a 3. f answers with a partner/another pair. T then 4. d 5. c 6.e gives correct answer. T may ask Ss to explain why. 4. Work in groups. Think of some problems 4.Work in groups. Think of some for each place below and write them under problems for each place below and write the place. Share your ideas with the class. them under the place. Share your ideas In groups, Ss discuss to find out which with the class. problems each place may have. *Suggested answers: T collects Ss’ answers and write them on the a.Lack of entertainment, few board. opportunities for employment, not enough services. The whole class look at the problems and discuss for agreement/disagreement b.Poverty, slums, disease, pollution, unempoyment, poor healthcare. c. Noise/ air pollution, crime, overcrowded, shortage of accommodation. II. Pronunciation (15’/IW/PW) II. Pronunciation Word stress: Word stress: 5.Listen and mark the stress in the words. 5.Listen and mark the stress in the T plays the recording words. Ss listen and mark the stressed syllables. *Key: T corrects the answers. Have Ss listen again s’pacious Po’llution ‘poverty and repeat the words. ‘stressful ‘hungry Nu’trition T guides them to study Look out! In’crease (v) Su’pport ‘violence Di’sease ‘healthcare T writes two pairs of the word ‘supply’ and ‘shortage Look out! ‘question’ on the board, denoting one is a Some two-syllable words can be a noun verb and one is a noun. Ask some Ss to read or a verb. The tress changes when the Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

318

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 them. Ask other Ss to listen and see if they can find the difference in pronunciation of the two words. 6. Listen and repeat each pair. Mark the stress on the words in the table: T plays the recording twice. Ss listen and repeat the words.

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 use of the word change. Key: su’pply (n), su’pply (v); ‘question (n), ‘question (v). 6. Listen and repeat each pair. Mark the stress on the words in the table: *Key: As a noun

III. WRAPPING-UP (5’) T asks ss some questions about the lesson they’ve learnt. -Summarize the main points of the lesson IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

As a verb

‘record

re‘cord

‘picture

‘answer

pa’rade

Su’pport

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Practice the two sound more at home. -Review the lesson. - Do A1, A2, B2,3/P.43,45-W.B

Date of planning: Apr 18th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 25th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 25th ,2019 Period 101 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.61-62) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng 319

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘An overcrowded world’. - Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer 2. Skills: Reading, speaking, and writing about problems of overcrowded places. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more bout problems of overcrowded places. - Understand and actively respond to grammatical issues. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may get confused with tag questions - Guide them to study the Grammar Box carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD * Chatting Lesson 3: A closer look 2 (P.61-62) - Teacher asks ss some questions about their daily life II. NEW LESSON I.Grammar . Comparisons of quantifiers. (17’/IW/PW/GW) Remind Ss of items they learnt in the previous lessons. + words of quantifiers (many,a little…) + countable and uncountable nouns. + imperatives with “more”, “less”, and “fewer”. Have Ss read the sentences and the rules in the table. Ask Ss to add more words to the table for each type of comparison. 2a. Read the information for the two cities . Ss complete the reading independently .Encourage Ss to observe and recognise that both tables include the same kinds of information. 2b.Read the comparisons of the two cities, and decide if they are true. If they are not, correct them. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

I.Grammar: Comparisons of quantifiers. 1. Read the sentences. - more + Nu/Ns + than… - less + Nu + than… - fewer + Ns + than….

2a. Read the information for the two cities . Eg: In Brumba, there are more people per square kilometre than in Crystal. ……………………………………… 2b.Read the comparisons of the two cities, and decide if they are true. If they are not, correct them. *Key: Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 320

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Ss complete this exercise by referring to the imformation in 2a. They can then share their answers with their partners T asks ss to explain why a sentence is incorrect and has them correct it.

1. Correct 2. Incorrect. In Brumba, more people live in slums. 3. Incorrect. People in Crystal earn more per day. 4. Correct. 5. Correct. 3.Fill the sentences with more, less or 3.Fill the sentences with more, less or fewer. fewer. Ss complete this exercise independently *Key: T checks and makes comments. 1. fewer 2. more 3. more 4. fewer 5. Less Tag- questions. (16’/IW/PW/GW) Tag- questions. T asks ss to study the example and focus on Example: how tag questions are formed. A: You are Phuong, aren’t you? Have Ss read the conversation B: Yes, I am A: And you play for our school football team, don’t you. B: No, I don’t * Remember: - A tag questions is a short questions. It follows a statement. It’s added at the end, after a comma. * Note: - A positive sentence has a negative tag. - A negative sentence has a positive tag. 4. Check if the tags are correct. If they are not, correct them. Ss do this exercise independently. Then they share their answers with a partner. T checks and writes the correct tags on the board.

5.Choose one of the question tags in the box to complete each blank in the interview. Ss do this exercise independently. Then they share their answers with a partner. T checks the answers as class and ask them to explain their choice.. T calls 2 students to practice the dialogue. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

4. Check if the tags are correct. If they are not, correct them. *Key: 1. Incorrect….do you? – don’t you? 2. Incorrect…isn’t it ?- doesn’t it? 3. Correct 4. Correct 5. Incorrect…is it?- isn’t it? 6. Incorrect…can’t they?- can they? 5.Choose one of the question tags in the box to complete each blank in the interview. *Key: 1. don’t they 2. isn’t it? 3. can’t we? 4. is it? 321

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

III.WRAPPING-UP (5’) Summarize the main points of the lesson. T asks ss some questions to make sure they’ve learnt the lesson well. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do part B5,6,7/ P.46- W.B. -Review the lesson.

Date of planning: Apr 19th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 26th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 26th ,2019 Period 102 CORRECTING THE FOURTH 45-MINUTE TEST I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary :read, write and understand the words - Language : The grammar they have learnt Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 322

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2.Skills: Reading, speaking, and writing about the disadvantages of being in an overcrowded place. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more bout problems of overcrowded places. - Understand and actively respond to questions about two places of HongKong and Mauritania. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: , laptop, T.V Students: III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak Ss may find it difficult to express their idea. - T encourages them to practise with a better student. IV. PROCEDURE:

PART 1: LISTENING

I. Listen to the passage and tick (V) true ( T ) or false (F) ( 1point) 1 2

T X X X

X X

PART 3 : VOCABULARY & GRAMMAR

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

A. entertaining B. entertain C. entertainment D. entertained 5. __________ the story of the film was good, I didn’t like the acting. A. Because B. Since C. As D. Although 6. ____________ is La Tomatina celebrated? – Every August. A. Where B. Why C. When D. Which 7.The boys _______ home for lunch because they are planning to visit the hydro power station. A. have not come B. do not come C. will not be coming D. is not coming 8.They ___________ that we have gone without telling them. A. thought B. are thinking C. will be thinking D. think II. Put the correct form of the verb in brackets. (1 points) 1.Nam often PLAYS soccer in the afternoon. 2.My father used to GO swimming when he was a child. 3. By 2020, people in Viet Nam WILL HAVE SPENT a lot of money on heating. 4. At 5 o’clock tomorrow Nam WILL BE PLAYING football with his friends.

PART 4: READING I. Read the text and choose the best answers. (1 points) SAFETY TIPS FOR BUS PASSENGERS Always maintain a queue while waiting (1)______ a bus. Never stand on queue on the middle of the road. At the time of boarding a bus do not try to run or chase the bus. Once you are inside the bus, (2)______ a seat and hold firmly on the handrail if you are standing. Never try to (3)______ an overcrowded bus. Avoid (4)______ inside of a bus because your high-pitch noise may distract the attention of the driver and it could lead to a major road accident. 1.A.for B.to C.on D.in 2.A.hold B.sit C.take D.find 3.A.choose B.go C.wait D.board 4.A.shout B.shouting C.to shout D.shouts II: Read the passage and answer the questions. (1 points) Titanic is a romantic film, which was directed by James Cameron. However, it’s also about a disaster. It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage. The main characters are Jack Dawson and Rose Dewitt Bukater. Jack saves Rose from killing herself during the journey on board the ship. Although they are from different social classes, and Rose is already engaged, they fall in love. The film has a sad ending: the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack. Critics say it is a must-see. I agree because the story is moving and the acting is excellent. The special effects, visuals and music are also incredible. 1. What kind of film is Titanic? Titanic is a romantic film 2. Who does Titanic star? Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 324

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

It stars Leonardo DiCaprio and Kate Winslet. 3. What is Titanic about? The film is about the sinking of the ship Titanic on its first voyage 4. How is the ending of Titanic? the Titanic sinks and more than a thousand people die in the disaster, including Jack.

Date of planning: Apr 19th , 2019 Date of teaching 7A: Apr 26th,2019 Date of teaching 7B: Apr 26th ,2019 Period 103 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 4: Communication (P.63) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary :read, write and understand the words : densely populated, density, physician ,slavery Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

325

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

- Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer 2.Skills: Reading, speaking, and writing about the disadvantages of being in an overcrowded place. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more bout problems of overcrowded places. - Understand and actively respond to questions about two places of HongKong and Mauritania. - Form and improve such competencies as pairwork, teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak Ss may find it difficult to express their idea. - T encourages them to practise with a better student. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (4’/IW) UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD T asks ss to tell some disadvantages of being an Lesson 4: Communication (P.63) overcrowded place. * Chatting II. NEW LESSON I.Vocabulary (5’/IW/WC) T refers to words in the Extra Vocabulary box. Ask Ss to try to guess what the meaning of each word is. T does not give answers at this time. Wait until Ss do the reading. Ask Ss to guess the meaning of each word in the context. II.Practice: 1. Look at the pictures and discuss: . (6’/IW/PW) -. Ss complete the exercise independently. When Ss have finished, T divides Ss into pairs and asks them to compare their answers. Ss might have different answers. Write their answers on the board for use in 3 .

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

326

I.Vocabulary densely populated (adj): physician (n): slavery (n): density (n): II.Practice: 1. Look at the pictures and discuss: 1. What places they are? 2. How they are different? Make a list of your ides and share them with your class.

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

2. Match the words below in the places in 1. 2.Match the words below in the places in . (6’/PW) 1. Ss complete the exercise independently. T asks • Suggested answers. them to explain their choice. Group 1: high living standard, clean water, densely- populated, good education, crime Group 2: Poor healthcare, crime, malnutrition, hunger. 3. Read the information about the two places.(8’/IW) . T can tell Ss that their readings are providing the same kinds of information. To help less advanced Ss, T can draw a table on the board with the information like this:. T asks Ss to fill the table with the information before they talk about the differences. T encourages Ss to guess the meanings of extra vocabulary. T check Ss'understanding of these words & gives definitions for any word that Ss still don't understand. 4. Work in pairs. Use the information given in 3 to talk about the ways that the two places are different. (10’/PW) Encourage Ss to talk about the differences (The table on the board) T calls some pairs to share their ideas with the. class III. WRAPPING-UP (4’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson.

3. Read the information about the two places. Facts Mauritania Hong Kong Area Population Density Economy Healthcare Problem Result Unusual facts

IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework.

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do C1,2 /P.47- W.B. -Review the lesson.

- Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

4. Work in pairs. Use the information given in 3 to talk about the ways that the two places are different. EX: The population of Mauritania is very small, only over three million people. Hongkong is much larger. It has more than seven million people.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

327

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Preparing date: 12.04. 2017 Teaching date: 7B9,7B6 ............................................... Period 100 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.64) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘An overcrowded world’. - Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer 2. Skills: Reading for specific information about the population explosion and talking about the disadvantages of being in an overcrowded place. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more bout problems of overcrowded places. - Understand and actively respond to questions about five cities. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to express their ideas. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities I. WARM UP (5’/IW)

Contents and Board Display UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 5: Skills 1 (P.64) *Network

*Network T asks ss to work in 2 groups to write as many names of big cities in the world that they know as possible.. Ss work in 2 groups to do. T checks and comments. II. NEW LESSON I.READING (18’/IW/PW) I.READING 1. Look at the list of cities below. Which do 1. Look at the list of cities below. Which do you think has the largest population? Share you think has the largest population? Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 328

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

your ideas with your partner. T asks Ss to look at the list in1 and see if they have appeared in their list on the board. Ss discuss the question in pairs and then as a class. Allow Ss to come up with any guess es as long as they make meaning. For more advanced Ss, T can discussion on see how much Ss know bout these cities and why they think they are large. 2.Read the passage below and check your answer. - Teacher use different techniques to teach vocabulary (situation, realia, examples) - Follow the seven steps of teaching vocab. * Checking vocab: Matching - Ss quickly read the passage for specific information in order to put the cities in the order of their population size only (Guide Ss quickly look through the passage for the part where the names of the cities appear instead of reading the whole passage. ) T checks. 3. Read the passage again. Choose the correct heading for each paragraph. - Ss read each part of the passage and choose the correct heading for it. Ss exchangge their answers. Allow them some time to explation to one another about their choice. T checks the answers as a class. 4.Read the passage again and choose the best answer A, B or C. Ss read the passage again and do the exercise independently. T may guide Ss to look for the key words which can help them find the part of the passage where the information for the answers is given. E.g: question 1 asks about the growth of the world's population. The answers can be found in paragraph 1 under the heading ' Population explosion' II. SPEAKING (15’/PW) 5. Work in groups. Look at the places below and discuss some possible disadvantages that people using them may have. - Ss work in groups. T asks Ss to go through the three pictures of Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

329

Share your ideas with your partner. * Example: A: I think London is the number one, isn’t it? B: I don’t think so. I think Shanghai is the biggest.

2.Read the passage below and check your answer. *Vocabulary: (n): -growth (n): -megacity - block (v): *Key: 1. Tokyo 3. Jakarta

2. Shanghai 4. Manila

5. London

3.Read the passage again. Choose the correct heading for each paragraph. *Key: 1. B 2. D 3. C 4. A

4.Read the passage again and choose the best answer A, B or C. *Key: 1. C 2. A 3. C 4. C 5.B

II. SPEAKING 5. Work in groups. Look at the places below and discuss some possible disadvantages that people using them may have. *Suggested answers: Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 different places and note down the problems they can find for each place. For less advanced Ss, T can assign each place for a different group so that they can concentrate on one job only. T goes around and helps Ss with any new words they need. When they have finished, ask a representative from each group to report their findings to the class. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 1. An overcrowded school: not enough playing ground, big classes. less individual care , not enough study aids… 2. 1. An overcrowded bus: not enough seats for everybody, stuffy/ not enough fresh air, long wait at the bus stops… 3. An overcrowded block of flats: noise, shortage of water, little space…

III. HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do D1,2,3/P.47-48– W.B. -Review the lesson.

Preparing date: 12.04. 2017 Teaching date: 7B9,7B6 ............................................... Period 101 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.65) I. OBJECTIVES: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Lexical items related to the topic ‘An overcrowded world’. - Language : Tag questions Comparisons of quantifiers: more, less, fewer 2. Skills: Listening for specific information in a film review and writing a short passage about the population growth of an area. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Know more bout problems of overcrowded places. - Understand and actively respond to questions about a film related to slums. - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, the recording, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 330

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Weak students may find it difficult to write about the change. - Guide them carefully. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/GW) UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 6 : Skills 2 (P.65) * Chatting Teacher asks ss some questions about their favorite films. II. NEW LESSON I. LISTENING(18’/IW/PW) 1. Look at the film poster below. What do you think the film is about? Ask Ss to look at the poster. Ask questions to get as much information from the poster as possible. 2.Listen to the film review and check your ideas. T plays the recording - Ss listen to the recording and check their answers/ guesses. 3. Listen again and answer the questions. - Ask ss to read the questions first to see what information they need to answer the questions. Ss listen and answer the question. They then compare their notes with a partner. T checks

I. LISTENING 1. Look at the film poster below. What do you think the film is about? • Have you ever seen this film? • Who is the main character? • What is it about? Where do you think the story happens? . 2.Listen to the film review and check your ideas.

3. Listen again and answer the questions. * Key : 1. The film is based on a book called Q &A. 2. The main character of the film is a boy from an Indian slum. 3. He wins a lot of money on an Indian game show. 4. Because he is a boy from the slums. 5. The film looks beautiful, is full of emotion and is gripping. II. Writing. 4.Read the passage about the slum featured in ‘Slumdog Millionaire’

II. Writing.(15’/IW) 4.Read the passage about the slum featured in ‘Slumdog Millionaire’ - T allows Ss 4-5 minutes to read the passage of Dharavi slums. T asks them to underline words/phrases to describe Dharavi slums or to show the change in its population. T can write these on the board as a guide to Ss for the next writing exercise. For example: …one of the largest slums, … In 1950, the population was around 100,000 people. Since then… 5. Look at the chart below. It shows the 5. Look at the chart below. It shows the population change in Ho Chi Minh City over population change in Ho Chi Minh City Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

331

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7 the pasyt 30 years.Write a short paragraph describing the change. Use the passage in 4 to help you. - T tells Ss that it's time to write the paragraph describing the change in population in Ho Chi Minh City, using the ideas they generated in the previous exercise. If there is not enough time to write the paragraph in class, T can assign it for homework.. III. WRAPPING-UP (5’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019 over the pasyt 30 years.Write a short paragraph describing the change. Use the passage in 4 to help you.

* HOMEWORK -Learn the new words. - Do E1,2/P.49 – W.B. -Review the lesson. -Complete the writing describing the change inpopulation in HCM city.

V. Feedback : ............................................................................................................................................... ..

Preparing date: 12.04. 2017 Teaching date: 7B6,7B9 ............................................... Period 102 UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.66-67) I. OBJECTIVES: Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ 332

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to: 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review - Language: Review 2. Skills: Reading, speaking and writing about the robots and their ability. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Love modern life and learn harder to have a better life. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have enough time to do project. - Guide them and let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities Contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (5’/IW) UNIT 12. AN OVERCROWDED WORLD Lesson 7: Looking back and Project (P.66Teacher asks ss about their condition of living. 67) II. NEW LESSON I. Vocabulary: (10’/IW/PW) 1.Match the words with their definitions - Ss can repeat the words in the box as a review for pronunciation. Next, Ss can complete this exercise independently. T checks.

I. Vocabulary: 1.Match the words with their definitions * Key: 1.E 2. B 3. C 4. D 5.A

2. Write a sentence for each of the following 2. Write a sentence for each of the word following word - Encourage Ss to think creatively. They may get away from the content of the unit about over population and use these words in different context. For example: Nobody wants to live in poverty OR You can live long if you have a good healthcare system. - T goes around while Ss are writing and help them with any difficult words. When Ss have finished, T can choose some original/ interesting sentences and asks Ss write them on the board. Give feedback.

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

333

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

II. Grammar (10’/IW/PW) 3. Put an appropriate tag questions at the end of each sentence. Then match the questions to their answers. -Ss do exercises individually then check the answers with their partners. - T checks with the whole class

II. Grammar 3. Put an appropriate tag questions at the end of each sentence. Then match the questions to their answers. * Key: 1. We have more tourists this year, don't we? a. No, we have fewer than last year! 2. You got stuck in a traffic jam on the way home, didn't you, mum? e. Yes, as always, dear. 3. There will be a solution to this shortage of clean water, won't there? c. I hope there will. 4. We should do something to reduce poverty, shouldn't we? d. Yes, we should. But how? 5. Big cities suffer more from air pollution, don't they? b. Yes, they do, particularly big cities in 4 . Look at the situation and complete the China effects with more, fewer or less. -T asks Ss to do the exercise individually. Check 4 . Look at the situation and complete the the answers with their partners. effects with more, fewer or less. - T checks with the whole class. * Key: 1.more 2.more 3.more 4. less III. Communication (5’/PW) III. Communication 5.I’ve got more! 5.I’ve got more! Work in groups. Look at the situations and Work in groups. Look at the situations and talk about their possible effects. talk about their possible effects. - Ask Ss to read the example situation. T writes' I will' and' I can' on the board to remind Ss that they can use them to talk about possible *Finished!.................................. effects. Ss then work on situations 1 and 2 independently. For less advanced Ss, allow them to work in pairs or groups. T calls some Ss to report their ideas. IV. Project (10’) IV. Project The world we live in. The world we live in. -T divides the class into groups of four or five. Each group searches for an under-populated place.Then note down some facts about the place: Which place it is; What life is like there; What can be the cause(s) of this small population. - Teacher guides and sets this activity as h.w Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

334

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

III. WRAPPING-UP (3’/IW) *Summarize the main point of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

III. HOMEWORK -Review the lesson. - Do Project and review 4

............................................................................................................................................... .. Preparing date: 18.04. 2017 Teaching date: 7A3 ............................................... Period 103 REVIEW 4- LANGUAGE I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review: The lexical items they’ve learnt in Unit 10-11-12. - Grammar: Review: The conditional sentence Type 1, The simple future. 2. Skills: Speaking, writing, Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Get ready for the final test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: text books, laptop, T.V. Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercise. - Let them do at home. IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (6’/GW) REVIEW 4 – LANGUAGE Brainstorm about language items and skills of Stressed syllable the three units.

What you have learnt in units 10-12? The simple future II. NEW LESSON. I. PRONUNCIATION: (5’/IW) Ex1 : Listen to the conversation and mark the rising of falling intonation for each Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

Passive Voice

I. PRONUNCIATION: Ex1 : Listen to the conversation and mark the rising of falling intonation for 335

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

question. T asks Ss to remind the rules for rising and falling intonation in a question. T plays the recording. Ss listen and read after. T checks and gives comments. II. VOCABULARY(8’/IW/GW) Ex 2. Form a suitable word from the word stem to fill the sentences. - T asks ss to look at the sentences and decide what kind of word is needed for each sentence. Ss work separately to find the clue and share their answers with their partners. -Ss give answers then teacher corrects. Ex 3. Choose A, B or C to complete sentences -T asks Ss to do the exercise individually. -Ss share their answers with a partner. -T corrects.

III. GRAMMAR (15’/IW) Ex4. Use the verbs in brackets in the future simple active (wil do) or the future simple passive (will be done) to complete the sentences. - T asks ss to look at the subject and the verb to decide if it is active or passive. Ss work in pair to discuss. -T corrects and asks ss to explain if necessary. IV.EVERYDAY ENGLISH (5’/PW) Ex 5. Put the sentences in the right order to form a conversation. T asks Ss to work in pairs to order the dialogue and practise saying the dialogue together. Ss practice in pairs. III.WRAPPING –UP (4’) T summarizes the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully

each question.

II. VOCABULARY Ex 2. Form a suitable word from the word stem to fill the sentences. * Key: 1. solution 2. crowded 3. driverless 4. Inventions 5. healthier Ex 3. Choose A, B or C to complete sentences *Key: 1. A. energy source 2. B.reuse 3. A. solar energy 4. B. teleporter 5. A. supplied III. GRAMMAR Ex4. Use the verbs in brackets in the future simple active (wil do) or the future simple passive (will be done) to complete the sentences. *Key: 1. will fly 2. will be used 3. will be demolished 4. will have 5. will invent. IV.EVERYDAY ENGLISH Ex 5. Put the sentences in the right order to form a conversation. *Key: 1. c 2. g 3. a 4. i 5.e 6. f 7. h 8. d 9. j 10. b HOMEWORK -Review Unit 10-11-12 -Prepare for the next lesson Skills. -Do the “Test yourself 4: Exercise 1, 2 ,3 ,4 (P.48-50/ WB)

V. Feedback : Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

336

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

............................................................................................................................................... ..

Preparing date: 18.04. 2017 Teaching date: 7B6,&b9 ............................................... Period 104 REVIEW 4- SKILLS I. OBJECTIVES: -By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to 1. Knowledge: - Vocabulary : Review. - Grammar: Review. 2. Skills: Review skills they’ve learnt in Unit 10,11,12: Speaking, writing. Listening, Reading. 3. Attitude and competencies: - Get ready for the final test. - Understand and actively respond to lexical and grammatical points they’ve learnt - Form and improve such competencies as teamwork, communication, presentation , collaboration and assessment. II. PREPARATIONS: Teacher: Text books, laptop, recording, T.V. Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

337

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Students: Text books and workbooks. III. ANTICIPATED PROBLEMS AND SOLUTIONS - Students may not have time to do all the exercises. - Let them do at home, IV. PROCEDURE: Teacher and Students' activities contents and Board Display I. WARM UP (3’/IW) REVIEW 4- SKILLS T asks ss some questions about the topic they’ve learnt in Unit 10-11-12 SKILLS

II. NEW LESSON. I. READING (8’IW/PW)

I. READING : HUNGER

Ex1: Which of the causes of hunger below do you think is the most serious in your country?. Tick it.

T gives some suggestions ( drought, hurricane, flood) Ex2: Read the text and choose the best answer for each question. KEY :

- Ss give their ideas.

Ex2: Read the text and choose the best answer for each question. - Ss do individually and check their answers 1.A with a partner before giving their answers to T.

2.B

3.B

T has ss explain where they find the clues to the answers. T confirms the correct answers. II. SPEAKING:

II. SPEAKING: (12’/PW) Ex 3 :GAME

Ex 3 :GAME +Example: Ss work in pairs S1 choose one of the world in the list below and S1: ( has chosen the word ‘coal’) S2: Is it a noun? keep it secret. S2 asks questions to find out which word S1 has S1: Yes, it is chosen.The questions does not contain any of S2: Does it have colour? S1: Yes, it does the words in the list. S2: What colour is it? Ss work in pairs, discussing the questions in 3. S1: It’s black. - T goes around to help weaker Ss. S2: Is it ‘coal’ S1: Yes, it is. III.LISTENING (8’/IW) III.LISTENING Ex.4 Which words ( A, B or C) do you think is closest in meaning to the word ‘footprint’ Ss their ideas. T asks ss to give example about ‘footprint’ Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

338

Ex.4 Which words ( A, B or C) do you think is closest in meaning to the word ‘footprint’ *Key: A Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

Ex.5 Listen to the conversation and answer the questions. - Ss read the questions carefully. T plays the recording. -Ss listen and write the answers. -Ss give their answers and listen again to check. Play the recording again for Ss to check their answers. IV. WRITING (8’/IW) Ex 6:Imagine an ideal means of transport for YOUR area. Write a short description of it. - Set up the writing activity. T reminds Ss that the first most important thing is always to think about what they are going to write. In this case, Ss may use the ideas given in the unit 11 or their own ideas. - Teacher brainstorms with Ss for the language necessary for writing and note some useful expressions and language on the board. - Have Ss write the draft first, then ask them to write their final version in class or at home. III.WRAPPING –UP (4’) T summarizes the main points of the lesson. IV. HOMEWORK (2’) - T assigns the homework. - Ss copy their homework. - T explains it carefully V. Feedback :

Ex.5 Listen to the conversation and answer the questions.

IV. WRITING Ex 6:Imagine an ideal means of transport for YOUR area. Write a short description of it. Suggestion.

HOMEWORK -Review from unit 7 to unit 12. -Prepare to do the final test.

............................................................................................................................................... ............................................................................................................................................... ...........................................

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

339

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ

Gi¸o ¸n TiÕng Anh 7

Gi¸o viªn: NguyÔn Huy C−êng

N¨m häc 2018 - 2019

340

Tr−êng THCS S Du LÔ